volume 1 of 1 project manual - connecticut · 2018. 4. 4. · project manual (minor capital...

SECTION 00 01 01 TITLE PAGE

PAGE 1 OF 1

CT DAS – 5000 (Rev. 06.25.15) PROJECT NO.: BI-NN-665

Connecticut

/ Division of Construction Services

Volume 1 of 1

Project Manual

Improvements to 40 Shore Road 40 Shore Road, Waterford, CT

Project No.: BI-NN-665

Prepared By:

242 Trumbull Street

Hartford, CT 06103

Melody A. Currey - Commissioner Department of Administrative Services

Division of Construction Services

Building Design & Construction 165 Capitol Avenue Hartford, CT 06106

http://www.amentaemma.com/

SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE

PAGE 1 OF 1


Improvements to 40 Shore Road 40 Shore Road Waterford, CT

Project No.: BI-NN-665

Prepared By:

AMENTA | EMMA ARCHITECTS 242 Trumbull Street Hartford, CT 06103

Seals & Signatures Seals & Signatures

(Print Consultant Name) (Print Consultant Name)





SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PROJECT MANUAL (Minor Capital Projects Less Than $5,000,000)

Page 1 of 9


VOLUME 1 of 1

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Section No. Title Page

Count Not

Used

00 01 01 Project Title Page 1 00 01 07 Seals Page 1 00 01 10 Table of Contents 9 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 1 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid Insert 00 21 19 Notice To Bidders Insert

00 30 00 Available Information 00 31 19.26 Existing Conditions Survey 00 31 24.13 Soil Contamination Report

00 31 26.23 General Survey for Asbestos Containing Material & Lead-Based Paint 1

00 31 26.29 Existing PCB Information 1 00 31 32.13 Subsurface Geotechnical Report 00 31 33.11 Elevator Agreement

00 40 14 Certificate (of Authority) (submit with Bid Proposal) 2 00 40 15 DAS Pre-qualification Forms (Not Used for <$500,000) 00 41 00 Bid Proposal Form Insert 00 43 16 Standard Bid Bond Form (submit with Bid Proposal) Insert 00 45 14 General Contractor Bidder’s Qualification Statement (submit with Bid Proposal) Insert 00 45 15 Objective Criteria for Evaluating Qualifications of Bidders Insert 00 45 17 Named Subcontractor Bidder’s Qualification Statement (Not Used for <$500,000) 00 52 03 Contract Insert 00 52 73 Subcontract Agreement Form (Not Used for <$500,000) 00 62 16 Certificate of Insurance Insert

00 62 16.1 Asbestos Attachment to Acord Form Insert 00 72 13 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction – For Design-Bid-Build 25

00 72 13.1 Supplementary Conditions 1 00 73 27 Set-Aside Contractor Schedule (Not Used for <$500,000) 00 73 38 CHRO Contract Compliance Regulations Insert 00 73 44 Prevailing Wage Rates/Contractor’s Wage Certification/Payroll Certification Insert 00 73 63 Security Requirements Insert 00 92 10 Additional Forms To be Submitted After Bond Commission Funding Approval Insert 00 92 20 Executive Orders Insert

00 92 30 Procedures Regarding Taxation for Nonresident General/Prime Contractor and Subcontractors Insert



Page 2 of 9


VOLUME 1 of 1 (continued)

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section No. Title Page Count

Not Used

01 10 00 SUMMARY 6

01 11 00 Summary of Work - 01 11 13 Work Covered By Contract Documents - 01 12 16 Work Sequence - Phase(s); - 01 12 19 Contract Interface - 01 14 00 Work Restrictions - 01 14 16 Coordination With Occupants - 01 14 23 Subcontractor Evaluations -

01 20 00 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 12

01 21 00 Allowances - 01 22 00 Unit Prices - General - 01 22 13 Unit Price Schedules - Earth And Rock Excavation - 01 22 16 Unit Price Schedule - Miscellaneous - 01 22 19 Unit Price Schedule - Alterations - 01 23 00 Supplemental Bids - 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures - 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures - 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures -

01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 18

01 31 13 Project Coordination - 01 31 19 Project Meetings - 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules - 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation - 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures - 01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures - 01 35 19 Confined Space Entry - 01 35 53 Security Procedures -

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 8

01 42 16 Definitions - 01 42 19 Reference Standards - 01 45 00 Quality Control - 01 45 23 Testing For Indoor Air Quality, Baseline IAQ, & Materials -



Page 3 of 9


DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

Section No. Title Page

Count Not

Used

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 7

01 51 13 Temporary Electricity And Lighting - 01 51 16 Temporary Fire Protection - 01 51 23 Temporary Heating, Cooling And Ventilating - 01 51 33 Temporary Telecommunications - 01 51 36 Temporary Water - 01 52 13 Field Offices And Sheds - 01 52 19 Temporary Sanitary Facilities - 01 54 00 Construction Aids - 01 55 13 Temporary Access Roads - 01 55 16 Haul Routes - 01 56 00 Temporary Barriers And Enclosures - 01 56 43 Temporary Protection - 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls - 01 57 21 Environmental Management - 01 57 23 Temporary Storm Water Control - 01 57 30 Indoor Environmental Control - 01 57 40 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan - 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage -

01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1

01 60 00 Product Requirements -

01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 17

01 71 23 Field Engineering - 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching - 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning - 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management & Disposal - 01 75 00 Starting And Adjusting - 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures - 01 78 23 Operation And Maintenance Data - 01 78 30 Warranties And Bonds -

01 80 00 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 0

01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements -

01 90 00 LIFE CYCLE ACTIVITIES 0

01 91 00 Commissioning -



Page 4 of 9


VOLUME 1 of 1 (continued)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS Not Used


024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 6

DIVISION 03 CONCRETE Not Used


DIVISION 04 MASONRY Not Used


DIVISION 05 METALS Not Used


055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 6 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 7

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Not Used


061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 6 064113 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 6

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Not Used


079200 JOINT SEALANTS 7

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS Not Used




Page 5 of 9


081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 6 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5 088300 MIRRORS 4

DIVISION 09 FINISHES Not Used


092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 5 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 6 093013 CERAMIC TILING 10 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 6

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Not Used


102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 4

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Not Used


DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Not Used


123661.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 4

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used


DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used


DIVISION 15 RESERVED







Page 6 of 9



DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION Not Used


210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 6 211300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 5

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Not Used


220510 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS 19 220511 PLUMBING DEMOLITION 3 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2 220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 4 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 5 221005 PLUMBING PIPING 4 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 4

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Not Used


230500 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 20 230501 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 2 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 6 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 8 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 10 230713 DUCT INSULATION 4 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 5 230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 1 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 15 232114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 4 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 9 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 6 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 5 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 2 238127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING 5


DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Not Used




Page 7 of 9


DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Not Used


260501 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 2

260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTERS AND CABLES

11

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 260534 CONDUIT 8

260535 SURFACE RACEWAYS 4

260537 BOXES 6

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6

262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING 3

262726 WIRING DEVICES 6

265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 5

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Not Used


DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Not Used




DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Not Used


DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Not Used




Page 8 of 9


DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Not Used


DIVISION 34 TRANSPORTATION Not Used


DIVISION 35 WATERWAYS AND MARINE Not Used






DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION Not Used


DIVISION 41 MATERIAL PROCESSING Not Used


DIVISION 42 PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING Not Used


DIVISION 43 PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT Not Used




Page 9 of 9


DIVISION 44 POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT Not Used


DIVISION 45 INDUSTRY SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT Not Used






SECTION 00 30 00 AVAILABLE INFORMATION Not Used

Section No. Document Name Page Count

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

Page 1 of 1


Section No. Title

00 01 15 Sheet No. List of Drawing Sheets

Cover Sheet, Drawing Index

G1.00 General Notes, Symbols, Graphic Legend

G1.01 Typical Mounting Heights and Clearances, Code Info

D1.01 Demolition Plan

A1.00 Construction Plans, Partition Types

A2.00 Reflected Ceiling Plan

A3.00 Interior Elevations

A4.00 Door Schedule, Door Details, Elevations

A5.00 Finish Plans and Schedule, Flooring Details

M1.1 Floor Plans

M2.1 Mechanical Symbols, Legends, and Abbreviations

M2.2 Mechanical Details

M3.1 Mechanical Schedules and Details

ED1.1 Electrical Demolition Floor Plans

E0.0 Electrical Symbols and Notes

E1.1 Electrical Floor Plan

E4.1 Electrical Details

E6.1 Electrical Power Riser and Schedules

PD1.0 Partial Plans Plumbing Demolition

P0.1 Plumbing Abbreviations, Symbols and Legend

P1.0 Plumbing Partial Plans First Floor

FP1.0 Fire Protection Plans

SECTION 00 31 26.23 GENERAL SURVEY FOR ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL AND LEAD-BASED PAINT

Page 1 of 1


00 31 26.23 GENERAL SURVEY FOR ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL AND LEAD-BASED PAINT

A. Related Documents:

1. Section 01 35 16 – “Alteration Project Proceedures”.

B. Description of Work:

1. Work Involving Asbestos Containing Material (ACM):

1.1 The Owner is responsible for abating all ACM that is visible and accessible. The

abating of ACM is to be accomplished through a separate project prior to the start of all renovation work.

1.2 Testing for asbestos has been conducted at the facility scheduled for renovation,

demolition, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling, or repair. Results of the asbestos testing are for information purposes only. Under no circumstance shall this information be the sole means used by the Contractor for determining the extent of asbestos. The Contractor shall be responsible for verification of all field conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1.3 The results of testing are located in the Available Information Section at the end of

the Technical Specification Sections. Refer to Section 01 35 16 - Alteration Project Proceedures for more information on Work involving ACM.

2. Work Involving Lead Containing Material (LBP):

2.1 This facility was constructed prior to 1978 and is likely to have painted surfaces

containing lead-based paint. The Contractor shall conduct all demolition and removal Work, specified in the technical sections of this specification, in conformance with the regulations as specified in Section 01 35 16 - Alteration Project Proceedures.

2.2 Testing for lead-based paint (LBP) has been conducted at the facility scheduled for

renovation, demolition, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling, or repair. The Results of the LBP testing are for information purposes only. Under no circumstance shall this information be the sole means used by the Contractor for determining the extent of LBP. The Contractor shall be responsible for verification of all field conditions affecting performance of the Work.

2.3 The results of testing are located in the Available Information Section at the end of

the Technical Specification Sections. Refer to Section 01 35 16 - Alteration Project Proceedures for more information on Work involving LBP.

2.4 In accordance with the United States Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Lead-

Based Paint Renovation, Repair, and Painting Program (RRP) issued by the EPA on April 22, 2008 and regulated by 40 CFR 745, contractors performing renovation, repair and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint in homes, child care facilities, and schools built before 1978 must be certified and must follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination. EPA requires that firms performing renovation, repair, and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint in pre-1978 homes, child care facilities and schools be certified by EPA and that they use certified renovators who are trained by EPA-approved training providers to follow lead-safe work practices. The Contractor must be a Renovation Firm that has completed an EPA Lead-Safe Certification Program and be certified to conduct lead-based paint activities and renovations under the RRP rule. The Contractor shall have at least one “Certified Renovator” assigned to jobs where LBP is disturbed.

END Section 00 31 26.23

General Survey for Asbestos Containing Material and Lead-Based Paint

SECTION 00 31 26.29 EXISTING POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB) INFORMATION

Page 1 of 1


00 31 26.29 EXISTING POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB) INFORMATION

A. Related Documents:

1. Section 01 35 16 – “Alteration Project Procedures”.

2. Section 02 61 23 – “Removal and Disposal of PCB Contaminated Soils”.

3. Section 02 84 33 – “Removal and Disposal of PCBs”

B. Description of Work:

1. Work Involving Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs):

1.1 This facility was constructed between 1950 and 1978 and has caulk and/or glazing

containing PCBs. The Contractor shall conduct all demolition and removal Work, specified in the Technical Specifications Sections of this Project Manual, in conformance with the regulations as specified in Section 01 35 16 - Alteration Project Procedures and as specified in Section 02 61 23 – “Removal and Disposal of PCB Contaminated Soils” and Section 02 84 33 – “Removal and Disposal of PCBs” .

1.2 Testing for PCBs has been conducted at the facility scheduled for renovation,

demolition, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling, or repair. The Results of the PCB testing are summarized in a PCB Site Remedial Plan and are for information

purposes only. The Contractor shall be responsible for verification of all field conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1.3 The Results of the PCB testing are located in the Available Information Section at

the end of the Technical Specification Sections. Refer to Section 01 35 16 - Alteration Project Procedures for more information on Work involving PCBs.

1.4 The work shall be performed by persons who are knowledgeable, qualified, and

trained in the removal, treatment, handling, and disposal of PCB contaminated wastes and the subsequent cleaning of the affected environment. These Specifications govern all work activities that disturb PCB-containing caulk and glazing and associated building material. All activities shall be performed in accordance with, but not limited to, OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926, the United States Environmental Protection Agency’s PCB Regulation 40 CFR Part 761, Connecticut General Statutes 22a-463 through -469 inclusive, and the PCB Site Remedial Plan where applicable.

END Section 00 31 26.29

Existing Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB) Information

SECTION 00 40 14 CERTIFICATE (of Authority)

Page 1 of 2

CT DAS - 6000 (Rev. 06.25.15) PROJECT NO.: BI-NN-665

CERTIFICATE (of Authority)

I ,

(Signer’s Name)1

(Signer’s Title)

of , an entity lawfully organized and existing under the laws

(Name of Entity) of , do hereby certify that the following is a true and correct

(Name of State or Commonwealth)

copy of a resolution adopted on the day of , 20 by the governing body of

(Day)2 (Month)

2 (Year)

2

, in accordance with all of its documents of governance and

(Name Of Entity) management and the laws of and further certify that such resolution has not

(Name of State or Commonwealth) been modified, rescinded or revoked, and is at present in full force and effect. RESOLVED: that ,

(Name and Title of Signer of Contract Documents) 3

of is empowered and authorized, on behalf of the entity,

(name of entity) to execute and deliver contracts and amendments thereto, and all documents required by the Governor, the Connecticut Department of Administrative Services, the Connecticut State Properties Review Board and the Office of the Attorney General associated with such contracts and amendments. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has executed this certificate this day of , 20 .

(Day) 4

(Month) 4 (Year)

4

(Signature)

(Print Name) (Title)

1 – The signer of this certificate must be someone other than the signer of the contract documents except for a sole managing member of an LLC or the sole officer or sole principal of a corporation. If the signer is a sole managing member of an LLC, then along with this certificate the signer must provide a letter on company letterhead that indicates the signer is a sole member and managing member. If the signer is the sole officer or sole principal of a corporation, then the signer must provide with the certificate a letter on company letterhead setting forth this fact. 2 – This date must be on or before the date of signing of the contract document. 3 – This person shall sign the contract document and other required documents. 4 – This date must be on or after the date of signing of the contract documents.


Page 2 of 2

CT DAS - 6000 (Rev. 06.25.15) PROJECT NO.: BI-NN-665

FOR YOUR INFORMATION

Certificate (of Authority)

What the Certificate is saying is that the organization authorized the signatory to sign the pertinent documents other than the Certificate (of Authority) and that, as of the date of execution of the CERTIFICATE (i.e., the date set forth in the “In Witness Whereof” blanks) there has been no change in that authorization.

Instructions for completing the Certificate (of Authority)

The Certificate (Authority) to Accompany the Bid Proposal Form:

1. 1st

Paragraph: a. First, enter the name and title of the individual signing the Certificate (of Authority). b. Second, enter the legal name of the entity (exactly as it is shown on the Secretary of State registry). c. Third, enter the name of the state or commonwealth the entity is registered in. d. Fourth, enter the date the resolution was adopted by the governing body. This date is on or before

the date the Bid Proposal is signed. e. Fifth, enter the name of the state or commonwealth the entity is registered in.

2. 2nd

Paragraph: a. First enter the name and title of the individual signing bid documents for the entity. b. Second, enter the legal name of the entity (exactly as it is shown on the Secretary of State registry).

3. Last Paragraph: a. Enter the Witness date. This date will likely be the date of execution of the Bid Proposal form.

THE DATE SHOULD NOT BE BEFORE THE DATE OF EXECUTION OF THE BID PROPOSAL.

The Certificate (Authority) to Accompany the Contract:

1. 1st

Paragraph: a. First, enter the name and title of the individual signing the Certificate (of Authority). b. Second, enter the legal name the entity (exactly as it is shown on the Secretary of State registry). c. Third, enter the name of the state or commonwealth the entity is registered in. d. Fourth, enter the date the resolution was adopted by the governing body. This date is on or before

the date the Contract is signed. e. Fifth, enter the name of the state or commonwealth the entity is registered in.

2. 2nd

Paragraph: a. First enter the name and title of the individual signing contract documents for the entity. b. Second, enter the legal name of the entity (exactly as it is shown on the Secretary of State registry).

3. Last Paragraph: a. Enter the Witness date. This date will likely be the date of execution of the CONTRACT. THE

DATE SHOULD NOT BE BEFORE THE DATE OF EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT.

END


Section 00 72 13 General Conditions Of The Contract

For Construction For Design-Bid-Build (D-B-B) Page 1 of 25

CT DCS – 5000 General Conditions (Rev. 03.26.12) Standard Form For All D-B-B Projects

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

For Design-Bid-Build Department of Construction Services

State of Connecticut TABLE OF CONTENTS

AR

TIC

LE

TITLE

PAG

E

1 Definitions 2

2 Conditions of Work 5

3 Correlation of Contract Documents 5

4 Commencement and Progress of Work 6

5 Submittals, Product Data, Shop Drawings and Samples 7

6 Separate Contracts 7

7 Cooperation of Trades 7

8 Damages 7

9 Minimum Wage Rates 8

10 Posting Minimum Wage Rates 8

11 Construction Schedules 8

12 Preference in Employment 9

13 Compensation for Changes in the Work 9

14 Deleted Work 11

15 Materials: Standards 11

16 Inspection and Tests 12

17 Royalties and Patents 13

18 Surveys, Permits, and Regulations 13

19 Protection of the Work, Persons and Property

13

20 Temporary Utilities 14

21 Correction of Work 14

22 Guarantees and Warranties 14

AR

TIC

LE

TITLE

PAG

E

23 Cutting, Fitting, Patching, and Digging 14

24 Cleaning Up 15

25 All Work Subject to Control of the Commissioner

15

26 Authority of the Construction Administrator 15

27 Schedule of Values: Application for Payment

15

28 Partial Payments 16

29 Delivery of Statement Showing Amounts Due for Wages, Materials, and Supplies

17

30 Substantial Completion and Acceptance 17

31 Final Payment 17

32 Owner’s Right to Withhold Payments 18

33 Owner’s Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract

18

34 Subletting or Assigning of Contract 19

35 Contractor’s Insurance 19

36 Foreign Materials 20

37 Hours of Work 21

38 Claims 21

39 Diesel Vehicle Emissions Control 23

Appendixes

Appendix 1 – CT DCS 7048 General Contractor Retainage Reduction Request Form

25


For Construction For Design-Bid-Build (D-B-B) Page 2 OF 25


ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS

WHENEVER THE FOLLOWING TERMS, OR PRONOUNS IN PLACE OF THEM, ARE USED THE INTENT AND MEANING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: 1.1 ACCEPTANCE: The Owner’s acknowledgement of the Work from the Contractor upon certification by the Construction Administrator and Architect or Engineer that all Work has been completed. 1.2 ADDITIONAL OR DELETED WORK: Work required by the Department that, in the judgment of the Com-missioner, involves any addition to, deduction from, or modification of the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 AGENCY: The (User) Agency of the State of Connecticut having administrative authority of the facility in which the Work is being performed. 1.4 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT, PARTIAL PAYMENT OR REQUISITION: Contractor’s certified request for payment for completed portions of the Work and, if the Contract so provides, for materials or equipment suitably stored pending their incorporation into the Work. 1.5 ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER: A sole proprietor, partnership, firm, corporation or other business organization under Contract with the Owner, commissioned to prepare Contract Drawings and Specifications, to advise the Owner and in certain cases, to perform regular inspections during construction and when authorized to perform the duties of the Construction Administrator. 1.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Construction Drawings revised by the Contractor to show all significant Modifications made during the construction process. 1.7 BASE BID: Monetary value stated in the Bid Proposal Form as the sum for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents, exclusive of adjustments for Supplemental Bids. 1.8 BID BOND: Form of Bid Security executed by the Bidder as Principal and by a Surety to guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a Contract within a specified time and furnish any required bond as mandated by Connecticut General Statute Section 4b-92. 1.9 BIDDER: A sole proprietor, partnership, firm, corporation or other business organization submitting a Bid on the Bid Proposal Form for the Work contemplated. 1.10 BIDDING DOCUMENTS: Collectively, the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents, including any addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids. 1.11 BID OR BID PROPOSAL FORM: A complete and duly signed proposal to perform Work (or a designated portion thereof) for a stipulated sum submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents.

1.12 BID SECURITY: Certified check or Bid Bond submitted with Bid Proposal Form, which provides that the Bidder, if awarded the Contract, will execute such Contract in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. 1.13 BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE: A specialized form of property insurance which provides coverage for loss or damage to the Work pursuant to the Contract Documents. 1.14 CASH ALLOWANCE: An amount established in the Contract Documents for inclusion in the Contract Sum to cover the cost of prescribed items not specified in detail, and as shown in the Allowance Schedule. 1.15 CERTIFICATE OF ACCEPTANCE: A document issued by the Owner to the Contractor stating that all Work specified in the Certificate of Acceptance has been completed and accepted by the Owner. 1.16 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE: A document stating that for the portion of the Project completed, either the design portion or the construction portion, has been performed in substantial compliance with all applicable building codes. 1.17 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY: Document is-sued by the authority having jurisdiction certifying that all or a designated portion of a building is approved for its designated use. 1.18 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLE-TION: A document prepared by the Architect or Engineer and approved by the Owner on the basis of an inspection stating:

1.18.1 that the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is determined to be Substantially Complete;

1.18.2 the date of Substantial Completion; 1.18.3 the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor

for security maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and

1.18.4 the time within which the Contractor shall complete the remaining Work.

1.19 CHANGE ORDER: Written authorization signed by the Owner, authorizing a modification in the Work, an adjustment in the Contract Sum, or an adjustment in the Con-tract Time. 1.20 COMMISSIONER: The State of Connecticut, Department of Construction Services (CT DCS) Commissioner acting directly or through specifically authorized CT DCS personnel or agent(s) having authority to perform duties defined in Article 25. 1.21 COMMISSIONING AGENT (CxA): An independent entity under contract directly with the Owner or Owner’s Representative responsible for performing the specified commissioning procedures. 1.22 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATOR: A sole proprietor, partnership, firm, corporation or other business organization, under Contract or employed by the Owner commissioned and/or authorized to oversee the fulfillment of all requirements




of the Contract Documents. The authorized Construction Administrator may be a Department of Construction Services Assistant Project Manager, Department of Construction Services Project Manager, a Clerk of the Works, an Architect, a Consulting Architect, a Consulting Construction Administrator, a Consulting Engineer etc. or any other designee as authorized and identified by the Owner. 1.23 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE: A written authorization signed by the Owner, directing a modification in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or both. Any Construction Change Directive effecting an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall result in a Change Order. 1.24 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR CONTRACT: The Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, and Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract, all of which shall constitute the Contract. 1.25 CONTRACTOR OR GENERAL CONTRACTOR: A sole proprietor, partnership, firm or Corporation, under direct Contract with the Department of Construction Services, responsible for performing the Work under the Contract Documents. Whenever the words “Contractor” or “General Contractor” are used it shall be understood to mean Contractor. 1.26 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE: Insurance purchased and maintained by the Contractor that insures the Contractor for claims for property damage, bodily injury or death. 1.27 CONTRACT START DATE OR DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK: The date, specified by the Owner in the Notice to Proceed, on which the Contractor is required to start the Work. 1.28 CONTRACT SUM: The sum stated in the Contract, which is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 1.29 CONTRACT TIME: The period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work, including authorized adjustments thereto. The Contract Time is the sum of all Working Days and Non-Working Days as further defined herein and specified in the Contract Documents. 1.30 DAY: Whenever the word Day is used it shall be understood to mean calendar day stated on the Bidding Documents, unless stated otherwise. 1.31 DEPARTMENT OF CONSTRUCTION SERVICES (CT DCS) PROJECT MANAGER: The individual employed by the Owner, designated and authorized by the Commissioner, to be

responsible for the overall management and oversight of the Project, and to represent the (User) Agency. 1.32 DIESEL VEHICLE EMMISSIONS CONTROL: The reduction of air pollution emissions from diesel powered vehicles through the use of diesel engine emission control technologies. 1.33 EQUAL(S): Any deviation from the Specification which is defined as follows: A replacement for the specified material, device, procedure, equipment, etc., which is recognized and accepted as substantially equal to the first listed manufacturer or first listed procedure specified after review by the Architect/Engineer, and may be rejected or approved at the sole discretion of the Owner. All equals must be substantially equivalent to the first manufacturer or first procedure listed in the Specifications with reference to all of the following areas: the substance and function considering quality, workmanship, economy of operation, durability, and suitability for purposes intended; size, rating, and cost. The equal does not constitute a modification in the scope of Work, the Schedule, or Architect/Engineer’s design intent of the specified material, device, procedure, equipment, etc. 1.34 FINAL INSPECTION: Review of the Work by the Architect or Engineer and Owner to determine whether Acceptance has been achieved. 1.35 FINAL PAYMENT: The last payment made by the Owner to the Contractor, made after notice of the Acceptance. Payment shall include the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum as adjusted by modifications. 1.36 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, part of Division 00 of the Specifications. 1.37 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: That part of the Contract Documents entitled General Requirements, which is Division 01 of the Specifications. 1.38 GUARANTEE: See Warranty. 1.39 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: A sum established in a Contract, usually as a fixed sum per Day, as the predetermined measure of damages to be paid to the Owner due to the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the Contract Time. 1.40 LUMP SUM: An item or category priced as a whole rather than broken down into its elements. 1.41 MOBILE SOURCE: A source designed or constructed to move from one location to another during normal operation except portable equipment and includes, but is not limited to, automobiles, buses, trucks, tractors, earth moving equipment, hoists, cranes, aircraft, locomotives operating on rails, vessels for transportation on water, lawnmowers, and other small home appliances. 1.42 NON-WORKING DAYS: All Saturdays, Sundays, Legal State Holidays (12), and any other Days identified in the




Contract Documents that the Contractor is not permitted to execute the Work. The restriction of Non-Working Days may be suspended upon the approval or direction of the Commissioner. 1.43 NOTICE TO BIDDER: A notice contained in the Bidding Document informing prospective Bidders of the opportunity to submit Bids on a Project. 1.44 NOTICE TO PROCEED: Written notice, issued by the Commissioner or the Commissioner’s authorized representative, to the Contractor authorizing the Contractor to proceed with the Work and establishing the date for commencement of the Contract Time. 1.45 OWNER OR DEPARTMENT: The State of Connecticut, Department of Construction Services acting through its Commissioner or specifically authorized Department personnel or agent. 1.46 OVERHEAD: Indirect costs including: supervision (any position over the foreman), field and home office expense, insurance, and small tools and consumables. 1.47 PAYMENT, BOND, LABOR BOND OR MATERIAL BOND: A bond in which the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety guarantee to the Owner that the Contractor will pay for labor and materials furnished for use in the performance of the Contract, as required by Connecticut General Statutes Section 49-41. 1.48 PERFORMANCE BOND OR SURETY BOND: A bond in which the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety guarantee to the Owner that the Work will be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, as required by Connecticut General Statutes Section 49-41. 1.49 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION: A description of the desired results or performance of a product, material, assembly, procedure, or a piece of equipment with criteria for identifying the standard. 1.50 PLANS OR DRAWINGS: All Drawings or reproductions of Drawings pertaining to the construction of the Work contemplated and its appurtenances. 1.51 PROJECT: The total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. 1.52 PROJECT MANUAL: The set of documents assembled for the Work which includes, but is not limited to, Contract Documents, Bidding Requirements, Sample Forms, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, General Requirements, and the Specifications. 1.53 PROPRIETARY SPECIFICATION: A specification that describes a product, procedure, function, material, assembly, or piece of equipment by trade name and/or by naming the manufacturer(s) or manufacturer’s procedure, exact model number, item, etc., of those products acceptable to the Owner.

1.54 RETAINAGE: A percentage of each Application for Payment and a percentage of the total Contract Sum retained by the Owner. 1.55 SCHEDULE: A Critical Path Method (CPM) or Construction Schedule as required by the Contract Documents which shall be a diagram, graph or other pictorial or written Schedule showing all events expected to occur and operations to be performed and indicating the Contract Time, start dates, durations and finish dates as well as Substantial Completion and Acceptance of the Work, rendered in a form permitting determination of the optimum sequence and duration of each operation. 1.56 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A document furnished by the Contractor to the Architect or Engineer and Owner stating the portions of the Contract Sum allocated to the various portions of the Work, which is to be used for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 1.57 SECONDARY SUBCONTRACTOR: A sole proprietor, partnership, firm or Corporation under direct Contract with the Subcontractor to the General Contractor. 1.58 SENSITIVE RECEPTOR SITES: Areas where concentrations of diesel emissions may be harmful to sensitive populations, including, but not limited to, hospitals, school and university buildings being occupied during a student semester, residential structures, daycare facilities, elderly housing, and convalescent facilities. 1.59 SHOP DRAWINGS: Drawings provided to Architect or Engineer and Owner by a Contractor that illustrate construction, materials, dimensions, installation, and other pertinent information for the incorporation of an element or item into the construction as detailed Contract Documents. 1.60 SPECIFICATIONS: The description, provisions and other requirements pertaining to the method and manner of performing the Work and/or to the quantities and quality of materials to be furnished under the Contract. 1.61 SUBCONTRACTOR: A sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other business organization under direct Contract with the Contractor supplying labor and/or materials for the Work at the site of the Project. 1.62 SUBMITTALS: Documents including, but not limited to, samples, manufacturer’s data, Shop Drawing, or other such items submitted to the Owner and Architect or Engineer by the Contractor for the purpose of approval or other action, as required by the Contract Documents. 1.63 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: The stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.64 SUBSTITUTION: Any deviation from the specified requirements, which is defined as follows: A replacement for




the specified material, device, procedure, equipment, etc., which is not recognized or accepted as equal to the first manufacturer or procedure listed in the Specification after review by the Architect/Engineer, and may be rejected or approved by the Owner. The Substitution is not equal to the specified requirement in comparison to the first manufacturer or first procedure listed in the Specifications in one or more of the following areas: the substance and function considering quality, workmanship, economy of operation, durability, and suitability for purposes intended; size, cost, and rating. The Substitution constitutes a modification in the scope of Work, the Schedule, or the Architect/Engineer’s design intent of the specified material, device, procedure, equipment, etc. 1.65 SUPERINTENDENT: The Contractor’s representative at the site who is responsible for continuous field supervision, coordination, in, completion of the Work, and, unless another person is designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Construction Administrator, for the prevention of accidents. 1.66 SUPPLEMENTAL BID: The monetary value stated in the Bid to be added to the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.67 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS: An extension in the Bid to be added to the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.68 THRESHOLD LIMIT BUILDING: Any proposed (new) structures or additions as defined by the Connecticut General Statutes Section 29-276b. 1.69 UNIT PRICE: The monetary value stated by the Owner or the Contractor, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Contract Documents and/or Bidding Documents. 1.70 WARRANTY: A written, legally enforceable assurance of specified quality or performance of a product or Work or of the duration of satisfactory performance. 1.71 WORK: The construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and including all labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

ARTICLE 2

CONDITIONS OF WORK 2.1 The Contractor shall carefully examine and study the conditions under which the Work is to be performed and the site of the Work, and compare the Contract Documents with each other and to information furnished by the Owner including but not limited to the Plans and Specifications, the form of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Bonds and all other Contract Documents associated with the Work.

2.2 The Contractor shall report to the Construction Administrator all errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such errors, inconsistencies or omission and failed to report it to the Construction Administrator. If the Contractor performs any actions or construction activity knowing it involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without notice to the Construction Administrator, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for such performance and related costs for the correction and shall not be allowed to submit any claim related to error, inconsistencies or omission. 2.3 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Construction Administrator at once; and it will be assumed that the Contractor has been satisfied as to all requirements of the Contract Documents. Any deterrent conditions at the site of the Work which are obvious and apparent upon examination of the site but are not indicated on the Plans shall be corrected by the Contractor without additional compensation. 2.4 In performing the Work, the Contractor must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the Work of any other Contractor, nor any inordinate disruption with the normal routine of the Owner, institution or Agency operating at the site. 2.5 No claims for additional compensation will be considered when additional costs result from conditions made known to, discovered by, or which should have been discovered by, the Contractor prior to Contract signing. 2.6 All Communications from the Contractor concerning proposed changes to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or Work shall be in writing. 2.7 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Submittals pursuant to Article 5.

ARTICLE 3 CORRELATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

3.1 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. Where discrepancies or conflict occur in the Contract Documents the following order of precedence shall be utilized:

3.1.1 Amendments and addenda shall take precedence over previously issued Contract Documents. 3.1.2 The Supplementary Conditions take precedence over the General Conditions. 3.1.3 The General Conditions take precedence over the General Requirements.




3.1.4 The Specifications shall take precedence over the Plans. 3.1.5 Stated dimensions shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. 3.1.6 Large-scale detail Drawings shall take precedence over small-scale Drawings. 3.1.7 The Schedules contained in the Contract Documents shall take precedence over other data on the Plans.

3.2 Neither party to the Contract shall take advantage of any obvious error or apparent discrepancy in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give immediate written notification of any error or discrepancy discovered to the Construction Administrator, who shall take the necessary actions to obtain such corrections and interpretations as may be deemed necessary for the completion of the Work in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. The Contractor shall then promptly proceed under the direction of the Owner and the provisions of Article 13. The Contractor’s failure to provide immediate notice shall mean the Contractor will not be entitled to any additional compensation, either monetary or Contract Time adjustment, with respect to any discrepancy. 3.3 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings, shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 3.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

ARTICLE 4 COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF WORK

4.1 The Work shall start upon the date given in the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall complete all the Work necessary for Final Payment, including but not limited to Substantial Completion, Contract close-out, testing and demonstration of all systems as required for Acceptance, punchlist Work, training and submission of Record Documents, manuals, Guarantees and Warranties as stated in the Contract Document. 4.2 Time is of the essence with respect to the Contract Time. By executing the Contract, the Contractor confirms and agrees that the Contract Time is a reasonable period to perform the Work. The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. The Contractor may, at his discretion, plan to complete the Work and achieve Substantial Completion in less time than the Contract Time. 4.3 The Contractor’s early completion Schedule

notwithstanding, the Owner reserves the right to order Modifications to the Work in accordance with Article 13 at any time during the Contract Time. 4.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to costs for delay due to Owner ordered Modifications or any other circumstances for the period of time between the Contractor’s elected early completion and the end of the Contract Time. Such costs include, but are not limited to, extended home office costs, field office costs, or supervisory and management costs incurred in performance of the Work. Early completion of the Work shall not merit additional compensation. 4.5 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of Work by acts of God, such as fire or flood or any action, injunction or stop order issued by any court, judge or officer of the court or any other court action beyond the Owner’s control, then the Contract Time may be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as demonstrated by the Contractor’s Schedule and as the Owner may determine that such event has delayed the Work. In any event, the granting of an extension of time shall be solely within the discretion of the Owner. 4.6 Except as otherwise may be provided herein, extensions of time shall be the Contractor’s sole remedy for such delay. No payment or compensation of any kind shall be made to the Contractor for damages because of hindrance in the orderly progress of Work caused by the aforesaid causes. 4.7 The Contractor acknowledges that the Contract amount includes and anticipates any and all delays, whether avoidable or unavoidable, from said orders, which may issue from any court, judge, court officer, or act of God, and that such delays shall not, under any circumstances, be construed as compensable delays. 4.8 Any extension of the Contract Time shall be by Change Order pursuant to Article 13. 4.9 The Contractor shall employ a competent project manager who shall represent the Contractor. Communications given to the project manager shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. The project manager will be employed full time on the Project and be located and assigned to the Project site during and for the duration of the Work. 4.10 The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent and necessary assistants who will be in attendance at the project site during the performance of the Work. 4.11 Upon execution of the Contract, materials may be purchased. No material escalation costs will be valid or compensable unless the Owner directs, in writing, a delay in the procurement.

ARTICLE 5 SUBMITTALS, PRODUCT DATA, SHOP

DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES




5.1 Contractor shall review, approve, and submit to the Construction Administrator all Submittals including but not limited to, product data, Shop Drawings, and samples, with such promptness as to cause no delay in the Work. 5.2 Correction or approval of such Submittals, Shop Drawings, product data and samples will be made with reasonable promptness by the Architect or Engineer. Approval will be general only and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors in dimensions, for construction and field coordination of the Work or for any departure from the Contract Documents, unless such departure has received the Owner’s written approval. 5.3 No Work governed by such Shop Drawings, Schedules or samples shall be fabricated, delivered or installed until approved by the Architect or Engineer. 5.4 No damages for delays or time extensions will be granted, even if approvals deviate from the approved Schedule.

ARTICLE 6 SEPARATE CONTRACTS

6.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform Work in connection with the Contract with the Owner’s own forces, or to let separate contracts relating to the Contract (Project) site or in connection with Work on adjoining sites. In such cases, the Contractor shall afford such parties reasonable opportunity for storage of materials and equipment and coordinate and connect the Work with the work on adjoining sites or other Projects, and shall fully cooperate with such parties in the matter required under Article 7 herein. 6.2 Contractors working in the same vicinity shall cooperate with one another and, in case of dispute, decision of the Owner shall be final and binding to all Contractors involved, including Contractors under separate Contracts. 6.3 The Contractor shall assume all liability, financial or otherwise, in connection with this Contract and shall protect and hold harmless the Owner from any and all damages or claims that may arise because of inconvenience or delay which the Contractor may cause other Contractors. If the Contractor experiences a loss because of the presence and operations of other Contractors working adjacent to or within the limits of the same Project, then as between the Owner and the Contractor, the Contractor shall bear such loss. 6.4 Insofar as possible, the Contractor shall arrange the Work and shall place and dispose of the materials being used so as not to interfere with the operations of other Contractors adjacent to or within the limits of the same Project. The Contractor shall join its Work with that of others in an acceptable manner, and perform the Work in proper accordance with that of the others. 6.5 In no event shall the Owner be responsible for any claim or damages that are the result of the Contractor’s failure

to coordinate the Work with any other Contractor or Subcontractor.

ARTICLE 7

COOPERATION OF TRADES

7.1 he Contractor shall be responsible for and shall control all activities of their Subcontractors. The Subcontractors shall consult and cooperate with one another. Each Subcontractor shall furnish all necessary information to other Subcontractors and shall lay out and install their own Work so as to avoid any delays or interference with the Work of others. 7.2 Any cost or changes, cutting and/or repairing, made necessary by the failure to observe the above requirements shall be borne by the party or parties responsible for such failure or neglect or their faulty Work installed.

ARTICLE 8 DAMAGES

8.1 The Liquidated Damages, provided in the Bidding Documents, will be assessed at two distinct times, as follows:

8.1.1 Liquidated Damages – Substantial Completion: If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work by the Substantial Completion Date, and such delay is not otherwise excused under this Contract, then the Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner Liquidated Damages for the dollar amount specified in the Bid Proposal Form for this Project, for each Day beyond Substantial Completion that the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion. The parties to this Contract acknowledge and agree that the actual damages that are to be anticipated as a result of the neglect, failure, or refusal of the Contractor to substantially complete the Project by the established Substantial Completion Date are uncertain in amount or extremely difficult to determine. Accordingly, the parties to this Contract do intend and in fact now agree to liquidate damages in advance and stipulate that the amount set forth in this subparagraph is reasonable and an appropriate remedy and is intended to constitute compensatory damages and does not constitute a penalty of any kind. The parties understand and agree that, by including a provision for Liquidated Damages in this Contract, or in pursuing any relief pursuant to such provision: .1 the parties do not intend to set a price for the privilege not to perform; .2 the availability of Liquidated Damages may not be relied upon as a basis for argument that the Owner has an adequate remedy at law; and 3 the remedies available to the Owner under this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive. 8.1.2 Liquidated Damages – Acceptance: If the Contractor fails to complete all of the Work required for Acceptance of the Work within ninety (90) Days of Substantial Completion then the Contractor agrees to pay




to the Owner Liquidated Damages for the dollar amount specified in the Bid Proposal Form for each Day in excess of ninety (90) Days beyond the Substantial Completion Date that the Contractor fails achieve Acceptance. The parties to this Contract acknowledge and agree that the actual damages that are to be anticipated as a result of the failure of the Contractor to complete all of the Work required for Acceptance within ninety (90) Days of the established Substantial Completion Date are uncertain in amount or extremely difficult to determine. Accordingly, the parties to this Contract do intend and in fact now agree to liquidate damages in advance and stipulate that the amount set forth in this subparagraph is reasonable and an appropriate remedy and is intended to constitute compensatory damages and does not constitute a penalty of any kind. The parties understand and agree that, by including a provision for Liquidated Damages in this Contract, or in pursuing any relief pursuant to such provision: .1 the parties do not intend to set a price for the privilege not to perform; .2 the availability of Liquidated Damages may not be relied upon as a basis for argument that the Owner has an adequate remedy at law; and .3 the remedies available to the Owner under this Agreement are cumulative and not exclusive.

8.2 The Liquidated Damages or any portion thereof may be waived at the sole discretion of the Commissioner. 8.3 No payment by the Owner, either partial or final, shall be construed to waive the Owner’s right to seek Liquidated Damages. 8.4 In the event a court determines that the Contract herein is null and void for any reason, Contractor agrees that Contractor will not seek or pursue any lawsuit or claim for damages, including, but not limited to, claims for loss of Overhead or anticipated profits, against the Owner and the Owner shall not be liable for any damages which Contractor may incur as a result of such decision. In addition, if the court enjoins the Owner from entering into or proceeding with the Contract herein, the Owner shall not be liable for any damages arising out of or relating to the award of such Contract which Contractor may have incurred as a result of the injunction.

ARTICLE 9

MINIMUM WAGE RATES

9.1 In accordance with the provisions of the Connecticut General Statutes Section 31-53, the following applies: "The wages paid on an hourly basis to any person performing the work of any mechanic, laborer, or worker on the work herein contracted to be done and the amount of payment or contribution paid or payable on behalf of each such person to any employee welfare fund, as defined in subsection (h) of this section, shall be at a rate equal to the rate customary or prevailing for the same work in the same trade or occupation in the town in which such public works project is being constructed. Any contractor who is not obligated by agreement

to make payment or contribution on behalf of such persons to any such employee welfare fund shall pay to each mechanic, laborer or worker as part of such person’s wages the amount of payment or contribution for such person’s classification on each payday." 9.2 Each Contractor who is awarded a Contract on or after October 1, 2002 shall be subject to provisions of the Connecticut General Statutes, Section 31-53 as amended by Public Act 02-69, “An Act Concerning Annual Adjustments to Prevailing Wages.” No wage adjustment will be made to the Contract for any wage increase under this Article.

ARTICLE 10 POSTING MINIMUM WAGE RATES

10.1 The Contractor shall post at conspicuous points on the site of the Contract a Schedule showing all determined wage rates for all trades and all authorized deductions, if any, from wages to be paid. 10.2 The Contractor shall provide weekly certified payrolls to the Owner for all persons working on the site.

ARTICLE 11 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

11.1 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, within twenty-one (21) Days from the Contract Start Date, the Contractor shall submit the following to the Owner for approval:

11.1.1 A comprehensive Schedule of Submittals required by the Specifications. Said Schedule shall include Submittal dates, required approval dates and date material must be on site.

11.1.2 The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 14 Days for the Owner and its agents’ review of Submittals. No extension of the Contract Time shall be granted for revisions and resubmission. Further, the Contractor shall allow a minimum of eight weeks for testing and Acceptance of the Work by the Owner.

11.1.3 When the Contract Documents specify a “CPM Schedule” a detailed Critical Path Method Schedule is required using software approved by the Owner and/or Construction Administrator with as many activities as necessary to make the Schedule an effective tool for planning and monitoring the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall show all pertinent activities requiring coordination between trades.

11.1.4 When the Contract Documents specify a “Construction Schedule” a detailed Construction Schedule is required using software approved by the Owner as a horizontal bar chart with a separate bar for each major portion of the Work or operation to make the Schedule an effective




tool for planning and monitoring the progress of the Work.

11.2 Unless otherwise specified under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide a monthly update of the CPM Schedule or Construction Schedule in the format required by the Owner as well as a disk of the updated Schedule and program. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Work is falling behind Schedule, the Contractor shall submit a revised Schedule demonstrating a recovery plan to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time. 11.3 Overtime, increased manpower, and additional shifts: If ordered by the Owner in writing, the Contractor shall work overtime, and/or add additional manpower and/or shifts:

11.3.1 If the Contractor is not behind Schedule, the Owner will pay the Contractor the actual additional premium portion of the wages for overtime or additional shift work not included in the Contract price, but the Contractor shall not be entitled to Overhead and Profit. 11.3.2 If the Contractor, through its sole or partial fault or neglect is behind Schedule, the Owner may order the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, to increase its manpower or to work any overtime or additional shifts or take other action necessary to expedite the Work to meet the Project Schedule. 11.3.3 If the Schedule is shown to be more than 21 Days behind in any critical activity, overtime, increase manpower and/or additional shifts shall be implemented immediately regardless of who is at fault. A disagreement over the cause of the impact will not relieve the Contractor from the obligation of complying with this Article. Once liability for the impact is determined, compensation will be determined in accordance with 11.3.1 or 11.3.2. 11.3.4 The Owner reserves the right to suspend activity under Paragraph 11.3. Suspension shall be in writing and at the sole discretion of the Commissioner.

11.4 Requisitions for partial payment will not be processed until the Contractor has complied with this requirement.

ARTICLE 12

PREFERENCE IN EMPLOYMENT

12.1 Should this Contract be for the construction or repair of any building, then in the employment of labor to perform the Work specified herein, preference shall be given to citizens of the United States, who are, and continuously for at least three (3) months prior to the date hereof, have been residents of the labor market area, as established by the State of Connecticut Labor Commissioner, in which such Work is to be done, and if no such qualified person is available, then to citizens who have continuously resided in the county in which the Work is to be performed for at least three (3) months prior to the date hereof, and then to citizens of the state who have continuously resided in the State at least three months prior to the date hereof. 12. Should this Contract be for a Construction Services

Project other than for the construction, remodeling or repairing of public buildings covered by Connecticut General Statutes 31-52, then in the employment of mechanics, laborers or workmen to perform the Work specified herein, preference will be given to residents of the state who are, and continuously for at least six (6) months prior to the date hereof have been residents of this State, and if no such person is available then to residents of other states. 12.3 The provisions of this Article shall not apply where the state or any subdivision thereof may suffer the loss of revenue granted or to be granted from any Agency or Department of the federal government as a result of this Article or regulations related thereto.

ARTICLE 13 COMPENSATION FOR CHANGES

IN THE WORK

13.1 At any time, without invalidating the Contract and by a written order and without notice to the sureties, the Owner, through the Construction Administrator, may order modifications in the Work consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions. Upon request, the Contractor shall supply the Construction Administrator promptly with a detailed proposal for the same, showing quantities of and Unit Prices for the Work and that of any Subcontractor involved. 13.2 Modifications to the Work will be authorized by a written Change Order, or if necessary to expedite the Work, a written Construction Change Directive, issued by the Owner as provided for in Article 25. Change Orders and Construction Change Directives shall be processed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the written Change Order, the Contractor shall proceed with the Work when and as directed. 13.3 If a Change Order makes the Work less expensive for the Contractor, the proper deductions shall be made from the Contract Sum, said deductions to be computed in accordance with the provisions listed in this Article 13. 13.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time if in the opinion of the Owner the Additional Work in conjunction with the Work can be performed without impact on the Contract Time. 13.5 The Contractor may request, and the Owner may grant additional Contract Time when, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor has demonstrated that the Additional Work cannot be performed in conjunction with the Work without impact on the original Substantial Completion and/or Acceptance (if applicable) date. 13.6 The amount of compensation to be paid to the Contractor for any Additional or Deleted Work that results in a Change Order shall be determined in one of the following manners:

13.6.1 AMOUNT OF COMPENSATION FOR CHANGE ORDER COSTS: LABOR, EQUIPMENT, BENEFITS AND MATERIAL:




13.6.1.1 Unit Price: As stated in the Contract Documents. 13.6.1.2 Unit Price: As subsequently agreed upon by the Contractor and Owner 13.6.1.3 Lump Sum: Agreed upon sum by the Owner and the Contractor. The Owner may rely on costs, prices, and documentation provided by the Contractor or Subcontractor in agreeing to a Lump Sum. If the Owner believes that additional information is necessary to substantiate the accuracy of the cost, the Owner reserves the right to request and receive additional information from the Contractor. The Lump Sum must be based upon the following itemized costs:

13.6.1.3.1 Labor: (Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s own forces) No Change Order Proposal shall be negotiated if the request is solely for the increased labor rate over those originally carried by the Contractor in its original bid. Additional foreman hours shall not be included unless additional crews are added and/or a compensable time extension is granted. Project Executive time shall not be included as a direct cost as it is part of the overhead mark-up allowed. Project manager hours shall not be included unless a compensable time extension is granted. 13.6.1.3.2 Material: (Actual cost to the Contractor or Subcontractor) Cost shall not be based upon list pricing unless it reflects the actual prices being paid and no discounts or other offsets are being received by the Contractor or Subcontractor. No Change Order Proposal shall be negotiated if the request is solely for the escalation of material prices over those originally carried by the Contractor in its original bid. 13.6.1.3.3 Benefits: (The established rates of the following benefit costs inherent to the particular labor involved):

13.6.1.3.3.1 Workers Compensation. 13.6.1.3.3.2 Federal Social Security. 13.6.1.3.3.3 Connecticut Unemployment Compensation. 13.6.1.3.3.4 Fringe Benefits.

13.6.1.4 Rented Equipment: (Used directly on the Work and by the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s own forces). 13.6.1.5 Owned Equipment: (Used directly on the Work and by the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s own forces). Daily rate is not to exceed 3% of the monthly rental rate as identified by a nationally recognized construction cost estimating guide or service. 13.6.1.6 Small Tools: Include items such as shovels, picks, rakes, ladders, and power tools which are expected to be utilized on a project. Trade related equipment, hand tools, and power tools normally supplied with the labor or are normally expected to be owned in the performance of the typical work for a trade are not compensable. These costs shall not be approved as part of the Direct Cost of a Change Order as they are included in the Contractor’s overhead mark-up percentage.

13.6.2 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT PERCENTAGES: (Maximum allowable percentages applied to labor, equipment, and material)

13.6.2.1 Contractor’s mark-up for Work performed by its own forces:

Change Order Amount Overhead and Profit $0 to $ 5,000 20%

$5,001 to $15,000 17% $15,001 to $25,000 15% $25,000 and greater 12%

13.6.3 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT PERCENTAGES: (Maximum allowable percentages applied to labor, equipment, benefits and material)

13.6.3.1 Contractor’s mark-up for Work performed by its Subcontractor’s forces and not allowable for any subsidiary in which the Contractor has a majority ownership:

Change Order Amount Overhead and Profit

$0 and greater 6%

13.6.4 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT PERCENTAGES: (Maximum allowable percentages applied to labor, equipment, benefits and material) Subcontractor’s mark-up for Work performed by its own forces:


$0 to $ 5,000 20% $5,001 to $15,000 17%

$15,001 to $25,000 15% $25,000 and greater 12%

13.6.5 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT PERCENTAGES: (Maximum allowable percentages applied to labor, equipment, benefits and material)

13.6.5.1 Subcontractor’s mark-up for Work performed by its Secondary Subcontractor’s forces. Limited to one level (tier) below the Subcontractor and not allowable for any subsidiary in which the Subcontractor has a majority ownership.


$0 and greater 6%

13.7 BOND COSTS 13.7.1 Actual additional bonding costs associated with the value of the Change Order will be compensable only when supported by written documentation by the bonding company that the Change Order requires an increase to the original Performance, Payment, Labor or Material Bond. 13.7.2 The Contractor shall notify the bonding company at each $500,000 increase to the contract value as the cumulative result of change orders. A copy of the Consent of Surety must be provided to the Owner prior to the execution of any change order which exceeds each cumulative $500,000.

13.8 Trade discounts, rebates, and amounts received from the sales by the Contractor of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to the Owner.




13.9 If the parties cannot agree upon a Lump Sum, then the Commissioner, through the Project Manager, may at the option of the Commissioner take the following action(s):

13.9.1 Issue a Construction Change Directive for the Additional or Deleted Work. The amount of compensation shall be computed by the actual net costs to the Contractor determined by time and material or Unit Prices based upon the same information required in Subparagraphs 13.6.1.3.3.1 through 13.6.1.5:

13.9.1.1 Labor: (Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s own forces). 13.9.1.2 Material: (Used by Contractor’s or Sub- contractor’s own forces). 13.9.1.3 Benefits: (The established rates of the following benefit costs inherent to the particular labor involved):

13.9.1.3.1 Workers Compensation. 13.9.1.3.2 Federal Social Security. 13.9.1.3.3 Connecticut Unemployment Compensation. 13.9.1.3.4 Fringe Benefits.

13.9.1.4 Rented Equipment: (Used directly on the Work and by the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s own forces). 13.9.1.5 Owned Equipment: (Used directly on the Work and by the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s own forces). Daily rate is not to exceed 3% of the monthly rental rate that can be identified by a nationally recognized construction cost estimating guide or service.

13.9.2 Issue a Change Order adjusting the Contract Sum in the amount as determined by the Commissioner.

13.10 For any Change Order or Construction Change Directive the Contractor shall, when requested, promptly furnish in a form satisfactory to the Construction Administrator and the Owner a complete detailed accounting of all costs relating to the Additional Work, including but not limited to certified payrolls and copies of accounts, bills and vouchers to substantiate actual costs. Further, the Owner reserves the right to access and make copies of the Contractor’s records at any time upon written request from the Commissioner. 13.11 Failure of the Contractor to negotiate in good faith issues of time and costs or failure to provide requested documentation within fourteen (14) Days, or a time period accepted by the Commissioner, shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor of any claim. In such cases the Owner may elect to issue a unilateral Change Order in an amount deemed to be fair and equitable by the Commissioner. The provisions hereof shall not affect the power of the Contractor to act in case of emergency, threatened injury to persons, or damage to Work on any adjoining property. In this case the Commissioner, through the Project Manager, shall issue a Change Order for such amount as the Commissioner finds to be reasonable cost of such Work.

ARTICLE 14 DELETED WORK

14.1 Without invalidating any of the terms of the Contract, the Commissioner may order deleted from the Contract any items or portions of the Work deemed necessary by the Commissioner. 14.2 The compensation to be deducted from the Contract Sum for such deletions shall be determined in the manner provided for under the provisions of Article 13 or in the event none of the provisions of Article 13 are applicable then by the value as estimated by the Owner.

ARTICLE 15 MATERIALS: STANDARDS

15.1 Unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Specifications, all equipment, materials and articles incorporated in the Work are to be new and of the best grade of their respective kinds for the purposes. Wherever in the Contract Documents a particular brand, make of material, device, or equipment is shown or specified, the first manufacturer listed in the specification section is to be regarded as the standard. When the specification is proprietary and only one manufacturer is listed, the Contractor shall use the named manufacturer and no Substitutions or Equals will be allowed. 15.2 Any other brand, make of material, device, equipment, procedure, etc. which is a deviation from the specified requirement is prohibited from use, but may be considered by the Owner for approval as an Equal or Substitution. The Contractor is to adhere to the specific requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions are discouraged and are only approved by the Commissioner as an exception. 15.3 Submittals – Equals and Substitution Requests:

15.3.1 Substitution of Materials and Equipment before Bid Opening. The Owner will consider requests for Equals or Substitutions, if made prior to the receipt of the Bid. The information on all materials shall be consistent with the information herein.

15.3.1.1 Statement of Variances – a statement of variances must list all features of the proposed Substitution which differ from the Drawings, Specifications and/or product(s) specified and must further certify that the Substitution has no other variant features. A request will be denied if submitted without sufficient evidence. 15.3.1.2 Substitution Denial – any Substitution request not complying with the above requirements will be denied. Substitution request sent after the deadline established in the Notice to Bidder will be denied. 15.3.1.3 An addendum shall be issued to inform all prospective Bidders of any accepted Substitution in accordance with Owner's addenda procedures.

15.3.2 Substitution of Materials and Equipment After Bid Opening: Subject to the Architect or Engineer's determination, if the material or equipment is Equal to the




one specified or pre-qualified and the CT DCS Project Manager's approval of such determination, Substitution of Material or Equipment may be allowed after the Letter of Award is issued only:

15.3.2.1 If the specified or pre-qualified item is delayed by unforeseeable contingencies beyond the control of the Contractor which would cause a delay in the Project completion; 15.3.2.2 If any specified or pre-qualified item is found to be unusable or unavailable due to a change by the manufacturer or other circumstances; or 15.3.2.3 If the Contractor desires to provide a more recently developed material, equipment, or manufactured model from the same named manufacturer than the one specified or pre-qualified; or 15.3.2.4 If the specified material and/or equipment inadvertently lists only a single manufacturer.

15.4 Contractor shall submit each request for Equal or Substitution to the Architect or Engineer who shall review each request and make the following recommendations to the Owner:

15.4.1 Acceptance or non-acceptance of the adequacy of the submission and required back-up, 15.4.2 Determination of the category of the request for Substitution or Equal, and 15.4.3 Overall recommendation for approval or rejection of the Substitution or Equal. The determination of the category as a Substitution may be grounds for an immediate rejection by the Owner.

15.5 Approval of the Owner for each Equal or Substitution shall be obtained before the Contractor proceeds with the Work. The decision of the Commissioner, in this regard, shall be final and binding on the Contractor. 15.6 No extension of time will be allowed for the time period required for consideration of any Substitution or Equal. No extension of time will be allowed and no responsibility will be assumed by the Owner when a Contractor submits a request for Substitution or Equal, whether such request be approved or denied, and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damages for delay. 15.7 If the Contractor submits any request for an Equal or a Substitution, he shall bear the burden of proof that such requested Equal or Substitution meets the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. 15.8 The Contractor shall purchase no materials or supplies for the Work which is subject to any chattel mortgage or which are under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work. 15.9 All products and systems supplied to the State as a result of a purchase by a Contractor shall be certified that, to the best of the supplier's knowledge, there are no materials that are classified as hazardous materials being used within the assembly. Hazardous materials include, but are not limited

to, products such as asbestos, lead, and other materials that have proven to cause a health risk by their presence.

ARTICLE 16 INSPECTION AND TESTS

16.1 The purpose of the inspections will be to assure that the Work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. These inspections shall include, but not be limited to, all inspections and testing as required by the Owner, and any authorities have jurisdiction. 16.2 All material and workmanship, if not otherwise designated by the Specifications, shall be subject to inspection, examination and test by the Commissioner at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction and at any and all places where such manufacture and/or construction is carried on. The Contract Documents additionally identify the parties responsible for performing and paying for the required testing and inspections. All required tests performed in a laboratory will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, except when the tests show the Work to be defective. The Contractor shall pay for all the costs associated with re-tests and re-inspections for all tests and inspections which fail. The Owner will issue a deduct Change Order to recover said retesting costs from the Contractor. All other tests, unless otherwise specified, shall be made at the Contractor’s expense. Notice of the time of all tests to be made at the site shall be given to all interested parties, including the Owner. 16.3 Without additional cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly furnish facilities, labor and materials necessary to coordinate and perform operational tests and checkout of the Work. The Contractor shall furnish promptly all reasonable facilities, labor, and materials necessary to make all such testing safe and convenient. 16.4 If, at any time before final payment and Acceptance of the Work, the Commissioner considers it necessary or advisable to examine of any portion of the Work already completed by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall, upon request, furnish promptly all necessary facilities, labor, and materials. If such Work is found to be defective in any material respect, as determined by the Owner, because of a fault of the Contractor or any of the Contractor’s Subcontractors, or if any Work shall have been covered without the approval or consent of the Commissioner (whether or not it is found to be defective), the Contractor shall be liable for testing costs and all costs of correction, including removal and/or demolition of the defective Work, including labor, material, and testing, including labor, material, re-testing or re-inspecting, services of required consultants, additional supervision, the Commissioner’s and the Construction Administrator’s administrative costs, and other costs for services of other consultants. 16.5 Cost of Systems Commissioning Retesting: The cost to retest a pre-functional or functional test, if the Contractor is responsible for the deficiency, shall be the Contractor’s. If the Contractor is not responsible, any cost




recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the Contractor.

16.5.1 For a deficiency identified, not related to any pre-functional checklist or start-up fault, the following shall apply: The Commissioning Agent (CxA) and Construction Administrator will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no “charge” to the Contractor for their time. However, the Commissioning Agent’s and Construction Administrator’s time for additional testing will be charged to the Contractor. 16.5.2 The time for the Systems Commissioning Agent and Construction Administrator to direct any retesting required because a specific pre-functional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be back charged to the Contractor. 16.5.3 Any required retesting by any Subcontractor shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the Contractor.

ARTICLE 17

ROYALTIES AND PATENTS

17.1 If the Contractor desires to use any design, device, material or process covered by a patent or copyright, the Contractor shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the holder of said patent or copyright. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of this legal agreement to the Owner. 17.2 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Construction Administrator for any costs, expenses and damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of any infringement of a patent or a copyright, at any time during the prosecution or after the Final payment of the Work.

ARTICLE 18 SURVEYS, PERMITS AND REGULATIONS

18.1 Unless otherwise provided for, the Contractor shall furnish surveys necessary for the execution of the Work. The Owner will furnish the Contractor with two base lines and a benchmark. 18.2 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and the occupancy and use of the completed Work. 18.3 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations including building and fire safety codes relating to the performance of the Work. 18.4 If underground utilities may be involved in part of the Work the Contractor is required to request “Call-Before-You-Dig” to verify the location of underground utilities at least (3) Working Days, as further defined under Paragraph 1.71 herein, prior to the start of any excavation. The Contractor shall also notify the Owner and Agency at least (3) Working Days prior to the start of any excavation. If “Call-Before-You-Dig” fails or refuses to respond to the Contractor’s request, then the Contractor shall obtain the services of a qualified

underground utility locating firm, at no additional cost to the Owner, to verify locations of underground utilities prior to the start of any excavation. The Contractor shall be held responsible for providing safety, protecting the Work and protecting workmen as necessary to perform the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and protecting all original utility mark-out at no additional cost to the Owner.

ARTICLE 19 PROTECTION OF THE WORK,

PERSONS AND PROPERTY

19.1 The Contractor shall continuously and adequately protect the Work against damage from any cause, and shall protect materials and supplies furnished by the Contractor or Subcontractors, whether or not incorporated in the Work, and shall make good any damage unless it be due directly to errors in the Contract Documents or is caused by agents or employees of the Owner. 19.2 To the extent required by law, by public authority, or made necessary in order to safeguard the health and welfare of the personnel or occupants of any of the state institutions, the Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property and persons, and provide and maintain all facilities, including but not limited, to passageways, guard fences, lights, and barricades necessary for such protection. 19.3 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the Work and shall comply with applicable provisions of federal and state safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the Work is being performed. The Contractor shall also comply with the applicable provisions of the Associated General Contractors’ “Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction”, the standards of the Connecticut Labor Department and Occupational Safety and Hazard Association (OSHA). 19.4 The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of employees of the State and the public, and shall post danger signs warning against any dangerous condition or hazard created by such things as protruding nails, well holes, elevator hatchways, scaffolding, window openings, excavations, tripping hazards or slipping, stairways and falling materials. 19.5 The Contractor shall designate a qualified and responsible on-site staff person, whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. The name and position of the designated person shall be reported to the Owner by the Contractor at the commencement of the Contract. 19.6 The Contractor shall at all times protect excavations, trenches, buildings, and all items of Work from damage by rain, water from melted snow or ice, surface water run off and subsurface water usual for the vicinity at the time of operations; and provide all pumps and equipment and enclosures to insure such protection.




19.7 The Contractor shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and provide all pumping necessary to keep excavation, basements, footings and foundations free of water. 19.8 The Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as may be required for access to the site and proper protection and prosecution of the Work. 19.9 The Contractor shall install bracing, shoring, sheathing, sheet piling, caissons and any other underground facilities as required for safety and proper execution of the Work, and shall remove this portion of the Work when no longer necessary. 19.10 During cold weather the Contractor shall protect all Work from damage. If low temperature makes it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, the Contractor may cease Work upon the written approval of the Commissioner.

ARTICLE 20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

20.1 Unless expressly provided for otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall include in the proposed contract bid price as stated on the Bid Proposal Form, the costs of all temporary utilities required for Project completion and protection of the Work. Said temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, lighting, heating, cooling, electrical power, water, telephone, sanitary facilities, and potable water.

ARTICLE 21 CORRECTION OF WORK

21.1 The Contractor shall promptly and without expense to the Owner remove from the premises all materials rejected by or unacceptable to the Commissioner as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether incorporated in the Work or not. 21.2 The Contractor shall promptly and without expense to the Owner replace any such materials, which do not conform to the Contract Documents, and shall bear the expense of making good all Work of other Contractors or Subcontractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. 21.3 If the Contractor, after receipt of notice from the Owner, shall fail to remove such rejected or unacceptable materials within a reasonable time as fixed in said notice, the Owner may remove and store such materials at the expense of the Contractor. 21.4 Such action shall not affect the obligation of the Contractor to replace and complete assembly and installation of the Work and to bear the expenses referred to above. Prior to the correction of rejected or unacceptable Work or if the Commissioner deems it inexpedient or undesirable to correct any portion of the Work which was rejected, deemed unacceptable, or not done in accordance with the Contract

Documents, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by such amount as, in the judgment of the Commissioner, shall be equitable. 21.5 No extension of time will be given to the Contractor for correction of rejected or unacceptable Work. All significant punchlist Work shall be completed before Substantial Completion is determined. The remaining minor punchlist Work, as determined by the Commissioner, shall be completed within ninety (90) Days of established Substantial Completion date. 21.6 Final Payment shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the defects in material or workmanship. 21.7 Unless expressly provided for otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall remedy any rejected or unacceptable Work, and any Work found to be not conforming to the Contract Documents which is discovered within 18 Months after the date of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall pay for any damage to other Work caused by such nonconforming Work or any damage created in correcting the nonconforming Work.

ARTICLE 22 GUARANTEES and WARRANTIES

22.1 Unless expressly provided for otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide a Warranty on the Work for an 18-Month period from the date of Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall warrant that the equipment, materials and workmanship are of good quality and new, unless permitted elsewhere by the Contract Documents, and that the Work shall be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted and that the Work conforms to the Contract Documents. 22.2 Disclaimers and limitations from manufactures, Subcontractors, suppliers or installers to the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of the Warranty on the Work. The Contract Documents detail the related damages, reinstatement of Warranty, replacement cost and Owner’s recourse.

ARTICLE 23 CUTTING, FITTING, PATCHING, AND DIGGING

23.1 The Contractor will perform or will cause the Subcontractors to perform all cutting, fitting, or patching of the portion(s) of the Work that may be required to make the several parts thereof joined and coordinated in a manner satisfactory to the Commissioner and in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 23.2 The responsibility for defective or ill-timed Work shall be with the Contractor, but such responsibility shall not in any way relieve the Subcontractor who performed such Work. Except with the consent of the Commissioner, neither the Contractor nor any of its Subcontractors shall cut or alter the Work of any other Contractor or Subcontractor.




ARTICLE 24

CLEANING UP 24.1 The Contractor shall, on a daily basis, keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish. 24.2 Prior to Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the site of the Work, all rubbish, all temporary structures, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials, supplies, and equipment which may have been used in the performance of the Work. If the Commissioner in his sole discretion determines that the Contractor has failed to clean the work site, the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge the cost of such removal to the Contractor. A deduct Change Order will be issued by the Owner to recover such cost.

ARTICLE 25 ALL WORK SUBJECT TO CONTROL OF THE

COMMISSIONER

25.1 The Commissioner hereby declares that the CT DCS Project Manager is the Commissioner’s only authorized representative to act in matters involving the Owner’s, and/or Architect’s or Engineer's, ability to revoke, alter, enlarge or relax any requirement of the Contract Documents; to settle disputes between the Contractor and the Construction Administrator; and act on behalf of the Commissioner. In all such matters, the provisions of Articles 13 and 14 herein shall guide the CT DCS Project Manager. 25.2 In no event may the Contractor act on any instruction of the Agency without written consent of the Owner. In the event the Contractor acts without such consent, he does so at his own risk and at his own expense, not only for the Work performed, but for the removal of such Work as determined necessary by the Commissioner. 25.3 In the performance of the Work, The Contractor shall abide by all orders, directions, and requirements of the Commissioner at such time and places and by such methods and in such manner and sequence as the Commissioner may require. 25.4 The Commissioner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability and fitness of all parts of the Work, shall interpret the plans, Specifications, Contract Documents and extra work orders and shall decide all other questions in connection with the Work. 25.5 The Contractor shall employ no plant, equipment, materials, methods, or persons to which the Commissioner objects and shall remove no plant materials, equipment, or other facilities from the site of the Work without the permission of the Commissioner. Upon request, the Commissioner shall confirm in writing any oral order, direction, requirement or determination. 25.6 In accordance with Section 4b-24 of the Connecticut General Statutes, the public auditors of the State of Connecticut and the auditors or accountants of the

Commissioner of Construction Services shall have the right to audit and make copies of the books of any Contractor employed by the Commissioner.

ARTICLE 26 AUTHORITY OF THE CONSTRUCTION

ADMINISTRATOR

26.1 The Construction Administrator employed by the Commissioner is authorized to inspect all Work for conformance to the Contract Documents. The Construction Administrator is authorized to reject all Work found to be defective, unacceptable and nonconforming to the Contract Documents. Such inspections and rejections may extend to all or any part of the Work, and to the preparation or manufacture of the material to be used. 26.2 The Construction Administrator is not empowered to revoke, alter, enlarge, or relax any requirements of the Contract Documents, or to issue instructions contrary to the Contract Documents. The Construction Administrator shall in no case act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, nor shall the Construction Administrator interfere with the management of the Work by the Contractor. Any advice, which the Construction Administrator may give the Contractor, shall in no way be construed as binding the Commissioner or Owner in any way, nor releasing the Contractor from the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. 26.3 In any dispute arising between the Contractor and the Construction Administrator with reference to inspection and rejection of the Work, the Construction Administrator may suspend Work on the non-compliant portion of the Work until the dispute can be referred to and decided by the Commissioner.

ARTICLE 27 SCHEDULE OF VALUES,

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

27.1 Immediately after the signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish for the use of the Commissioner, as a basis for estimating partial payments, a certified Schedule of Values, totaling the Contract Sum and broken down into quantities and unit costs, as outlined in the Contract Documents and as directed by the Owner. The Schedule of Values must reflect true costs and be in sufficient detail to be an effective tool for monitoring the progress of the Work Upon request of the Commissioner; the Contractor shall supply copies of signed Contracts, vendor quotations, etc. as back up to the Schedule of Values. 27.2 Approval of the Schedule of Values by the Commissioner is required prior to any payment by the Owner. 27.3 The Schedule of Values shall include a breakdown of the Contractor’s general condition costs.

27.3.1 Non-recurring costs, (i.e. Mobilization costs, utility hook-ups, temporary heat) will be paid at the time of occurrence.




27.3.2 Reoccurring costs will be paid in proportion to the percent of completion of the Project. 27.3.3 Further detail can be found in the General Requirements 01.29.76; paragraphs 1.3.B.4 for this project.

27.4 The Schedule of Values shall include a breakdown of Contract closeout costs including systems certification testing and acceptance, training, Warranties, Guarantees, As-Built Drawings and attic stock. 27.5 The Contractor shall make periodic applications for payment, which shall be subdivided into categories corresponding with the approved Schedule of Values and shall be in such numbers of copies as may be designated by the Commissioner.

ARTICLE 28 PARTIAL PAYMENTS

28.1 Commissioner will examine the Contractor’s Applications For Payments to determine, in the opinion of the Commissioner, the amounts that properly represent the value of the Work completed and the materials suitably stored on the site. 28.2 In making such Application For Payment for the Work, there shall be deducted seven and one-half percent (7.5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment to be retained by the Owner as Retainage until Final Completion.

28.2.1 The Commissioner has the sole discretion in the determination of reduction in Retainage. At fifty percent (50%) completion of the Work the Owner shall issue a “Contractor’s Performance Evaluation”. If the Contractor receives a performance evaluation score of “Good” or better, then the Retainage withheld may be reduced to five percent (5%). All subsequent Applications for Payment shall be subject to five percent (5%) Retainage. Upon Substantial Completion, the Retainage may be reduced at the request of the Contractor and recommendation of the CT DCS Project Manager. In the event of a reduction in Retainage to below five percent (5%), the minimum Retainage withheld shall not be less than the CT DCS Project Manager’s estimate of the remaining Work or two and one-half percent (2.5%), which ever is greater. All requests for Retainage Reduction shall be done on CT DCS Form 7048 General Contractor Retainage Reduction Request, which can be found at the end of the General Conditions. 28.2.2 Subsequent to Substantial Completion, in limited circumstances, at the sole discretion of the Commissioner, a reduction of Retainage below Two and one-half percent (2.5%) may be considered. 28.2.3 A “Good” Contractor’s Performance Evaluation score shall be defined as a minimum total score of sixty percent (60%).

28.3 The decision of the Commissioner to reduce the Retainage rate will be based upon the Contractor’s Performance Evaluation score for completed portions of the

Work as set out above and other factors that the Commissioner may find appropriate as follows:

28.3.1 The Contractor’s timely submission of an appropriate and complete CPM Schedule or Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values, in compliance with the Contract requirements and the prompt resolution of the Owner’s and/or Architect’s or Engineer's comments on the submitted material resulting in an appropriate basis for progress of the Work. 28.3.2 The Contractor’s timely and proper submission of all Contract Document required submissions: including, but not limited to, Shop Drawings, material certificates and material samples and the prompt resolution of the Owners and/or Architect's or Engineer's comments on the submitted material, resulting in an appropriate progress of the Work. 28.3.3 The Contractor’s provision of proper and adequate supervision and home office support of the Project. 28.3.4 The Work completed to date has been installed or finished in a manner acceptable to the Owner. 28.3.5 The progress of the Work is consistent with the approved CPM Schedule or Construction Schedule. 28.3.6 All approved credit change orders have been invoiced. 28.3.7 All Change Order requests for pricing are current. 28.3.8 The Contractor has and is maintaining a clean worksite in accordance with the Contract Documents. 28.3.9 All Subcontractor payments are current at the time of reduction request. 28.3.10 Contractor is compliant with set-aside provisions of the contract. 28.3.2.11 Pursuant to C.G.S. Sec. 4a-101, the General Contractor shall compile evaluation information during the performance of the contract on each of its subcontractors who are performing work with a value in excess of five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000.00). The General Contractor shall complete and submit to the State of Connecticut Department of Construction Services (CT DCS) evaluations of each such subcontractor upon fifty percent (50%) completion of the project and upon Substantial Completion of the project. The General Contractor acknowledges that its failure to complete and submit these evaluations in a timely manner may, by statute; result in a delay in project funding and, consequently, payment to the General Contractor.

28.4 No payments will be made for improperly stored or protected materials or unacceptable Work. 28.5 At his or her sole discretion, the Commissioner may allow to be included in the monthly requisitions payment requests for materials and equipment stored off the site.

28.5.1 In the event the Commissioner allows the Contractor to include in its requisitions payment requests for materials and equipment stored off the site, the Contractor shall also submit any additional bonds and/or insurance certificates relating to off-site stored materials




and equipment, and follow such other procedures as may be required by the State to obtain the Commissioner's approval of such requests. 28.5.2 The Architect or Engineer, or Construction Administrator shall have inspected said materials and equipment and recommended payment therefore. The Contractor shall pay for the cost of the Architect's or Engineer's, or Construction Administrator's time and expense in performing these inspection services.

ARTICLE 29 DELIVERY OF STATEMENT SHOWING

AMOUNTS DUE FOR WAGES, MATERIALS, AND SUPPLIES

29.1 For each Application for Payment under this Contract, the Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor and every Subcontractor to submit a written verified statement, in a form satisfactory to the Owner, showing in detail all amounts then due and unpaid by such Contractor or Subcontractor for daily or weekly wages to all laborers employed by it for the performance of the Work or to other persons for materials, equipment or supplies delivered at the site. 29.2 The term “laborers” as used herein shall include workmen, workwomen, and mechanics. 29.3 Failure to comply with this requirement may result in the Owner withholding the Application for Payment pursuant to Article 28.

ARTICLE 30 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

30.1 Substantial Completion:

30.1.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work or a portion thereof is Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall request an inspection of said Work in writing to the Construction Administrator. The request shall certify that the Contractor has completed its own inspection prior to the request and that the Contractor is compliant with all requirements of Section 01 77 00 of the General Requirements. The request must also include a statement that a principal or senior executive of the Contractor is ready, willing and able to attend a walk through inspection with the Architect or Engineer. 30.1.2 Upon receipt of the request, the Architect or Engineer, Construction Administrator and Owner, will make an inspection to determine if the Work or designated portion thereof is Substantially Complete. A principal or senior executive of the Contractor shall accompany the Architect or Engineer during each inspection/re-inspection. If the inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the inspection list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item. 30.1.3 The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection. The determination of Substantial Completion is solely within the discretion of the Owner. Any

costs for re-inspection beyond one, shall be at the expense of the Contractor and such costs will be recovered by issuance of a credit Change Order. When the Work or designated portion thereof is determined to be Substantially Complete, the Contractor will be provided a Certificate of Substantial Completion from the Owner. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the date when the responsibilities of the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, are transferred to the Owner and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the inspection list accompanying the Certificate. If the punch list is not complete in 90 Days, the Owner reserves the right to complete the outstanding punch list items with their own forces or by awarding separate contracts and to deduct the cost thereof from the amounts remaining due to the Contractor. 30.1.4 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be signed by the Construction Administrator, Owner, and Architect or Engineer. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Construction Administrator and Architect or Engineer, the Owner shall make payment reflecting adjustment in Retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents.

30.2 Acceptance:

30.2.1 Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall forward to the Construction Administrator a written notice that the Work is ready for inspection and Acceptance. 30.2.2 When the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Document as determined by the Owner a Certificate of Acceptance shall be issued by the Owner.

ARTICLE 31 FINAL PAYMENT

31.1 The Owner reserves the right to retain for a period of thirty (30) Days after filing of the Certificate of Acceptance the amount therein stated less all prior payments and advances whatsoever to or for the account of the Contractor. 31.2 All prior estimates and payments, including those relating to extra or additional Work, shall be subject to correction by the Final Payment. 31.3 No Application for Payment, Final or Partial, shall act as a release to the Contractor or the Contractor’s sureties from any obligations under this Contract. 31.4 The Architect or Engineer and Construction Administrator will promptly issue the Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said Final Payment is due and payable.




31.5 Final Payment shall not be released until a Certificate of Acceptance and a Certificate of Compliance have been issued. 31.6 Neither Final Payment nor any Retainage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Owner the following:

31.6.1 An affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied. 31.6.2 A certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after Final Payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire without at least 30 Days prior written notice to the Owner. 31.6.3 A written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents. 31.6.4 Written consent of surety, if any, to Final Payment. 31.6.5 If required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorney’s fees.

ARTICLE 32 OWNER’S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENTS

32.1 The Commissioner may withhold a portion of any Payment due the Contractor that may, in the judgment of the Commissioner, be necessary:

32.1.1 To assure the payment of just claims then due and unpaid to any persons supplying labor or materials for the Work. 32.1.2 To protect Owner from loss due to defective, unacceptable or non-conforming Work not remedied by the Contractor. 32.1 To protect the Owner from loss due to injury to persons or damage to the Work or property of other Contractors, Subcontractors, or others caused by the act or neglect of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

32.2 The Owner shall have the right to apply any amount withheld under this Article as the Owner may deem proper to satisfy protection from claims. The amount withheld shall be considered a payment to the Contractor. 32.3 The Owner has the right to withhold payment if the Contractor fails to provide accurate submissions of Submittals,

up date the status including but not limited to the following: As-Built Drawings, request for information (RFI) log, Schedule, submittal log, Change Order log, certified payrolls and daily reports and all other requirement of the Contract Documents. 32.4 If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorney’s fees.

ARTICLE 33 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE

CONTRACT

33.1 The Commissioner shall have the authority to suspend the Work wholly or in part, for such period or periods as the Commissioner considers being in the best interests of the State, or in the interests of public necessity, convenience or safety. During such periods the Contractor shall store all materials and equipment, in such a manner to prevent the materials and equipment from being damaged in any way, and the Contractor shall take precautions to protect the Work from damage.

33.1.1 If the Commissioner, in writing, orders the performance of all or any portion of the Work to be suspended or delayed for an unreasonable period of time (i.e. not originally anticipated, customary, or inherent in the construction industry) and the Contractor believes that additional compensation and/or Contract Time is due as a result of such suspension or delay, the Contractor shall submit to the Commissioner in writing a request for a Contract adjustment within 7 Days of receipt of the notice to resume Work. The request shall set forth the specific reasons and support for said adjustment. 33.1.2 The Commissioner shall evaluate any such requests received. If the Commissioner agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the Contract has increased as a result of such suspension and that the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the Contractor, its suppliers, or Subcontractors, and was not caused by weather, then the Commissioner will make a reasonable adjustment, excluding profit, of the Contract terms. The Commissioner will notify the Contractor of the determination as to what adjustments of the Contract, if any, that the Commissioner deems warranted. 33.1.3 No Contract adjustment will be made unless the Contractor has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. 33.1.4 No Contract adjustment will be made under this Article to the extent that performance would have been suspended or delayed by any other cause within the Contractor’s control or by any factor for which the Contractor is responsible under the Contract; or that such an adjustment is provided for or excluded under other term or condition of this Contract.

33.2 Notwithstanding any provision or language in the




Contract to the contrary, the State may terminate the Contract whenever the Commissioner determines at his sole discretion that such termination is in the best interests of the State. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a written Notice of Termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination shall be effective.

33.2.1 In the event of such termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to reasonable compensation as determined by the Commissioner, however, no claim for lost Overhead or profits shall be allowed. 33.2.2 All Work and materials obtained by the Contractor for the Work, that have been incorporated into the Work, inspected, tested as required, accepted by the Commissioner, and paid for by the State, shall become the property of the State. 33.2.3 Materials obtained by the Contractor for the Work that have been inspected, tested as required, and accepted by the Commissioner, and that are not incorporated into the Work, shall, at the option of the Commissioner, be purchased from the Contractor at actual cost as shown by receipted bills. To this cost shall be added all actual costs for delivery at such points of delivery as may be designated by the Commissioner, as shown by actual cost records. 33.2.4 Termination of the Contract shall not relieve the Contractor or its Surety of their responsibilities for the completed Work, nor shall it relieve the Contractor’s Surety of its obligations to ensure completion of the Work and to pay legitimate claims arising out of Work.

ARTICLE 34 SUBLETTING OR ASSIGNING OF CONTRACT

34.1 The Contract or any portion thereof, or the Work provided for therein, or the right, title, or interest of the Contractor therein may not be sublet, sold, transferred, assigned, or otherwise disposed of to any person, firm, or corporation without the written consent of the Commissioner. 34.2 No person, firm, or corporation other than the Contractor to whom the Contract was awarded shall be permitted to commence Work at the site of the Contract until such consent has been granted.

ARTICLE 35 CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE

35.1 The Contractor shall not start Work under the Contract until they have obtained insurance as stated in SECTIONS 00 62 16 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE and 00 40 13 BID PROPOSAL FORM, subsections 4.4.2 and 4.4.3, of the Project Manual and until the insurance has been approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractor to start Work until the same insurance has been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Owner or the Contractor’s insurance provides coverage on behalf of the Subcontractor. The Contractor shall send Certificates of Liability Insurance to the Bidding and Contracts Unit, Department of Construction Services, 165 Capitol Avenue, Room G-35, Hartford, CT 06106 unless otherwise directed in

writing. Presented below is a narrative summary of the insurance required.

35.1.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance including contractual liability, products/completed operations, broad form property damage and independent Contractors. The limits shall be no less than $1,000,000 each occurrence and $2,000,000 annual aggregate. Coverage for hazards of explosion, collapse and underground (X-C-U) and for asbestos abatement when applicable to this Contract, must also be included when applicable to the Work to be performed. The State of Connecticut, the Department of Construction Services, and their respective officers, agents, and employees shall be named as an Additional Insured. This coverage shall be provided on a primary basis.

35.1.2 Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability insurance providing a total limit of $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury or death of persons in any one accident or occurrence and for all damages arising out of injury or destruction of property in any one accident or occurrence and subject to a total (aggregate) limit of $2,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury to or death of persons in all accidents or occurrences and out of injury to or destruction of property during the policy period. This coverage shall be for and in the name of the State of Connecticut.

35.1.3 Automobile Liability The operation of all motor vehicles including those owned, non-owned and hired or used in connection with the Contract shall be covered by Automobile Liability insurance providing for a total limit of $1,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injuries to or death of all persons in any one accident or occurrence and for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property in any one accident or occurrence. In cases where an insurance policy shows an aggregate limit as part of the automobile liability coverage, the aggregate limit must be at least $2,000,000. This coverage shall be provided on a primary basis. Should the Contractor not own any automobiles, the automobile & liability requirement shall be amended to allow the Contractor to maintain only hired and non-owned liability coverage.

35.1.4 Excess Liability (Other than Umbrella Form) insurance in the amount of $5,000,000 for bids of $1,000,000 - $10,000,000 and in the amount of $10,000,000 for bids of $10,000,001 - $20,000,000. Refer to Section 00 92 00 Amendments of the Project Manual for Excess Liability insurance requirements for bids exceeding $20,000,000.

35.1.5 Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability as required by Connecticut Law and Employers’ Liability with a limit of not less than $100,000 per occurrence, $500,000 disease policy limit and $100,000 disease each employee. When Work is on or contiguous to navigable bodies of waterways and ways adjoining, the Contractor shall include the Federal Act endorsement for the U.S. Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers Act.




35.1.6 Special Hazards Insurance, if required, will be stated in SECTION 00 40 13 BID PROPOSAL FORM, subsection 4.4.2 of this Project Manual. This includes coverage for explosion, collapse or underground damage and for asbestos abatement when applicable to this Contract and shall be no less than $1,000,000 each occurrence.

35.1.7 Builder’s Risk Insurance, if required, will be stated in Section 00 40 13 Bid Proposal Form, subsection 4.4.3 of this Project Manual.

35.1.8 Inland Marine/Transit Insurance: With respect to property with values in excess of $100,000 which is rigged, hauled or situated at the site pending installation, the Contractor shall maintain inland marine/transit insurance provided the coverage is not afforded by a Builder’s Risk policy.

35.1.9 When required to be maintained, the Builder’s Risk and/or Inland Marine/Transit Insurance policy shall endorse the State of Connecticut as a Loss Payee and the policy shall state it is for the benefit of and payable to the State of Connecticut.

35.2 Satisfying Limits Under an Umbrella Policy: If necessary, the Contractor may satisfy the minimum limits required above for either Commercial General Liability, Automobile Liability, and Employer’s Liability coverage under an Umbrella or Excess Liability policy. The underlying limits may be set at the minimum amounts required by the Umbrella or Excess Liability policy provided the combined limits meet at least the minimum limit for each required policy. The Umbrella or Excess Liability policy shall have an Annual Aggregate at a limit not less than two (2) times the highest per occurrence minimum limit required above for any of the required coverages. The State of Connecticut shall be specifically endorsed as an Additional Insured on the Umbrella or Excess Liability policy, unless the Umbrella or Excess Liability policy provides continuous coverage to the underlying policies on a complete “Follow-Form” basis.

35.3 The Contractor shall, at its sole expense, maintain in full force and effect at all times during the life of the Contract or the performance of Work hereunder, insurance coverage as described herein. Certificates shall include a minimum thirty (30)-day endeavor to notify requirement to the Owner prior to any cancellation or non-renewal.

35.4 The Contractor shall be fully and solely responsible for any costs or expenses as a result of a coverage deductible, coinsurance penalty, or self-insured retention, including any loss not covered because of the operation of such deductible, coinsurance penalty, or self-insured retention.

35.5 The requirement contained herein as to types and limits of insurance coverage to be maintained by the Contractor are not intended to and shall not in any manner limit or qualify the liabilities and obligations assumed by the Contractor.

35.6 Hold Harmless Provisions: The Contractor shall at all times indemnify and save harmless the State of Connecticut, the Department of Construction Services, and their respective officers, agents, and employees, on account of any and all claims, damages, losses, litigation, expenses, counsel fees and compensation arising out of injuries (including death) sustained by or alleged to have been sustained by the officers, agents, and employees of said State or Department, or of the Contractor, his Subcontractor, or materialmen and from injuries (including death) sustained by or alleged to have been sustained by the public, any or all persons on or near the Work, or by any other person or property, real or personal (including property of said State or Department) caused in whole or in part by the acts, omissions, or neglect or the Contractor including, but not limited to, any neglect in safeguarding the Work or through the use of unacceptable materials in constructing the Work of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, materialman, or anyone directly employed by them or any of them while engaged in the performance of the Contract, including the entire elapsed time from the date of the Notice to Proceed or the actual Commencement Of The Work whichever occurs first until its completion as certified by the Department of Construction Services.

ARTICLE 36 FOREIGN MATERIALS

36.1 Preference shall be given to articles or materials manufactured or produced in the United States, Canada, and Mexico, (the members of the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA)); and the products shall meet all of the referenced standards and Specifications for conditions of performance, quality, and price with duty being equal. 36.2 Only articles or materials manufactured or produced in the United States, Canada, and Mexico, (the members of the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA)), will be allowed. The foregoing provisions shall not apply to foreign articles or materials required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 37 HOURS OF WORK

37.1 No person shall be employed to work or be permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any Day or more than forty (40) hours in any week for any Work provided in the Contract, in accordance with Connecticut General Statute Section 31-57. 37.2 The operation of such limitation of hours of work may be suspended during an emergency, upon the approval of the Commissioner, in accordance with Connecticut General Statute Section 31-57.

ARTICLE 38 CLAIMS

38.1 General: When filing a formal claim under Section 4-61 (referred to as “Section 4-61” below) of the Connecticut




General Statutes (as revised), either as a lawsuit in the Superior Court or as a demand for arbitration, the Contractor must follow the procedures and comply with the requirements set forth in this Article. This Section does not, unless so specified, govern informal claims for additional compensation which the Contractor may bring before the Department. The Contractor should understand, however, that the Department may need, before the Department can resolve such a claim, the same kinds of documentation and other substantiation that it requires under this Article. It is the intent of the Department to compensate the Contractor for actual increased costs caused by or arising from acts or omissions on the part of the Department that violate legal or contractual duties owed to the Contractor by the Department. 38.2 Notice of Claim: Whenever the Contractor intends to file a formal claim against the Department under Section 4-61, seeking compensation for additional costs, the Contractor shall notify the Commissioner in writing (in strict compliance with Section 4-61) of the details of said claim. Such written notice shall contain all pertinent information described in Paragraph 38.5 below. Once formal notice of a claim under Section 4-61(b) (as revised) has been given to the Commissioner, the claimant may not change the claim in any way, in either concept or monetary amount, (1) without filing a new notice of claim and demand for arbitration to reflect any such change, and (2) without the minimum period of six months after filing of the new demand commencing again and running before any hearing on the merits of the claim may be held. The only exception to this limitation will be for damages that continue to accrue after submission of the notice, in ways described and anticipated in the notice. 38.3 Record Keeping: The Contractor shall keep daily records of all costs incurred in connection with its Work on behalf of the Department. The daily records shall identify each aspect of the Project affected by matters related to any claim for additional compensation that the Contractor has filed, intends to file, or has reason to believe that it may file against the Department; the specific Project locations where Project work has been so affected; the number of people working on the affected aspects of the Project at the pertinent time(s); and the types and number of pieces of equipment on the Project site at the pertinent time(s). Any potential or anticipated effect on the Project’s progress or Schedule which may result in a claim by the Contractor shall be noted contemporaneously with the cause of the effect, or as soon thereafter as possible. 38.4 Claim Compensation: The payment of any claim, or any portion thereof, that is deemed valid by the Department shall be made in accordance with the following provisions of this Article: 38.4.1 Compensable Items: The liability of the Department for claims will be limited to the following specifically identified items of cost, insofar as they have not otherwise been paid for by the Department, and insofar as they were caused solely by the actions or omissions of the Department or its agents (except that with regard to payment for extra work, the Department will pay to the Contractor the Overhead and profit percentages provided for in Article 13.):

38.4.1.1 Additional Project-site labor expenses. 38.4.1.2 Additional costs for materials. 38.4.1.3 Additional, unabsorbed Project-site Overhead (e.g., for mobilization and demobilization). 38.4.1.4 Additional costs for active equipment. 38.4.1.5 For each Day of Project delay or suspension caused solely by actions or omissions of the Department either:

38.4.1.5.1 an additional ten percent (10%) of the total amount of the costs identified in Subparagraphs 38.4.1.1 through 38.4.1.4 above; except that if the delay or suspension period prevented the Contractor from incurring enough Project costs under Subparagraphs 38.4.1.1 through 38.4.1.4 during that period to require a payment by the Department that would be greater than the payment described in Subparagraph 38.4.1.5.2 below, then the payment for affected home office Overhead and profit shall instead be made in the following per diem amount : 38.4.1.5.2 six percent (6%) of the original total Contract amount divided by the original number of Days of Contract Time. Payment under either 38.4.1.5.1 or 38.4.1.5.2 hereof shall be deemed to be complete and mutually satisfactory compensation for any unabsorbed home office overhead and any profit related to the period of delay or suspension.

38.4.1.6 Additional equipment costs. Only actual equipment costs shall be used in the calculation of any compensation to be made in response to claims for additional Project compensation. Actual equipment costs shall be based upon records kept in the normal course of business and in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Under no circumstances shall Blue Book or other guide or rental rates be used for this purpose (unless the Contractor had to rent the equipment from an unrelated party, in which case the actual rental charges paid by the Contractor, so long as they are reasonable, shall be used). Idle equipment, for instance, shall be paid for based only on its actual cost to the Contractor. 38.4.1.7 Subcontractor costs limited to, and determined in accordance with, Subparagraphs 38.4.1.1 through 38.4.1.5 above and applicable statutory and case law. Such Subcontractor costs may be paid for by the Department only: (a) in the context of an informal claims settlement; or (b) if the Contractor has itself paid or legally assumed, present unconditional liability for those Subcontractor costs.

38.4.2 Excusable But Not Compensable Items: The Contractor may be allowed Days but the Department will have no liability for the following non-compensable items:

38.4.2.1 Abnormal or unusually severe weather 38.4.2.2 Acts of God 38.4.2.3 Force Majeure 38.4.2.4 Concurrent Delay




38.4.3 Non-Compensable Items: The Department will have no liability for the following specifically-identified non-compensable items:

38.4.3.1 Profit, in excess of that provided for herein. 38.4.3.2 Loss of anticipated profit. 38.4.3.3 Loss of bidding opportunities. 38.4.3.4 Reduction of bidding capacity. 38.4.3.5 Home office overhead in excess of that provided for in Subparagraph 38.4.1.5 hereof. 38.4.3.6 Attorneys fees, claims preparation expenses, or other costs of claims proceedings or resolution. 38.4.3.7 Subcontractor failure to perform 38.4.3.8 Any other consequential or indirect expenses or costs, such as tort damages, or any other form of expense or damages not provided for in these specifications or elsewhere in the Contract.

38.5 Required Claim Documentation: All claims shall be submitted in writing to the Commissioner, and shall be sufficient in detail to enable the Department to ascertain the basis and the amount of each claim, and to investigate and evaluate each claim in detail. As a minimum, the Contractor must provide the following information for each and every claim and sub-claim asserted:

38.5.1 detailed factual statement of the claim, with all dates, locations and items of Work pertinent to the claim. 38.5.2 A statement of whether each requested additional amount of compensation or extension of time is based on provisions of the Contract or on an alleged breach of the Contract. Each supporting or breached Contract provision and a statement of the reasons why each such provision supports the claim must be specifically identified or explained. 38.5.3 Excerpts from manuals or other texts which are standard in the industry, if available, that support the Contractor’s claim. 38.5.4 The details of the circumstances that gave rise to the claim. 38.5.5 The date(s) on which any and all events resulting in the claim occurred, and the date(s) on which conditions resulting in the claim first became evident to the Contractor. 38.5.6 Specific identification of any pertinent document, and detailed description of the substance of any material oral communication, relating to the substance of such claim. 38.5.7 If an extension of time is sought, the specific dates and number of Days for which it is sought, and the basis or bases for the extension sought. A critical path method, bar chart, or other type of graphical schedule that supports the extension must be submitted. 38.5.8 When submitting any claim over $50,000, the Contractor shall certify in writing, under oath and in accordance with the formalities required by the contract, as to the following:

38.5.8.1 That supporting data is accurate and complete to the Contractor’s best knowledge and belief;

38.5.8.2 That the amount of the dispute and the dispute itself accurately reflects what the Contractor in good faith believes to be the Department’s liability; 38.5.8.3 The certification shall be executed by:

38.5.8.3.1 If the Contractor is an individual, the certification shall be executed by that individual. 38.5.8.3.2 If the Contractor is not an individual, the certification shall be executed by a senior company official in charge at the Contractor’s plant or location involved or an officer or general partner of the Con-tractor having overall responsibility for the conduct of the Contractor’s affairs.

38.6 Auditing of Claims: All claims filed against the Department shall be subject to audit by the Department or its agents at any time following the filing of such claim. The Contractor and its Subcontractors and suppliers shall cooperate fully with the Department's auditors. Failure of the Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its suppliers to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow the Department or its agents to fully evaluate the claim shall constitute a waiver of any portion of such claim that cannot be verified by specific, adequate, contemporaneous records, and shall bar recovery on any claim or any portion of a claim for which such verification is not produced. Without limiting the foregoing requirements, and as a minimum, the Contractor shall make available to the Department and its agents the following documents in connection with any claim that the Contractor submits:

38.6.1 Daily time sheets and foreman's daily reports. 38.6.2 Union agreements, if any. 38.6.3 Insurance, welfare, and benefits records. 38.6.4 Payroll register. 38.6.5 Earnings records. 38.6.6 Payroll tax returns. 38.6.7 Records of property tax payments. 38.6.8 Material invoices, purchase orders, and all material and supply acquisition contracts. 38.6.9 Materials cost distribution worksheets. 38.6.10 Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.). 38.6.11 Vendor rental agreements. 38.6.12 Subcontractor invoices to the Contractor, and the Contractor's certificates of payments to Subcontractors. 38.6.13 Subcontractor payment certificates. 38.6.14 Canceled checks (payroll and vendors). 38.6.15 Job cost reports. 38.6.16 Job payroll ledger. 38.6.17 General ledger, general journal (if used), and all subsidiary ledgers and journals, together with all supporting documentation pertinent to entries made in these ledgers and journals. 38.6.18 Cash disbursements journals.




38.6.19 Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Project. 38.6.20 Income tax returns for all years reflecting the operations on the Project. 38.6.21 Depreciation records on all company equipment, whether such records are maintained by the company involved, its accountant, or others. 38.6.22 If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for the Contractor's internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all such other source documents. 38.6.23 All documents which reflect the Contractor's actual profit and overhead during the years that the Project was being performed, and for each of the five years prior to the commencement of the Project. 38.6.24 All documents related to the preparation of the Contractor's bid, including the final calculations on which the total proposed Contract bid price as stated in the Bid Proposal Form was based. 38.6.25 All documents which relate to the claim or to any sub-claim, together with all documents that support the amount of damages as to each claim or sub-claim.

38.6.26 Worksheets used to prepare the claim, which indicate the cost components of each item of the claim, including but not limited to the pertinent costs of labor, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, and Subcontractors’ damages, as well as all documents which establish the relevant time periods, individuals involved, and the Project hours and the rates for the individuals. 38.6.27 The name, function, and pertinent activity of each Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s official, or employee, in volved in or knowledgeable about events that give rise to, or facts that relate to, the claim. 38.6.28 The amount(s) of additional compensation sought and a break-down of the amount(s) into the categories specified as payable under Paragraph 38.4 above. 38.6.29 The name, function, and pertinent activity of each Department official, employee, or agent involved in or knowledgeable about events that give rise to, or facts that relate to, the claim.

ARTICLE 39 DIESEL VEHICLE EMISSIONS CONTROL

39.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the following provisions:

39.1.1 All Contractor and Subcontractor diesel powered non-road construction equipment with engine horsepower (HP) ratings of 60 HP and above, that are on the Project or are assigned to the Contract for a period in excess of 30 consecutive Days, shall be retrofitted with emission control devices in order to reduce diesel emissions. In addition, all motor vehicles and/or construction equipment (both on-highway and non-road) shall comply with all pertinent State and Federal regulations relative to exhaust emission controls and safety.

39.1.2 Retrofit emission control devices shall consist of oxidation catalysts, or similar retrofit equipment control technology that is:

39.1.2.1 Included on the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) “Verified Technology List,” as may be amended from time to time http://www.epa.gov/otaq/retrofit/retroverifiedlist.htm and 39.1.2. Verified by EPA to provide a minimum emissions reduction of 20% particulate matter (PM10), 40% carbon monoxide (CO), and 50% hydrocarbons (HC).

39.1.3 Construction shall not proceed until all diesel powered non-road construction equipment meeting the criteria in provision 39.1.1 have been retrofitted, unless the Commissioner grants a waiver under provision 39.2. 39.1.4 The Contractor shall at least monthly, assess which diesel powered non-road construction equipment are subject to these provisions. The Contractor shall notify the CT DCS Project Manager of any violations of these provisions. 39.1.5 Idling of delivery and/or dump trucks, or other diesel powered equipment shall be limited to three (3) minutes during non-active use in accordance with the Regulations of Connecticut State Agencies Section 22a-74-18(b)(3)(C), which states, in part: “[N]o person shall cause or allow a Mobile Source to operate for more than three (3) consecutive minutes when such Mobile Source is not in motion, except as follows:

When a Mobile Source is forced to remain motionless because of traffic conditions or mechanical difficulties over which the operator has no control,

When it is necessary to operate defrosting, heating or cooling equipment to ensure the safety or health of the driver or passengers,

When it is necessary to operate auxiliary equipment that is located in or on the Mobile Source to accomplish the intended use of the Mobile Source,(To bring the Mobile Source to the manufacturer’s recommended)

When a Mobile Source is in queue to be inspected by U.S. military personnel prior to gaining access to a U.S. military installation.”

39.1.6 All Work shall be conducted to ensure that no harmful effects are caused to adjacent Sensitive Receptor Sites. Diesel powered engines shall be located away from fresh air intakes, air conditioners, and windows. 39.1.7 If any diesel powered non-road construction equipment is found to be in non-compliance with these provisions by the CT DCS Project Manager, the Contractor will be issued a Non-Conformance Notice and given a 24 hour period in which to bring the equipment into compliance or remove it from the Project. The Contractor’s failure to comply with these provisions shall be reason to withhold payment as described in Article 33. 39.1.8 Any costs associated with these provisions shall be included in the general cost of the contract. In addition, there shall be no time granted to the Contractor for compliance with these provisions. The Contractor’s compliance with these provisions and any associated regulations shall not be grounds for a Change Order.




39.2 The Commissioner reserves the right to waive all or portions of these provisions at his/her discretion. The Contractor may request a waiver to all or portions of these provisions with written justification to the Commissioner as to why the Contractor cannot comply with these provisions. A waiver, to be effective, must be granted in writing by the Commissioner.

END




Appendix 1 Connecticut

Department of

Construction Services

7048General Contractor

Retainage Reduction Request(SAMPLE)

Page 25 of 25 To: Allen V. Herring, P.E., CT DCS Chief Engineer

Room 265, 165 Capitol Avenue, Hartford, CT 06106 From: (Insert GC's Name ), General Contractor Subject: Project No. ( ) Reduction of Retainage at ( )% project completion In accordance with the General Conditions, Article 28 Progress Payments, (insert GC's name) hereby requests a reduction of retainage to an amount of insert written percent Percent (insert numerical percent%). The following list of items required under the General Conditions is in compliance with the terms of the contract and has been verified by the General Contractor.

DAS Contractor Performance Evaluation Score is a minimum of Sixty (60%) Percent.

Timely submission of an appropriate and complete CPM Schedule and Schedule of Values, in compliance with the Contract requirements and the prompt resolution of the Owner’s and/or A/E’s comments on the submitted material resulting in an appropriate basis for progress of the Work.

Timely and proper submission of all Contract Document required submissions: including but not limited to Shop

Drawings, material certificates and material samples and the prompt resolution of the Owner’s and/or Architect’s or Engineer’s comments on the submitted material resulting in an appropriate progress of the Work.

Proper and adequate supervision and home office support of the Project.

The Work completed to date has been installed or finished in a manner acceptable to the Owner.

The progress of the Work is consistent with the approved CPM Schedule.

All approved credit Change Orders have been invoiced.

All Change Order requests for pricing are current.

The General Contractor has and is maintaining a clean worksite in accordance with the Contract Documents.

All Subcontractor payments are current at the time of reduction request.

General Contractor is compliant with set-aside provisions of the contract.

General Contractor Certification: (Written Name) (Signature) (Date) Project Manager Recommendation: (Written Name) (Signature) (Date) Approved:

Allen V. Herring, P.E. CT DCS Chief Engineer

(Signature) (Date) CT DCS – 7048 (Rev. 12.02.11) 7000 – Construction Phase Forms

SECTION 00 72 13.1

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

FOR DESIGN � BID � BUILD

PAGE 1 OF 1

CT DCS – 5000 General Conditions (Rev. 08.12.13) Standard Form For All D�B�B Projects

Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction

For Design � Bid � Build

Department of Administrative Services

Division of Construction Services

State of Connecticut

1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS:

1.1.1 These Supplementary Conditions modify the State of Connecticut, Department of Construction Services, Section 00 72 13 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for Design – Bid' Build (Rev. 03.26.12 ), and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so modified remain in full force and effect.

1.1.2 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the Section 00 72 13 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for Design – Bid' Build (Rev. 03.26.12), have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions.

2.0 SECTION 00 72 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION FOR DESIGN � BID –

BUILD:

2.1 ADD Subsection 3.6 to ARTICLE 3, CORRELATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, as follows:

3.6 In accordance with Public Act No. 13'247 (Effective June 19, 2013), wherever the term "Commissioner of Construction Services" is used in the “Bidding Documents” or “Project Manual” the term "Commissioner of Administrative Services" shall be substituted in lieu thereof; and wherever the term "Department of Construction Services" is used in “Bidding Documents” or “Project Manual”, the term "Department of Administrative Services" shall be substituted in lieu thereof.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY

(Minor Capital Projects Less Than $5,000,000) Page 1 of 6


01 10 00 SUMMARY A. Summary: Section 01 10 00 Summary contains the following Subsections:

01 11 00 Summary of Work Not Used 01 11 13 Work Covered By Contract Documents Not Used 01 12 16 Work Sequence - Phase(s); Not Used 01 12 19 Contract Interface Not Used 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Not Used 01 14 16 Coordination With Occupants Not Used 01 14 23 Subcontractor Evaluations Not Used

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Project Number: BI-NN-665 C. Project Title: Improvements to 40 Shore Drive

It is to be completed and ready for use by the Owner and Agency within the Contract Time specified in Division 00, Section 00 11 16 “Invitation To Bid”.

D. Project Location: The project is located in Waterford, Connecticut. E. The Project Description:

1. Renovation of four toilet rooms and showers of approximately 700 gross square feet. 2. The Authority Having Jurisdiction for a Project that does not Exceed the Threshold

limitations and is not a CSUS 2020 Project, as defined by the Connecticut General Statutes, is the CT DAS / DCS Code Unit.

01 11 13 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS


B. The Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Miscellaneous Metals 2. Rough Carpentry, Architectural Woodwork, Laminate Clad Casework 3. Insulation, and Joint Sealant 4. Doors and Frames, Hardware 5. Drywall, Floor Coverings, and Painting; 6. Toilet Accessories

C. The Contractor will include in his bid, all items required in order to carry out the intent of the

work as described, shown and implied in the Contract Documents. D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility upon discovery to immediately notify the Construction

Administrator (CA), in writing, of errors, omissions, discrepancies, and instances of non-compliance with applicable codes and regulations within the documents, and of any work which will not fit or properly function if installed as indicated on the Contract Documents. Any additional costs arising from the Contractor's failure to provide such notification shall be borne by the Contractor.

E. The Work will be constructed under a single lump sum. F. Examination Of Site:




1. It is not the intent of the Documents to show all existing conditions. All contractors are advised to visit and examine the site with the Construction Administrator prior to submitting bids.

2. Contractors should investigate and satisfy themselves as to the conditions affecting the work, including but no restricted to those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, uncertainties of weather, roads or similar physical conditions of the ground, the character of equipment, and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work. The Contractor should further satisfy himself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, as well as from information presented by the Contract Documents. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with the available information shall not relieve him from the responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the Work.

3. Pre-Bid Conference: 4.1 A Pre-Bid Conference and tour of the site will be conducted as scheduled in

Division 00 Section 00 11 16 “Invitation to Bid”. This scheduled conference is the only official opportunity for the bidders to tour the site with the Owner, Architect, Engineer, Construction Administrator, and Agency.

G. Project Documents: 1. The Specifications and Drawings are intended to describe and illustrate the materials

and labor necessary for the work of this Project. 2. Throughout the Technical Specifications, the Connecticut Department of

Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridges, and Incidental Construction Form 814A, current addition including any interim and supplemental specifications are referenced. Where so referenced the requirements set forth therein are applicable and made a part hereof Copies of Form 814A are available from the Connecticut Department of Transportation at a nominal charge.

H. The General Contractor will be given 1 sets of the Contract Documents on or about the time of execution of Contract, free of charge. If additional copies are wanted, they will be available at the direct additional cost of their reproduction, to the contractor.

I. The Contractor shall receive one (1) set of AutoCAD compatible (latest version) Floor Plans on disks at no cost on or about the time of execution of the Contract from the Architect. Additional sets of AutoCAD compatible (latest version) Floor Plans on disks from the Architect at the cost of their reproduction, to the contractor.

01 12 16 WORK SEQUENCE - PHASE(S)


B. The entire Project shall be constructed in 1 Phase(s). Work of these Phase(s) shall be substantially complete, ready for occupancy within 60 Calendar Days of commencement of the Work (the “Contract Time”).

1. 01 12 19 CONTRACT INTERFACE


B. Owner: The Owner is the State of Connecticut, Department of Administrative Services. 1. The authorized representative for the Owner is Peter McCann, DCS Project

Manager. The DCS Project Manager is located at 450 Columbus Boulevard, Hartford CT 06103, Hartford, CT, 06106. Phone: 860-713-5642; E-mail: [email protected]

2. The DCS Project Manager is the authorized representative for the Department of Administrative Services Commissioner to act in matters involving revoking, altering, enlarging or relaxing any requirement of the contract documents.

C. Agency: The Connecticut State (User) Agency is Department of Developmental Services.




1. The Agency Representative is Warren Shilling. The Agency Representative’s title is Plant Facilities Engineer 2. The Agency Representative is located at CT Department of Developmental Services Central Office, 460 Capitol Avenue, Hartford. Connecticut, 06106. Phone: 860-418-8712; Fax: 860-622-2644; E-mail: [email protected].

2. The Agency Representative has the administrative authority for the facility and or site where the work is being performed but does not have the authority to change the contract documents or direct the contractor.

D. Architect And Engineer: The Architectural Firm is Amenta Emma Architects, and is located at 242 Trumbull Street, Hartford, CT 06103. The Architect representing the firm for this project is Craig Battisto. Phone: 860-549-4725 X131; Fax: 860-549-1956; E-mail: [email protected]. 1. The Architect and Engineer or their accredited representative is referred to in the

Contract Documents as "Architect" or "Architects" or "Engineer" or "Engineers" or by pronouns which imply them. As information for the Contractor, the Architect’s or Engineer's status is defined as follows: 1.1 The Architect and Engineer will not make interpretations or decisions directly

to the Contractor. All interpretations or decisions will be conveyed through the Construction Administrator.

1.2 As the authorized representative of the Department of Administrative Services Commissioner, the Architect and Engineer is responsible for review of shop drawings, materials, and equipment intended for the work, in accordance with the "General Conditions", and the "Supplementary Conditions”.

1.3 Wherever the Architect or Engineer is mentioned in the documents in connection with an administrative function, it shall include the Construction Administrator in that function except for shop drawings.

E. Construction Administrator: The Construction Administrator is TBD and is located at TBD, Connecticut, TBD. Phone: TBD; Fax: TBD; E-mail: TBD. 1. The Construction Administrator is referred to in the Contract Documents as

"Construction Administrator" or "Construction Manager" or by pronouns which imply it. All communications concerning the project will be directed through the Construction Administrator or a designated representative(s).

2. As information to the Contractor, the Construction Administrator’s status is defined as follows: 2.1 The Construction Administrator is the Owner's Agent who will, among other

thing’s, monitor the General Contractor's performance, scheduling and construction, process shop drawings, material, and equipment submittals, review and process periodic billings, review and recommend cost changes.

2.2 The Construction Administrator will process all requests for information, interpretations and decisions regarding the meaning and intent of the Contract Documents, consulting with appropriate parties prior to rendering the interpretations or decisions to the Contractor. All such requests and replies shall be in writing.

F. PMWeb Project Management: 1. DCS is using PMWeb through the PSS Group as the project management

collaborative software tool for this project. 2. The General Contractor is required to utilize PMWeb for the duration of this project

and shall provide all project information via this program management software. This includes, but is not limited to contracts, applications for payment, change orders, change order proposals, requests for information, etc.

3. The General Contractor shall carry in their bid the appropriate cost as per the following table:

Project estimated construction cost (based on the upper value listed in the Bid Proposal)

PMWeb Cost




Less than or equal to $2.0 Million $4,000.00

More than $2.0 Million, but less than $5.0 Million $7,000.00

More than $5.0 Million, but less than $20.0 Million $8,000.00

Greater than $20.0 Million $9,000.00

4. The General Contractor shall arrange for training as directed by the DCS Project Manager (or by the Construction Administrator). This training is for the General Contractor’s Staff, the DCS Project Manager, the Construction Administrator, the Architect, Engineer, and their representatives. The cost for the training shall be included by the General Contractor in the General Conditions costs for this project. The Training Cost is included in the cost shown in the above table.

5. The General Contractor shall contact PSS Group for the use of the PMWeb licenses and training at http://www.pmweb.com, and shall render the scheduled payment identified above to PSS Group Phone: (617) 207-7080, or Fax: (978) 246-0248.

6. DCS will be establishing a project specific email “file” address for this project. The General Contractor shall send an electronic “file” copy of all project documents to this email address, to include but not limited to all project correspondence, project emails, forms, etc.

7. The General Contractor is required to scan all documents that contain wet (ink) signatures and send a copy of those documents electronically to the DCS Project Manager and the project specific email “file” address. The hard copy of the wet signature documents shall be transmitted as directed by the DCS Project Manager. This includes, but is not limited to all contracts, change orders, applications for payment, closeout documentation, etc.

01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS


B. The Contractor shall confine his operations, including storage of apparatus, equipment and materials to the contract limit lines as directed by the Construction Administrator.

C. The areas and/or spaces, including their access, shall be maintained free and clear throughout the contract term.

D. Parking for Contractor's employees will be limited to an area (or areas) designated by the Construction Administrator. The Contractor may be required to provide identification stickers for employees' cars.

01 14 16 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS


B. Partial Agency Occupancy: The Agency reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Should it become necessary or advisable, as the work nears final completion, for the

Agency to occupy a portion of the building prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall cooperate in completing such areas and making same accessible.

2. The Construction Administrator will determine whether such occupancy or use is possible and, if so, will make arrangements for holding a job inspection with the DCS Project Manager, Agency Representative, Architect and General Contractor.

3. A comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected as issued by the General Contractor, together with the status of completion and terms of occupancy, will be forwarded to the DCS Project Manager and the Architect by the Construction Administrator. A letter will be issued by the DCS Project Manager and Architect to Construction Administrator granting such occupancy and will state the terms and conditions of occupancy.

http://www.pmweb.com/




4. Prior to partial Agency occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Agency will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building.

5. The Architect will prepare a “Certificate of Substantial Completion” for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Agency occupancy. Use the “Certificate of Substantial Completion” form as required by the Owner.

6. The DCS Project Manager will request a signed “Certificate of Compliance” from the Architect and Contractor, and forward the Certificate to the Office of State Building Inspector for a Certificate of Occupancy and obtain the same after his review and approval.

7. A letter from the DCS Project Manager to the Agency Representative with copy to the General Contractor granting occupancy will state the terms and conditions of occupancy and that fire insurance coverage has been requested, the effective date of which will indicate to the Contractor that he may cancel fire insurance coverage for that portion of the project.

8. Upon occupancy, the Agency will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building.

9. Work after Partial Agency Occupancy: 9.1 For all work to complete the area occupied, warranty work, the balancing

and commissioning of systems, repair of latent defects and adjustments after partial occupancy, the contractor is responsible for all costs associated with working in occupied buildings.

D. Agency Occupancy: 1. The Construction Administrator will determine whether such occupancy is possible

and, if so, will make arrangements for holding a job inspection with the DCS Project Manager, Agency Representative, Architect and General Contractor.

2. A comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected as issued by the General Contractor, together with the status of completion and terms of occupancy, will be forwarded to the DCS Project Manager and the Architect by the Construction Administrator. A letter will be issued by the DCS Project Manager and Architect to Construction Administrator granting such occupancy and will state the terms and conditions of occupancy.

3. Prior to Agency occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, the Agency will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the building.

4. The Architect will prepare a “Certificate of Substantial Completion” for the Work to be occupied prior to Agency occupancy. Use the “Certificate of Substantial Completion” form as required by the Owner.

5. The DCS Project Manager will request a signed “Certificate of Compliance” from the Architect and Contractor, and forward the Certificate to the State Building Inspector for a Certificate of Occupancy and obtain the same after his review and approval.

5. A letter from the DCS Project Manager to the Agency Representative with copy to the General Contractor granting occupancy will state the terms and conditions of occupancy and that fire insurance coverage has been requested, the effective date of which will indicate to the Contractor that he may cancel fire insurance coverage for the project.

6. Upon occupancy, the Agency will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of the building.

7. Work after Agency Occupancy: 7.1 For all work to complete the occupied building, warranty work, the balancing

and commissioning of systems, repair of latent defects and adjustments after occupancy, the contractor is responsible for all costs associated with working in occupied buildings.

01 14 23 SUBCONTRACTOR EVALUATIONS:




A. Pursuant to C.G.S. Sec. 4a-101, the General Contractor shall compile evaluation information during the performance of the contract on each of its subcontractors who are performing work with a value in excess of five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000.00). The General Contractor shall complete and submit to the DCS evaluations of each such subcontractor upon fifty percent (50%) completion of the project and upon Substantial Completion of the project. The General Contractor acknowledges that its failure to complete and submit these evaluations in a timely manner may, by statute, result in a delay in project funding and, consequently, payment to the General Contractor. The General Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the State harmless from any loss, damage, or expense that results from or is caused by the General Contractor’s failure to complete and submit the evaluations to DCS in accordance with this provision.

End Section 01 10 00 Summary

SECTION 01 20 00 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

(Minor Capital Projects Less Than $5,000,000)

Page 1 of 12


01 20 00 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

A. Summary: Section 01 20 00 Contract Considerations contains the following subsections:

01 21 00 Allowances Not Used

01 22 00 Unit Prices - General Not Used

01 22 13 Unit Price Schedules - Earth And Rock Excavation Not Used

01 22 16 Unit Price Schedule - Miscellaneous Not Used

01 22 19 Unit Price Schedule – Alterations Not Used

01 23 00 Supplemental Bids Not Used

01 25 00 Substitution Procedures Not Used

01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures Not Used

01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures Not Used

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES


B. Summary

1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for equals and substitutions made after award of the Contract.

2. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

2.1 Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.

2.2 Division 01 Section 01 42 19 "Reference Standards" specifies the applicability of industry standards to products specified.

2.3 Division 01 Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" specifies requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options.

C. Definitions

1. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

2. Equals or Substitutions General: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract.

D. Submittals

1. Equals and Substitution Request Submittals: The Owner will consider requests for equals or substitutions if made prior to the Receipt of the Competitive Bid. The information on all materials shall be consistent with the information herein. After the contract award, substitutions will be considered for materials or systems specified that are no longer available. It will not be considered if the product was not purchased in a reasonable time after award. The Contractor shall submit all equal and substitutions requests on the "Equal or Substitute Product Request" Form, an

example is shown at the end of this Section and the Form is available from the Construction Representative (CA). See Article 15 in the General Conditions for further refinement and information.

1.1 The Contractor is required to prepare and submit three (3) copies of the required data for the first manufacturer listed or procedure listed in the specifications section with reference to all of the following areas: the



Page 2 of 12


substance and function considering quality, workmanship, economy of operation, durability and suitability for purposes intended including the size, rating and cost. All submissions must include all the required data for the first listed manufacturer or procedure as specified, as well as the required data for the proposed Equal or Substitution. This will enable the Owner and Architect to determine that the proposed Equal or Substitution is or is not substantially equal to the first listed manufacturer or procedure.

2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for equals or substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

3.1 Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed Equal or Substitution.

3.2 A detailed comparison chart of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect.

3.3 Product Data, including Shop Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

3.4 Samples, where applicable or requested.

3.5 A statement indicating the effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the Equal or Substitution. Indicate the effect on overall Contract Time.

3.6 Cost information, broken down, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.

3.7 The Contractor's certification that the proposed Equal or Substitution conforms to requirements in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.

1.8 The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the Equal or Substitution to perform adequately.

4. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) Calendar Days of receipt of the original request for equal or substitution request. The Architect will notify the Construction Administrator who will notify the Owner of recommended acceptance or rejection of the proposed equal or substitution, within fourteen (14) Calendar Days of receipt of the request, or seven (7) Calendar Days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. The Construction Administrator will give final acceptance or rejection by the Owner not less than seven (7) Calendar Days after notification.

1.1 Any request deemed an "Equal" and accepted by the Construction Administrator, Architect, Owner, and Agency will result in written notification to the Contractor and will not be in the form of a change order for an "Equal".

1.2 Any request deemed a "Substitution" and rejected or approved by Construction Administrator, Architect, and Owner may result in written notification to the Contractor and may be in the form of a Change Order if the "Substitution" is approved.

E. Equal Or Substitutions

1. Conditions: The Architect will consider the Contractor's request for Equal or Substitution of a product or method of construction when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests to the Construction Administrator without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.



Page 3 of 12


1.1 The proposed request does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

1.2 The proposed request is in accordance with the general intent of the Contract Documents.

1.3 The proposed request is timely, fully documented, and/or properly submitted.

1.4 The proposed request can be provided within the Contract Time. However, the Architect will not consider the proposed request if it is a result of the Contractor’s failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

1.5 The proposed request will offer the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. However, if the proposed request requires the Owner to incur additional responsibilities, including but not limited to, additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or similar considerations, then the Owner will have just cause to reject the request for Equal or Substitution.

1.6 The proposed request can receive the necessary approvals, in a timely manner, required by governing authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 The proposed request can be provided in a manner that is compatible with the Work as certified by the Contractor.

1.8 The proposed request can be coordinated with the Work as certified by the Contractor.

1.9 The proposed request can uphold the warranties required by the Contract Documents as certified by the Contractor.

2. The Contractor's submission and the Architect's review of Submittals, including but not limited to, Samples, Manufacturer’s Data, Shop Drawings, or other such items, which are not clearly identified as a request for an Equal or Substitution, will not be considered or accepted as a valid request for an Equal or Substitution, nor does it constitute an approval.

3. Equal or Substitution Produce Request Form (Example):



Page 4 of 12




Page 5 of 12


01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


B. Summary

1. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing contract modifications.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.

2. Division 01 Section 01 29 76 "Progress Payment Procedures" for administrative procedures governing Applications for Payment.

3. Division 01 Section 01 32 16 "Construction Progress Schedules" for requirements for construction scheduling and reporting progress of work.

4. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements for submittal of the Construction Progress Schedule.

5. Division 00 General Requirements “Article 13” “Change Orders”.

D. Requests For Information

1. In the event that the Contractor or subcontractor, at any tier, determines that some portion of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents requires clarification or interpretation by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit a "Request for Information" in writing to the Architect via the Construction Administrator. "Requests for Information" may only be submitted by the Contractor and shall only be submitted on the "Request for Information" forms as required by the Owner.

1.1 In the "Request for Information", the Contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the Architect.

1.1 In the "Request for Information", the Contractor shall set forth an interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with reasons why such an understanding was reached.

1.2 The Owner acknowledges that this is a complex project. Based upon the owner’s past experience with projects of similar complexity, the Owner anticipates that there will probably be some "Requests for Information" on this project.

1.3 The Architect will review all "Requests for Information" to determine whether they are valid "Requests for Information". If it is determined that the document is not a valid "Request for Information", it will be returned to the Contractor, unreviewed as to content, for resubmittal on the proper form and in the proper manner.

1.4 A "Requests for Information Response" shall be issued within seven (7) Calendar Days of receipt of the request from the Contractor unless the Owner determines that a longer time is necessary to provide an adequate response. If a longer time is determined necessary by the Owner, the Owner will, within seven (7) Calendar Days of receipt of the request, notify the Contractor of the anticipated response time. If the Contractor submits a "Request for Information" on an activity with seven (7) Calendar Days or less of float on the current project schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time it takes the Architect to respond to the request provided that the Architect responds within the seven (7) Calendar Days set forth above.

1.5 A "Request for Information Response" from Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor believes that the "Request for Information Response" will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within seven (7) Calendar Days give written notice to the Construction Administrator stating that the Contractor believes the "Request for Information Response" will result in a "Change Order" and the Contractor



Page 6 of 12


intends to submit a "Change Order Proposal" request. Failure to give such written notice seven (7) Calendar Days shall waive the Contractor’s right to seek additional time or cost under the requirement these Requirements.

E. Minor Changes In The Work

1. The Architect, through the Construction Administrator, will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, on the "Supplemental Instructions" form as required by the Owner.

F. Proposal Request

1. Architect/Owner-Initiated Requests For Proposals: The Architect or Owner will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work via the Construction Administrator that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Such requests shall be on a "Proposal Request" form as required by the Owner.

1.1 "Proposal Request" is issued for information only. Do not consider them as an instruction either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

1.1.1 Within fourteen (14) Calendar Days of receipt of a "Proposal Request", submit a "Change Order Proposal" with the required information necessary to execute the change to the Construction Administrator for the Architect’s/Owner's review.

1.1.2 Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

1.1.3 Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

1.1.4 Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time.

1.1.5 The Agency is tax exempt. All Contractor and Subcontractor services provided under your Contract with the State of Connecticut may not be exempt from taxes. The Department of Revenue Services can guide you as to which services are exempt and which are not. Please contact the State of Connecticut, Department of Revenue Services at 1-800-382-9463 or 860-541-3280.

1.1.6 Dollar values shown on the Schedule of Values shall not be the governing (or deciding) final amounts for change orders involving either additional charges or deletions.

G. Change Order Proposal:

1. When either a "Request for Information" from the Contractor or a "Proposal Request" from the Architect or Owner results in conditions that may require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a "Change Order Proposal" to the Architect via the Construction Administrator on forms as required by the Owner. These forms shall also include "Change Order Proposal Worksheets" as required by the Owner.

1.1 Include statements outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

1.2 Include a list of quantities of products required and unit costs, with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities as directed by Article 13 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

1.3 Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.



Page 7 of 12


1.4 Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires an equal or substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.

1.5 The State of Connecticut construction contract has the following tax exemptions:

1.5.1 Purchasing of materials which will be physically incorporated and become a permanent part of the project.

1.5.2 Tools, supplies and equipment used in fulfilling the construction contract are not exempt.

1.5.3 Services that are resold by the contractor are exempt, i.e. if a General Contractor hires a plumber, carpenter or electrician, a resale certificate may be issued to the subcontractor because these services are considered to be integral and inseparable component parts of the building contract.

2. "Change Order Request" Forms: Use "Change Order Proposal" and "Change Order Proposal Worksheets" forms as required by Owner.

3. A "Change Order Proposal" cannot be submitted without either prior submission of a "Request for Information" from the Contractor or as a response to a "Proposal Request" submitted by the Architect or Owner.

4. Any "Change Order Request" submitted without a prior submittal of a "Request for Information" or as a response to a "Proposal Request" will be immediately rejected and returned to the Contractor.

H. Construction Change Directive:

1. "Construction Change Directive": When the Owner and the Contractor disagree on the terms of a "Change Order Proposal" resulting from either a "Request for Information" or "Proposal Request", then the Architect through the Construction Administrator may issue a "Construction Change Directive" on a "Construction Change Directive" form as authorized by the Owner. The "Construction Change Directive" instructs the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a "Change Order".

1.1 The "Construction Change Directive" contains a complete description of the change in the Work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.2 Contractor must proceed with the Work once a "Construction Change Directive" is issued.

1.3 The change in the Contract Sum and Contract Time resulting from the issuance of a "Construction Change Directive" will be based on "Time & Material" or "Unit Prices".

1.4 Issuance of "Construction Change Directive" does not guarantee payment for the Work described in the "Construction Change Directive".

2. Documentation: The Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the "Construction Change Directive".

2.1 After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

2.2 The final value shall be negotiated based on the supporting data to determine the value of the work.

3. Change Order Procedures:

3.1 Upon the Owner's approval of a Contractor’s "Change Order Proposal", the Construction Administrator will issue a "Change Order" for signatures of the Architect, Owner and the Contractor on a "Change Order" form as required by the Owner.

01 29 76 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES



Page 8 of 12



B. Summary:

1. This Section specifies procedures for preparation and submittal of the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

2. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.

2.1 Division 00 Notice to Bidders: Article 10.

2.2 General Conditions: Articles: 27 "Schedule of Values, Application for Payment"; 28 "Partial Payments"; 31 "Final Payment"; and 32 "Owner’s Right to Withhold Payments".

2.3 Division 01 Section 01 32 16 "Construction Progress Schedules" for requirements for construction scheduling and reporting progress of work.

2.4 Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures".

2.5 Division 01 Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for requirements for Final Payment.

C. Schedule Of Values:

1. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the "Schedule of Values" with preparation of the Construction Schedule. Use "Schedule of Values" form as required by the Owner.

1.1 Submit the "Schedule of Values" to the Construction Administrator at the earliest possible date but no later than twenty-one (21) Calendar Days after Contract Start Date.

1.2 Sub-schedules: Where Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

2. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format for the "Schedule of Values". Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section on electronic media printout.

2.1 Identification: Project identification on the Schedule of Values shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

2.1.1 Owner;

2.1.2 Project Number;

2.1.3 Project Name;

2.1.4 Project Location;

2.1.5. Contractor's name and address.

2.2 Arrange the "Schedule of Values" in tabular format as required by the Owner, containing separate columns including, but not limited to, the following Items:

2.2.1 Item Number;

2.2.2. Description of Work with Related Specification Section or Division Number;

2.2.3. Scheduled Values broken down by description number, type material, units of each material.

.1 Include break down of General Condition requirements, i.e. bonds, insurance premiums, taxes, job mobilization, temporary facilities, field supervision and layout, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, project record documents, demonstration and training, overhead, and profit as separate line items.

2.2.4. Name of subcontractor;



Page 9 of 12


2.2.5 Name of manufacturer or fabricator;

2.2.6 Name of supplier;

2.2.7 Retainage;

2.2.8 Contract sum in sufficient detail.

3. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual Table of Contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. In addition, the following items listed below must be included.

4.1 Project Coordination (01 31 13): a lump sum of this cost for payment at the submittal of this product a minimum cost of 1/10

th of one percent of the base

bid total project cost or $5,000 whichever is greater.

4.2 Photographic Documentation (01 32 33): a monthly cost of $1,000 per month to be paid each month upon receipt of the photographs or forfeit of that month’s payment.

4.3 Submittal Procedures (01 33 00): a lump sum payment calculated at 1/20th

of 1% of the base bid total project cost upon receipt of the schedule.

4.4 As-Built Updates (01 31 00) a monthly cost, a minimum payment of $1,000 with forfeit of that monthly payment if not done.

4.5 Progress Cleaning (01 74 13): a monthly cost. A minimum payment of $1,000 to $3,000 (based on size & complexity of the project) with forfeit of that monthly payment if not done.

4.6 Starting and Adjusting (01 75 00): a lump sum cost upon completion. (to be determined by DCS Project Manager with Architect/Engineer & Construction Administrator advice).

4.7 Construction Progress Schedules (01 32 16): For the Base Schedule a lump sum payment or 40% of the total schedule budget, with the remainder paid on an even payment over the duration of the project.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.

6. Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the Contract Documents.

7. General Conditions: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item.

7.1 Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at the Contractor's option.

D. Applications For Payment:

1. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and Construction Administrator and paid for by the Owner.

1.1 The initial "Application for Payment", the "Application for Payment" at time of "Substantial Completion", and the final "Application for Payment", involve additional requirements.

2. Payment-Application Terms: The Owner will process monthly progress payments. The Contractor may submit applications for payment on a monthly basis.

3. Payment-Application Forms: Use the "Application for Payment" form as required by the Owner. Present the required information on electronic media printout or Owner approved form; multiple pages should be used if required.



Page 10 of 12


3.1 For each item, provide a column including but not limited to the following items:

3.2 Item Number.

3.3 Description of Work and Related Specification Section or Division.

3.4 Scheduled Value, break down by units of material and units of labor.

3.5 Work Completed from previous application.

3.6 Work Completed this period.

3.6.1 Materials presently stored.

3.6.2 Total Completed and stored to date of application.

3.6.3 Percentage of Completion.

3.6.4 Balance to Finish.

3.6.5 Retainage.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the Application form. At the time of Final Payment only, include an executed Application form by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Construction Administrator will return incomplete Applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the "Schedule of Values".

2. Include amounts of Change Orders issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

F. Transmittal: Except for final payment, submit to the Construction Administrator by a method ensuring receipt within forty-eight (48) hours. One (1) complete, signed and notarized original

of each Application for Payment, including lien waivers and similar attachments when required, along with six (6) copies. For Final Payment, nine (9) complete, signed and notarized copies

shall be submitted.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

G. Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment and all subsequent Application for Payments including, but not limited to, the following items:

1. Subcontractor Evaluations:

Pursuant to C.G.S. Sec. 4a-101, the General Contractor shall compile evaluation information during the performance of the contract on each of its subcontractors who are performing work with a value in excess of five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000.00). The General Contractor shall complete and submit to the DCS evaluations of each such subcontractor upon fifty percent (50%) completion of the project and upon Substantial Completion of the project. The General Contractor acknowledges that its failure to complete and submit these evaluations in a timely manner may, by statute; result in a delay in project funding and, consequently, payment to the General Contractor. The General Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the State harmless from any loss, damage, or expense that results from or is caused by the General Contractor’s failure to complete and submit the evaluations to DCS in accordance with this provision.

2. List of subcontractors and suppliers’ name, FEIN/Social Security numbers, and Connecticut Tax Registration Numbers;

3. List of principal suppliers and fabricators;

4. Schedule of Values;

5. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final);

6. Schedule of principal products;

7. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final);

8. List of Contractor's staff assignments;

9. List of Contractor's principal consultants;



Page 11 of 12


10. Copies of all applicable permits;

11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the Work;

12. Proof that subcontractors have been paid amounts included on the Contractor’s Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after the Owner has paid the Contractor for the particular Application for Payment in accordance with Connecticut General Statute § 49-41a (a)(1).

13. Releases of Lien from subcontractors with amounts included on the Contractor’s Application for Payment when Contractor has been paid by the Owner for the particular Application for Payment but the subcontractors have not been paid.

14. Proof that as-built documents are updated as required by Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

15. Initial as-built survey and damage report, if required.

16. Update the “Contractor’s Master Subcontract Agreement List” and submit copies all recently executed Subcontract Agreements in accordance with CGS § 4b-96.

16.1 The “Contractor’s Master Subcontract Agreement List” shall list all Subcontract Agreements in order of Contract Sum magnitude (from high to low) in the following format:

Contractor’s Master Subcontract Agreement List

Subcontractor Name

Minority Or Small Business

Designation Trade Address

Contract Sum

17. In accordance with 42-158j (b): Each payment requisition submitted shall include a statement showing the status of all pending construction change orders, other pending change directives and approved changes to the original contract or subcontract. Such statement shall identify the pending construction change orders and other pending change directives, and shall include the date such change orders and directives were initiated, the costs associated with their performance and a description of any work completed. As used in this section, "pending construction change order" or "other pending change directive" means an authorized directive for extra work that has been issued to a contractor or a subcontractor and identified by an official Change Order Number or Construction Change Directive Number assigned by the State of Connecticut.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion submit an Application for Payment form; use the form as required by the Owner. Present the required information on electronic media printout as applicable that include, but are not limited, to the following:

1. Subcontractor Evaluations:

Pursuant to C.G.S. Sec. 4a-101, the General Contractor shall compile evaluation information during the performance of the contract on each of its subcontractors who are performing work with a value in excess of five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000.00). The General Contractor shall complete and submit to the DCS evaluations of each such subcontractor upon fifty percent (50%) completion of the project and upon Substantial Completion of the project. The General Contractor acknowledges that its failure to complete and submit these evaluations in a timely manner may, by statute; result in a delay in project funding and, consequently, payment to the General Contractor. The General Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the State harmless from any loss, damage, or expense that results from or is caused by the General Contractor’s failure to complete and submit the evaluations to DCS in accordance with this provision.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.



Page 12 of 12


3. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include, but are not limited to, the following:

3.1 Occupancy permits and similar approvals;

3.2 Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements;

3.3 Test/adjust/balance records;

3.4 Maintenance instructions;

3.5 Meter readings;

3.6 Startup performance reports;

3.7 Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance;

3.8 Final cleaning;

3.9 Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety;

3.10 Advice on shifting insurance coverage;

3.11 Final progress photographs;

3.12 List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion.

I. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include, but are not limited, to the following:

1. Completion of Project Closeout requirements.

2. Completion of list of items remaining to be completed as indicated on the attachment to the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.

4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed in accordance with a schedule prepared by the Contractor which is acceptable to the Owner.

5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner (including as-built documents specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures").

6. Certified property survey.

7. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

8. Removal of temporary facilities and services.

9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements (Reference Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management & Disposal").

10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.

11. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for Final Acceptance, Final Completion, Final Inspection, and Final Payment.

12. Asbestos, lead or other hazardous material manifests.

13. Completion of "Contractor Reporting Form" as supplied by DCS, for all Contractors, Subcontractors, Vendors, Suppliers, etc. who work on the Contract. The form includes the following information:

13.1 Contractor/Subcontractor name.

13.2 FEIN/Social Security Numbers

13.3 Connecticut Tax Registration Numbers

13.4 Type of work

13.5 Name of business and address

13.6 Remittance address.

End

Section 01 20 00 Contract Considerations

SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS


Page 1 of 19


01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Summary: Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements contains the following Subsections:

01 31 13 Project Coordination Not Used

01 31 19 Project Meetings Not Used

01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules Not Used

01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Not Used

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Not Used

01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures Not Used

01 35 19 Confined Space Entry Not Used

01 35 53 Security Procedures Not Used

01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION


B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section.

1. Section 01 29 76 “Progress Payment Procedures” submission of Schedule of Values and Applications for payment.

C. Construction Administrator:

1. The Construction Administrator is identified in Division 01 Section 01 12 19 “Contract Interface”.

2. Construction Mobilization:

2.1 Cooperate with the Construction Administrator in the allocation of mobilization areas of the site, for field offices and sheds, for agency facility access, traffic, and parking facilities.

2.2 During Construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Construction Administrator.

2.3 Comply with Construction Administrators procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

2.4 Comply with instructions of the Construction Administrator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.

2.5 Coordinate field engineering layout as specified in Division 01 Section 01 71 23 “Field Engineering” for work under the instructions of the Construction Administrator.

D. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

E. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Construction Administrator, Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required.



Page 2 of 19


F. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of schedules.

2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.

3. Delivery and processing of submittals.

4. Progress meetings.

5. Project closeout activities.

G. General Coordination Provisions:

1. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed and coordinate such inspections with the Construction Administrator and authorities having jurisdictions. If unsatisfactory conditions exist notify the Construction Administrator immediately. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

2. The Contractor shall coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

2.1 Coordination Drawings:

2.1.1 The HVAC Subcontractor will initiate Mylar at 1/4" scale drawings done on AutoCAD showing ducts and piping in plan and section. Sheet metal shop drawings must be approved prior to starting coordination drawings.

2.1.2 The Sprinkler Subcontractor will then superimpose his piping layout on the tracing.

2.1.3 The Electrical subcontractor will superimpose all the electrical information on the tracing. Said information to include but not necessary limited to cable trays, equipment, lighting, conduits, bus duct, etc.

2.1.4 The sprinkler subcontractor will complete the coordination drawing by drawing his piping (include pitch) on the tracing.

2.1.5 The Construction Administrator will review the completed coordination drawing for general compliance and then submit it to the Architect for his review. All subcontractors shall rework the Mylar drawings until all systems are properly coordinated.

3. The Construction Administrator will meet with the Contractor on all major items of coordination.

4. See also Division 00 General Conditions, Article 7 “Cooperation of Trades”.

01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS


B. Pre-construction Conference:

1. The Contractor will attend a Pre-construction Conference before starting construction, as scheduled by the Construction Administrator convenient to the Owner, the Construction Administrator, Architect, and Contractor. This meeting will take place within fourteen (14) Calendar Days after the written Notice to Proceed and before the Contract Start Date. Hold the conference at the Project Site or another convenient location as directed by the Construction Administrator. The Construction Administrator shall conduct the Pre-construction Conference to review the Contractor and Subcontractor responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Construction Administrator, Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; agency; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All



Page 3 of 19


participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

3.1 Tentative construction schedule;

3.2 Critical work sequencing;

3.3 Progress meeting schedule;

3.4 Designation of responsible personnel;

3.5 Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders;

3.6 Procedures for processing Applications for Payment;

3.7 Distribution of Contract Documents;

3.8 Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples;

3.9 Preparation of record documents;

3.10 Use of the premises;

3.11 Parking availability;

3.12 Office, work, and storage areas;

3.13 Equipment deliveries and priorities;

3.14 Safety procedures;

3.15 First aid;

3.16 Security;

3.17 Housekeeping;

3.18 Working hours;

3.19 Coordination with Audio-Visual and Telecommunications.

C. Progress Meetings:

1. The Construction Administrator will conduct progress meetings, bi-weekly, at the Project Site or at regular intervals as agreed upon at the Pre-construction Conference. The Construction Administrator will notify the Owner, the Architect, and the Contractor of the scheduled Progress Meeting dates. Coordinate dates of Progress Meetings with preparation of Application for Payment requests.

2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Contractor, Construction Administrator, Owner and the Architect, subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities may be requested to attend these meetings on an as needed basis. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. The Contractor shall include the site superintendent as a minimum.

3. Agenda: Progress Meetings shall review and correct or approve minutes of the previous Progress Meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.

3.1 Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last Progress Meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the required Contractor's “Construction Schedule” and whether each activity is on time or ahead or behind Schedule. Determine how Work that is behind Schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether Schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

3.2 Review the present and future needs of each entity present

4. Reporting: The Construction Administrator will distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present, promptly and before the next scheduled meeting, and to parties who should have been present.



Page 4 of 19


5. A schedule of regular Project Meetings will be established at the Pre-construction Conference.

01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Related Documents

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Summary

1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the preparation, submittal, and updating of the Contractor’s construction schedules and reporting progress of the Work.

1.1. Refer to the General Conditions and the Agreement for definitions and specific dates of Contract Time.

2. This Section includes the following:

2.1. Format.

2.2. Content.

2.3. Revisions to schedules.

2.4. Submittals.

2.5. Distribution.


3.1 Division 01 Section 01 29 76 "Progress Payment Procedures" specifies requirements for submitting Schedule of Values and Application for Payments.

3.2 Division 01 Section 01 31 19 "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes.

3.3 Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" specifies requirements for submitting the Submittal Schedule.

3.4 Division 01 Section 01 45 00 "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submitting inspection and test reports.

3.5 Division 01 Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" specifies requirements for submitting the list of products.

C. Definitions

1. Construction Schedule: A method of planning and scheduling a construction project utilizing a horizontal bar chart with a separate bar for each major portion of the Work or operation to make the schedule an effective tool for planning and monitoring the progress of the work.

D. Quality Assurance

1. The Contractor's Consultant: Retain a consultant to provide planning, evaluating, and reporting by CPM scheduling.

1.1. In-House Option: The Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if the Contractor can demonstrate that:

1.1.1. The Contractor has the computer equipment required to produce construction schedules.

1.1.2. The Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in construction scheduling and reporting techniques.

1.2. Program: Use Microsoft Project latest version.

1.3. Standards: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."



Page 5 of 19


E. Preliminary Schedule

1. Preliminary Gantt schedule is to be prepared by the General Contractor and submitted to the Construction Administrator within seven (7) days of award of contract. This schedule is to cover all items of Work from the start of the project up to the completion of the project. This schedule must be revised when the actual schedule of significant items varies more than one week from the proposed schedule.

F. Construction Schedule Format

1. Format: Utilize a horizontal bar chart (Gantt) with a separate bar for each major portion of the Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.

2. Program: Use Microsoft Project, latest version.

3. Sequence of Listings: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual and the chronological order of the start of each item of work.

4. Scale and Spacing: Provide space for notations and revisions.

5. Sheet Size: To be coordinated with Construction Administrator.

6. Weather Days Allowance: The Contractor shall include as a separate identifiable activity on the Critical Path of the Construction Schedule, and activity labeled "Weather Days Allowance." Insert this activity immediately prior to the substantial completion milestone.

6.1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for determining the number of weather delay days to be included in the Construction Schedule. This determination shall be based on the normal anticipated weather for the project location and the nature of the project work. The Construction Schedule shall be based on the contractor’s determined weather delay allowance., The weather delay activity shall be included in the construction schedule immediately prior to the Substantial Completion milestone.

6.2 The minimal allowed duration of the Weather Days Allowance shall be calculated as follows (decimals rounded to nearest whole number):

Contract Time

(Calendar Days) multiplied by 7 equals Weather Days Allowance

(Calendar Days) 365

6.3 The Contractor shall insert an activity in the Critical Path of the Construction Schedule to reflect weather day occurrences when weather days are experienced and accepted by the Owner. Identify this activity as a weather delay.

6.4 The Contractor shall reduce duration of Weather Days Allowance activity as weather delays are experienced and inserted into the schedule. Remaining weather days in Weather Day Allowance at completion of project is considered float. Weather delay, when justified, are considered allowable, non compensable.

G. Content

1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates beginning and completion of each element of construction.

2. Identify each item by specification section numbers.

3. Identify work of separate phases and other logically grouped activities.

4. Show accumulated percentages of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.

5. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, Owner/Agency furnished products and any products identified as under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect/Engineer. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.

6. Indicate delivery dates for Owner/Agency furnished products and any products identified as under Allowances.

7. Indicate critical path with original baseline indicated.



Page 6 of 19


8. Coordinate content with Schedule of Values specified in Section 01 29 76 "Progress Payment Procedures."

H. Submittals and Revisions To Schedules

1. An initial bar graph schedule is to be prepared by the General Contractor and submitted to the Construction Administrator. Refer to Article 1.5.

2. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity.

3. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes.

4. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.

5. Schedules must be revised monthly and when the actual schedule of significant items varies more than seven (7) days from the proposed schedule.

6. Submit revised Construction Schedules for each Application for Payment.

7. Submit four (4) copies of the Construction Schedule to the Construction Administrator.

I. Distribution

1. Distribute copies of the Construction Schedules to Construction Administrator, Architect, Owner, Subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties.

2. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problem anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.

01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION


B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section

1. Section 01 29 76 “Progress Payment Procedures” submission of Schedule of Values and Applications for payment.

C. On the date the work is begun and every thirty (30) days thereafter (typically at the end of the month- until the work is at least 95 percent complete), the Contractor shall have photographs of the construction taken by a professional photographer or an individual approved by the Owner.

D. Photographs: Provide a digital camera to take twenty-four (24) or more photos each time.

Deliver 1 sets of photo files on CD-ROM and one set of prints to the Construction Administrator for DCS. Label each CD-ROM with project name and the date the photographs were taken. With each submittal provide an index sheet of digital photos and where the photos were taken.

E. As photographs are a record of the work progress, they shall be taken each month, whether or not they show work done during the preceding month. Deliver digital photos to the Construction Administrator within ten (10) Calendar Days of their taking.

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES


B. Summary

1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including but not limited to the following:

1.1 Submittal schedule.

1.2 Shop Drawings.

1.3 Product Data.

1.4 Samples.

1.5 Quality assurance submittals.



Page 7 of 19


1.6 Proposed "Substitutions/Equals".

1.7 Warrantee samples.

1.8 Coordination Drawings.

1.9 O & M Manuals

C. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 01 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Permits.

2. Applications for Payment.

3. Performance and payment bonds.

4. Contractor’s construction schedule.

5. Daily construction reports.

6. Construction Photographs.

7. Insurance certificates.

8. List of subcontractors.

9. Subcontractors/Suppliers FEIN #’s and Connecticut tax registration #.

D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" specifies requirements for submittal of requests for equals and substitutions.

2. Division 01 Section 01 29 76 "Progress Payment Procedures" specifies requirements for submittal of the Schedule of Values.

3. Division 01 Section “Project Coordination” 01 31 13 for Project Coordination documents.

4. Division 01 Section 01 31 19 "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and distribution of meeting and conference minutes.

5. Division 01 Section 01 32 16 "Construction Progress Schedules" for requirements for construction scheduling and reporting progress of work.

6. Division 01 Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" specifies requirements for submittal of periodic construction photographs.

7. Division 01 Section 01 45 00 "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports and mockups.

8. Division 01 Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" specifies requirements for submittal of Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout.

9. Division 01 Section 01 78 30 "Warranties and Bonds".

E. Definitions

1. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as intended and as identified in the Specification Divisions 02 through 49.

1.1 Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 Section 01 31 13 "Project Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.

2. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

3. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples.



Page 8 of 19


F. Submittal Procedures

1. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

1.1 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

1.2 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

1.2.1 The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.

1.2.2 The Architect reserves the right to reject incomplete submitted packages.

1.3 Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals.

1.3.1 Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.

1.3.2 If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.

1.4 Allow fourteen (14) calendar days for reprocessing each submittal.

1.5 No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

2. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label, title block or 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches cover page approved by the Architect, on each submittal for identification.

Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.

2.1 The minimum number of copies required for each submittal shall be seven (7) or as determined otherwise at the pre-construction conference or by the Construction Administrator.

2.2 Provide a space approximately 4 inches by 5 inches on the label, beside the title block or on the cover page on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.

2.3 Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.

2.3.1 Project Name and State of Connecticut Project Number.

2.3.2 Date.

2.3.3 Name and address of the Architect, Construction Administrator, and Owner Representative.

2.3.4 Name and address of the Contractor.

2.3.5 Name and address of the subcontractor.

2.3.6 Name and address of the supplier.

2.3.7 Name of the manufacturer.

2.3.8 Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

2.3.9 Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

2.3.10 Indicate either initial or resubmittal.

2.3.11 Indicate deviations from Contract Documents.

2.3.12 Indicate if "equal" or "substitution".



Page 9 of 19


3. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a transmittal form. Copy the Construction Administrator on the transmittal. The Architect will return all submittals to the Contractor after action is taken with a complete copy of the submittal package and one complete copy of the submittal package. The Architect will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.

3.1 On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.

G. Submittal Schedule:

1. After development and review by the Owner and Architect acceptance of the Contractor's Construction or CPM schedule prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule to the Construction Administrator within thirty (30) Calendar Days of Contract Award.

1.1 Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values, and the list of products as well as the Contractor’s Construction or CPM Schedule.

1.2 Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:

1.2.1 Schedule date for the initial submittal.

1.2.2 Related section number.

1.2.3 Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).

1.2.4 Name of Subcontractor.

1.2.5 Description of the part of Work covered.

1.2.6 Scheduled date for resubmittal.

1.2.7 Scheduled date for the Architect’s final release of approval.

2. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

2.1 Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2.2 Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

2.3 Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

2.3.1 Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

3. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

3.1 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

3.2 Submit all submittal items required for each specification section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3.3 Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same specification section as separate packages under separate transmittals.



Page 10 of 19


3.4 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

3.4.1 Architect and Construction Administrator reserve the right to

withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

3.5 Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's

receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

3.5.1 Initial Review: Allow fourteen (14) Calendar Cays for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination with related submittals not yet received. Additional time will be required if processing must be delayed to permit review of related subsequent submittals.

3.5.2 Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3.5.3 Resubmittal Review: Allow fourteen (14) Calendar Days for review of each resubmittal.

3.5.4 Mass Submittals: Six (6) or more submittals in one (1) Calendar Day or twenty (20) or more submittals in seven (7) Calendar

Days. If “Mass Submittals” are received, Architect’s review time stated above may be extended as necessary to perform proper review. Architect will review “Mass Submittals based upon priority determined by Architect after consultation with Owner and Contractor.

3.6 Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Construction Administrator, Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.

3.6.1 When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

3.7 Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

H. Daily Construction Reports

1. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at the site, and submit duplicate copies to the Construction Administrator at weekly intervals:

1.1 List of subcontractors at the site.

1.2 Approximate count of personnel at the site.

1.3 High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.

1.4 Accidents and unusual events.

1.5 Meetings and significant decisions.

1.6 Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

1.7 Meter readings and similar recordings.

1.8 List of equipment on site and identify if idle or in use.

1.9 Orders and requests of governing authorities.

1.10 Change Orders received, start and end dates.



Page 11 of 19


1.11 Services connected, disconnected.

1.12 Equipment or system tests and startups.

1.13 Partial Completion’s, occupancies.

1.14 Substantial Completion’s authorized.

1.15 Equals or Substitutions approved or rejected.

I. Shop Drawings

1. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.

2. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:

2.1 Dimensions.

2.2 Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.

2.3 Compliance with specified standards.

2.4 Notation of coordination requirements.

2.5 Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

2.6 Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches.

2.6.1 Submit one (1) reproducible media and seven (7) prints as directed

by the Construction Administrator. The Contractor's submittal shall identify the specification section and/or drawing number applicable to the submittal.

2.6.2 Details shall be large scale and/or full size.

3. The Contractor shall review the Shop Drawings, stamp with this approval, and submit them with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in his Work or in the Work of any subcontractor. Shop Drawings shall be properly identified as specified for item, material, workmanship, and project number. At the submission, the Contractor shall inform the Architect, in writing of any deviation in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. The Architect will review and comment on shop drawings with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for conformance with the design concept of the project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Refer to Article 5 of the General Conditions. Shop Drawings received by the Architect that indicate insufficient study of drawings and specifications, illegible portions or gross errors, will be rejected outright. Such rejections shall not constitute an acceptable reason for granting the Contractor additional time to perform the work.

5. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings until fully reviewed.

6. Upon final review submit four (4) additional prints, same as submitted, for use by the Construction Administrator.

7. The Architect's review and comments on Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

8. Only final reviewed Shop Drawings are to be used on the Project site.

9. The Work installed shall be reviewed in accordance with the Shop Drawings and the drawings and specifications. Final Review of the Shop Drawings by the Architect shall constitute acceptance by the State and the Architect of a variation or departure that is clearly identified. If the contractor believes notations made by the



Page 12 of 19


Architect/Engineer increases the value or scope of the CD’s, the contractor must provide written notice to the Construction Administrator within seven (7) days of this issue. Final reviewed Shop Drawings shall not replace or be used as a vehicle to issue or incorporate change orders or substitutions. Substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures".

J. Shop Drawing For Fire Protection Systems

1. Shop drawings for fire protection systems shall comply with all of the requirements in the section above “Shop Drawings” In addition Sprinkler system shop drawings and hydraulic calculations must be stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Connecticut and must include the DCS project number. Two (2) sets of information [as noted in this Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures”] shall be submitted to the State's Insurance Carrier (SIC), and one (1) set shall be submitted to the Office of State Fire Marshal (OSFM):

1.1 Office of State Fire Marshal: CT Department of Administrative Services Division of Construction Services Office of State Fire Marshal 165 Capitol Ave, Room 258 Hartford, CT 06106 Phone: (860) 713-5750

1.2 State Insurance Carrier (SIC): FM Global Factory Mutual Insurance Company P.O. Box 9102 500 River Ridge Drive Norwood, MA 02062 Tel: (781) 440-8000 or FAX (781) 440-8742 Contact: Costa Terzides (781) 440-8204 or Jeannette Dantona (781) 440-8245

2. Before the shop drawings are submitted to SIC or OSFM, the Architect/Engineer’s fire protection consultant must review the sprinkler design for compliance with the code, OSFM, and FM Global requirements.

2.1 The State Insurance Carrier (SIC) requires two (2) weeks prior notice of a sprinkler system acceptance test.

K. Product Data

1. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, schedules, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.

1.1 Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information:

1.1.1 Manufacturer's printed recommendations.

1.1.2 Compliance with trade association standards.

1.1.3 Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.

1.1.4 Application of testing agency labels and seals.

1.1.5 Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.

1.1.6 Notation of coordination requirements.

1.2 Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.

1.3 Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where selection of options is required.

1.4 Submittals: Submit seven (7) copies of each required submittal; submit five (5) copies where required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will



Page 13 of 19


retain one (1) and will return the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required.

1.4.1 Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal.

1.5 Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1.5.1 Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the Installer's possession.

1.5.2 Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.

L. Samples

1. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.

1.1 Store, mount or display Samples on site in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:

1.1.1 Specification Section number and reference.

1.1.2 Generic description of the Sample.

1.1.3 Sample source.

1.1.4 Product name or name of the manufacturer.

1.1.5 Compliance with recognized standards.

1.1.6 Availability and delivery time.

1.2 Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.

1.2.1 Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of the

variations.

1.2.2 Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

1.2.3 Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.

1.2.4 Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as the Owner's property, are the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site prior to Substantial Completion.

1.3 Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, unless otherwise noted in specification section.

1.3.1 The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the Architects notation, indicating selection and other action.

1.4 Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit three (3) sets. The Architect will return one (1) set marked with the action taken.



Page 14 of 19


1.5 Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction.

1.5.1 Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal.

1.5.2 Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set.

2. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

2.1 Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the Project standard.

2.1.1 Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

M. Quality Assurance Submittals

1. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications.

2. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.

2.1 Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.

3. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division 01 Section 01 45 00 "Quality Control."

N. Architect's Action:

1. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.

1.1 Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

2. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:

2.1 Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Approved for fabrication," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2.2 Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Incorporate Notations," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Submit corrected copies for record. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2.3 Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Rejected, or Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.

2.3.1 Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Rejected, or Revise and Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

2.4 Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required."



Page 15 of 19


3. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will discard unsolicited submittals without action.

01 35 16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES


B. Summary

1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for performing alteration and renovation Work.


2.1 Division 01 Section 01 31 13 "Project Coordination" for procedures for coordinating cutting and patching with other construction activities.

2.2 Division 01 Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching" for procedures for cutting and patching.

2.3 Division 02 Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations.

2.4 Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to performing alteration Work with individual parts of the Work.

2.5 Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 21, 22, 23 and 26 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to renovation Work by mechanical and electrical installations.

C. Products For Patching And Extending Work:

1. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing Products and Work .for patching and extending Work.

2. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing Products where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.

2. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Administrator in writing seven (7)

Calendar Days prior to removing all salvageable items from the existing alteration project location and unloading all salvageable items at 40 Shore Road, Waterford Connecticut and store items in the appropriate location as directed by Construction Administrator personnel.

E. Inspection

1. General:

1.1 Verify that demolition is complete and areas are ready for installation of new Work.

1.2 Beginning of restoration Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

2. Project Procedures for Work Involving Lead Containing Material (LBP):

2.1 Exposure levels for lead in the construction industry are regulated by 29 CFR 1926.62. Construction activities disturbing surfaces containing lead-based paint (LBP) which are likely to be employed, such as sanding, grinding, welding, cutting and burning, have been known to expose workers to levels of lead in excess of the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). Conduct demolition and removal Work specified in the technical sections of this specification in conformance with these regulations. In addition, construction debris/waste may be classified as hazardous waste. Disposal of hazardous waste material shall be in accordance with 40 CFR Parts 260 through 271 and Connecticut Hazardous Waste Management Regulations Section 22a-209-1; 22a-209-8(c); 22a-449(c)-11; and 22a-449(c)-100 through 110.

2.2 The Contractor's Work shall be based on a child under the age of six (6) in residence; the Work shall also be in accordance with Connecticut Regulations Section 19a-111-1 through 11.



Page 16 of 19


2.3 This facility was constructed prior to 1978 and is likely to have painted surfaces containing lead-based paint.

2.4 In accordance with the United States Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Lead-Based Paint Renovation, Repair, and Painting Program (RRP) issued by the EPA on April 22, 2008 and regulated by 40 CFR 745, contractors performing renovation, repair and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint in homes, child care facilities, and schools built before 1978 must be certified and must follow specific work practices to prevent lead contamination. EPA requires that firms performing renovation, repair, and painting projects that disturb lead-based paint in pre-1978 homes, child care facilities and schools be certified by EPA and that they use certified renovators who are trained by EPA-approved training providers to follow lead-safe work practices. The Contractor must be a Renovation Firm that has completed an EPA Lead-Safe Certification Program and be certified to conduct lead-based paint activities and renovations under the RRP rule. The Contractor shall have at least one “Certified Renovator” assigned to jobs where LBP is disturbed.

2.5 Testing for lead-based paint has been conducted at the facility scheduled for renovation, demolition, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling, or repair. Results of the LBP testing are for information purposes only. The results are available upon request from the Agency Representative. Under no circumstance shall this information be the sole means used by the Contractor for determining the extent of LBP. The Contractor shall be responsible for verification of all field conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3. Project Procedures for Work Involving Asbestos Containing Material (ACM):

3.1 The Owner is responsible for abating all ACM that is visible and accessible. This is to be accomplished through a separate project prior to the start of the renovation project. In demolition projects, every attempt should by the owner to remove all ACM.

3.2 If the Contractor should encounter any material suspect or known to contain ACM, he should immediately notify the Construction Administrator of same. It is the State’s responsibility to have the material tested and abated (if necessary). The Owner will respond within twenty-four (24) hours after receiving the Contractor’s written request to the Construction Administrator for testing the suspect material. The Owner will abate ACM (if necessary) within a reasonable time period, i.e. within seven (7) Calendar Days.

3.3 Testing for asbestos has been conducted at the facility scheduled for renovation, demolition, reconstruction, alteration, remodeling, or repair. Results of the asbestos testing are for information purposes only. The results are available upon request from the Agency Representative. Under no circumstance shall this information be the sole means used by the Contractor for determining the extent of asbestos. The Contractor shall be responsible for verification of all field conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.4 See also Division 00 General Conditions, Article 23 “Cutting, Fitting, Patching and Digging”.

4. Project Procedures for Work Involving Products Containing Persistent Bioaccumulative Toxic Chemicals” (PBT’s) such as Polychlorinated Biphenols (PCB’s), Di-2-ethylhexyl Phthalate (DEHP), and Mercury:

4.1 The Contractor is responsible for abating all PCB’s, DEHP, and mercury prior to the start any work involving construction, renovation or demolition (if necessary).

4.2 Exposure Levels for Products Containing Persistent Bioaccumulative Toxic Chemicals (PBT’s) such as PCB’s. DEHP, and mercury in the construction industry is regulated by 29CFR1910.1200 and 29CFR1926.28 et. al. Construction, renovation or demolition activities disturbing Products Containing Persistent Bioaccumulative Toxic Chemicals” (PBT’s) such as



Page 17 of 19


PCB’s and DEHP which are likely to be employed. These materials include but are not limited to fluorescent light fixture & exit sign, ballast’s, high density discharge (HID) lamps , and certain types of construction products containing vinyl, and mercury containing electrical switches and thermostats. These activities may expose workers in excess of the respective Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). Conduct demolition and removal Work specified in the technical sections of these specifications in conformance with these regulations. In addition construction debris/waste may be classified as hazardous waste. Disposal of all hazardous materials shall be in accordance with but not limited to 40CRF Parts 761 Subpart K, 761, and 761.65 and the Connecticut General Hazardous Waste Statute Sec. 22a-454.

4.3 A Survey for Products Containing Persistent Bioaccumulative Toxic Chemicals (PBT’s) such as PCB’s, DEHP and Mercury has NOT been conducted at the facility. Examples include but are not limited to fluorescent light fixture & exit sign, ballast’s, high density discharge(HID) lamps , and certain types of construction products containing vinyl, and mercury containing electrical switches and thermostats. It is the Contractors responsibility for verification of all material and field conditions prior to construction, renovation, and demolition that may affect the performance of their Work.

F. Preparation:

1. Cut, move, or remove items as are necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion.

2. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work.

3. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.

4. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new Work and finishes.

5. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing Work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.

G. Installation:

1. Coordinate Work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion and if required sequence Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

2. Remove, cut and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide restoring Products and finishes to original and or specified condition in accordance with Section 01 73 29 “Cutting and Patching”.

3. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes in accordance with Section 01 73 29 “Cutting and Patching”.

4. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures, restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, electrical, systems to full

operational condition.

5. Recover and refinish Work that exposes mechanical and electrical Work exposed accidentally during the Work.

6. Install Products as specified in individual sections.

H. Transitions:

1. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patch work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.

2. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect/Engineer.

I. Adjustments:



Page 18 of 19


1. Where removal of partitions or walls result in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

2. Where a change of plane of ¼ inch in 12 inches or more occurs, request recommendation from Architect/Engineer for providing a smooth transition.

3. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.

4. Fit Work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Section 01045 “Cutting and Patching”.

J. Repair of Damaged Surfaces:

1. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing imperfections.

2. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.

K. Finishes:

1. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product sections.

2. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

L. Cleaning:

1. In addition cleaning specified in Section 01 77 00 “Closeout Procedures”, clean Agency occupied areas of Work.

01 35 19 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY


B. Summary: If the work involves “Confined Space Entry” then the Owner has identified confined spaces associated with this project (see Division 00 Section 00 30 00 “Available Information”.), The Owner has established a permit-required, confined space entry program. Confined spaces that affect the Work of this Project will be defined in accordance with the requirements of OSHA, 29 CFR 1910.146 “Permit-Required Confined Spaces”, and the Owner's confined space Entry Plan. In the event that the Contractor must perform work within a permitted "confined space" as defined by Federal OSHA regulations, the Contractor will comply with all safety and monitoring requirements imposed by OSHA relative to work within the permitted confined space.

C. Definitions:

1. Acceptable Entry Conditions: means the conditions that must exist in a permit space to allow entry and to ensure that employees involved with a permit-required confined space entry can safely enter into and work within the space.

2. Confined Space: means a space that:

2.1 Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work; and

2.2 Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.); and

2.3 Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.

3. Entry: means the action by which a person passes through an opening into a permit-required confined space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.

4. Permit-Required Confined Space (Permit Space): means a confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics:

4.1 Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere;

4.2 Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant;

4.3 Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-section; or



Page 19 of 19


4.4 Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.

5. Permit-Required Confined Space Program (Permit Space Program): means the employer's overall program for controlling, and, where appropriate, for protecting employees from, permit space hazards and for regulating employee entry into permit spaces.

6. Permit System: means the employer's written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for entry and for returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.

D. All proposed entries must be reviewed and approved, in advance, by the Owner and Construction Administrator prior to the Contractor's entry into a permitted confined space.

E. All such compliance measures will be at the Contractor’s expense and performed with their own equipment. The Owner reserves the right to suspend the Contractor's operations for any violation of the above-mentioned confined space regulations.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the Permit at no additional cost to the Owner.

01 35 53 SECURITY PROCEDURES


B. Provide a security program and facilities to protect work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Coordinate with Owner's security program.

C. The General Contractor shall be solely responsible for damage, loss, or liability due to theft or vandalism.

End

Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements

SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS


Page 1 of 8


01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Summary: Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements contains the following Subsections:

01 42 16 Definitions Not Used

01 42 19 Reference Standards Not Used

01 45 00 Quality Control Not Used

01 45 23 Testing For Indoor Air Quality, Baseline IAQ, & Materials

Not Used

01 42 16 DEFINITIONS


B. Definitions

1. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

2. “Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the reference. Location is not limited to this term.

3. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.

4. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

5. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

6. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

7. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

8. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

9. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

9.1 The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this

Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

9.2 Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

9.3 Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged



Page 2 of 8


for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor.

9.3.1 This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.

10. "Project Site": Is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing other Work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

11. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS


B. Industry Standards:

1. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

2. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents unless a specific date is indicated in the Contract Documents or the governing regulations cited herein.

3. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent and highest quality requirement. Request a decision from the Architect before proceeding on requirements that are different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is the most stringent.

4. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum acceptable. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Request a clarification from the Architect regarding uncertainties before proceeding.

5. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

C. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

1. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to Thompson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations," available in most libraries.

D. Governing Regulations And Authorities:

1. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at the Project Site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need during submittals, planning, and progress of the Work, until Substantial Completion.

1.1 State Building Code/2005 Connecticut Supplement.



Page 3 of 8


1.2 International Building Code/2003.

1.3 International Existing Building Code/2003.

1.4 International Mechanical Code/2003.

1.5 International Plumbing Code/2003.

1.6 International Energy Conservation Code/2003.

1.7 National Electric Code NFPA 70-2005.

1.8 Connecticut Fire Safety Code/2005.

1.9 ICC/ANSI A117.1-Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities/2003.

1.10 NFPA 101-2003.

1.11 OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Regulations/1999.

1.12 OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction/1999.

E. Submittals:

1. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents.

01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL


B. Summary

1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services.

2. Quality-Control services include fire alarm acceptance testing, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the Owner.

3. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

4. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products.

4.1 Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

4.2 Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.

4.3 Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" specifies requirements for development of a schedule of required tests and inspections.

2. Division 01 Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.

3. Division 01 Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures", specific requirements for contract closeout procedures.



Page 4 of 8


D. Responsibilities

1. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, the Owner, through the Construction Administrator, shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. All tests required by the individual specification sections are required to be scheduled and notification given to the Construction Administrator 24 / 48 hours in advance of the test/inspection as applicable. Costs for these services are not included in the Contract Sum.

1.1 Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.

1.2 Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services.

1.2.1 Such services include Special Inspections as required by the latest edition of the "Connecticut State Building Code".

1.2.2 Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting part of the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner. The Owner will engage the services of a qualified Special Inspector for this project. The Special Inspector, as a representative of the Owner, shall document and confirm compliance with the provisions of the Connecticut State Building Code for Special Inspections.

1.2.3 Materials and assemblies for this project will be tested and construction operations inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the State for final acceptance.

1.2.4 The Owner’s use of testing and inspection services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to furnish materials and finished construction in full compliance with the Contract Documents and the Connecticut State Building Code.

2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility.

2.1 The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated non-compliance with Contract Document requirements.

2.2 The Owner will issue a credit change order to cover all costs incurred related to all re-tests/re-inspections due to non-compliance to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Owner’s costs and the Consultant’s costs.

3. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:

3.1 Provide access to the Work.

3.2 Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.



Page 5 of 8


3.3 Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples.

3.4 Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.

3.5 Deliver samples to testing laboratories.

3.6 Provide an approved design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by the testing agency.

3.7 Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.

4. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Construction Administrator, Architect and the Contractor in performance of the testing agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.

4.1 The testing agency shall notify the Construction Administrator and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

4.2 The testing agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

4.3 The testing agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

5. Owner will pay for the services of an independent testing agency laboratory to perform inspections, tests and other services required by the Specifications except as noted below, listed for which the Owner will issue a deduct change order to cover the cost associated with these tests:

5.1 When the Contractor notifies the Construction Administrator and/or Testing Agency less than 24 hours before the expected time of testing.

5.2 When the Contractor requires testing for his own convenience.

5.3 When the Contractor schedules a test and is not ready for the required test.

6. Submit reports of tests that are part of the submittal requirements which indicate compliance or non-compliance with the specified standard.

7. See also General Conditions Article 16 "Inspections & Tests".

8. Fire Alarm/Acceptance Testing Procedures:

8.1 For buildings exceeding the threshold limit, the fire alarm testing shall be as the authority having jurisdiction shall dictate. This will be as determined by the CT DAS / DCS Office of State Fire Marshal.

8.2 For buildings that do not exceed the threshold limit, the fire alarm testing shall be as the authority having jurisdiction shall dictate. This will be determined by the DCS requirements as set below:

8.2.1 Protective Signaling Systems: All protective signaling systems shall meet with acceptance testing requirements of the applicable standards listed in Section 7-6.1.4, NFPA 101/2003 and NFPA 13/2002.

8.2.2 Prior Test Notification: At least five (5) working days prior to testing, the Fire Alarm Contractor shall notify (in writing) the following people of the proposed date the acceptance tests are to be performed (Also, see Part 2 of the DCS Certificate of Compliance).

.1 DCS Project Manager;

.2 General Contractor;

.3 Engineer of Record;

.4 Equipment Supplier Representative;

.5 Sprinkler Contractor.



Page 6 of 8


8.2.3 Certificates of Compliance:

.1 A Fire Alarm System Inspection and Testing Certification and Description form shall be prepared for each system (See NFPA 72/2002 Chapter 7 and Figure 7-5.2.2).

.2 Parts 1 and 3 through 9, shall be completed after the system is installed and the installation of the wiring has been checked. Every alarm device must also be pre-tested to ensure proper operation and correct annunciation at each remote annunciator and control panel. Part 1 of the form (Certification of System Installation) shall be signed by the fire alarm contractor. The signed and completed preliminary copies of the Certification form shall be forwarded to all parties along with the Prior Test Notification.

.3 Part 2, of each applicable form, shall be completed after the operational tests have been completed.

.4 After the completion of the operational acceptance tests and sign-off of test witness (with stipulations noted), final copies of the Certificates shall be forwarded to the DCS Project Manager.

8.2.4 Tests:

.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Testing Recommendations.

.2 All testing equipment, apparatus (i.e. sound level decibel meter, 2-way radio communication, test devices, ladders, tools, lighting, etc.) and personnel shall be supplied by the Fire Alarm Contractor and Sprinkler Contractor.

8.2.5 System Documentation: Every system shall include the following documentation, which shall be delivered to the DCS Project Manager upon final acceptance of the system. An owner's manual or manufacturer's installation instructions covering all system equipment, including the following:

.1 A detailed narrative description of the system inputs, evacuation signaling, ancillary functions, annunciation, intended sequence of operations, expansion capability, application considerations, and limitations.

.2 Operator’s instructions for basic systems operations including alarm acknowledgment, system reset, interpreting system output (LED's CRT display, and printout), operation of manual evacuation signaling and ancillary function controls, changing printer paper, etc.

.3 A detailed description of routine maintenance and testing as required and recommended and as would be provided under a maintenance contract, including testing and maintenance instructions for each type of device installed. This information should include:

.1 A listing of individual system components that require periodic testing and maintenance.

.2 Step by step instructions detailing the requisite testing and maintenance procedures and the intervals at which those procedures should be performed.

.3 A schedule that correlates the testing and maintenance procedures required by paragraph (2) above and with the listing required by paragraph (1) above.



Page 7 of 8


.4 Detailed troubleshooting instructions for each type of trouble condition recognized by the system, including opens, grounds, parity errors, "loop failures," etc. These instructions should include a list of all trouble signals, and step by step instructions describing how to isolate those problems and correct them (or call for service as appropriate).

.5 A service directory, including a list of names and telephone numbers for those who should be called to service the system.

8.2.6 As-Built Drawings:

.1 The Contractor will produce two (2) sets of as-built drawings and specifications for the fire alarm system, indicating the location (and programmed address, if applicable) of all devices and appliances, the wiring sequences, wiring methods, connection of the components, and sequence of operation of the protective signaling system as installed, shall be given to the DCS Project Manager. This shall be in Accordance with NFPA 72. Refer also to Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures".

E. Submittals

1. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service to the Construction Administrator. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through the Contractor.

1.1 Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs.

1.2 Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.2.1 Date of issue.

1.2.2 Project title and number.

1.2.3 Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

1.2.4 Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

1.2.5 Names of individuals making the inspection or test.

1.2.6 Designation of the Work and test method.

.1 Identification of product and Specification Section.

.2 Complete inspection or test data.

.3 Test results and an interpretation of test results.

.4 Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.

.5 Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements.

.6 Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

.7 Recommendations on re-testing.

F. Quality Assurance

1. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are pre-qualified as complying with the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.



Page 8 of 8


1.1 Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.

2. Mockups: Provide full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups will be used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

G. Repair And Protection

General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching."

1. Protect constructions exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.

2. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.

End

Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS (Minor Capital Projects Less Than $5,000,000)

Page 1 of 7


01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

A. Summary: Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities And Controls contains the following subsections:

01 51 13 Temporary Electricity And Lighting Not Used

01 51 16 Temporary Fire Protection Not Used

01 51 23 Temporary Heating, Cooling And Ventilating Not Used

01 51 33 Temporary Telecommunications Not Used

01 51 36 Temporary Water Not Used

01 52 13 Field Offices And Sheds Not Used

01 52 19 Temporary Sanitary Facilities Not Used

01 54 00 Construction Aids Not Used

01 55 13 Temporary Access Roads Not Used

01 55 16 Haul Routes Not Used

01 56 00 Temporary Barriers And Enclosures Not Used

01 56 43 Temporary Protection Not Used

01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls Not Used

01 57 21 Environmental Management Not Used

01 57 23 Temporary Storm Water Control Not Used

01 57 30 Indoor Environmental Control Not Used

01 57 40 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan Not Used

01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage Not Used

01 51 13 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING


Connect to existing service, provide branch wiring and distribution boxes located to provide power and lighting by construction-grade extension cords. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Take measures to conserve energy. Provide lighting for construction operations. At the termination of construction, return the facilities to their original condition.

E. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance.

F. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

01 51 16 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION


B. The Contractor, during construction, shall be responsible for loss or damage by fire to the work until Acceptance of the Work. Any fire used within the structure for working purposes shall be extinguished when not in use. Bitumen or tar shall be melted on the ground only. No flammable material shall be stored in the structure in excess of amounts allowed by the authorities. No gasoline shall be stored in or close to the building at any time. The Contractor shall assign a responsible employee to be in charge of fire protection measures.

C. If an EPDM or other single-ply roof is included in the work that requires cleaning of mating surfaces of laps with gasoline, limit amount of gasoline on roof to 2 gallons which shall be in


Page 2 of 7


U.L. listed containers. Also provide one 30 B:C fire extinguisher within 75 feet of any point on the roof.

01 51 23 TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING, AND VENTILATING


B. Existing Heating System:

1. The Contractor may use the existing heating system with temporary extensions, radiators or unit heaters, but such use is subject to the Owner's approval. Coordinate use of existing facilities with Owner. Provide additional, temporary extensions and units to satisfy the criteria given in the preceding paragraph. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Take measures to conserve energy. At the termination of construction, return the facilities to their original condition. Before operation of permanent facilities, verify that installation is approved for operation and that filters are in place.

01 51 33 TEMPORARY TELECOMMUNICATIONS


B. Temporary Telephone Service and Data: The General Contractor shall Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in the construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first aid station. The Contractor shall provide telephone service in their offices and a separate telephone service in the Owner and CA’s Office. It is preferred the Contractor use a cellular phone. Basic service and local calls will be paid for by the Contractor. Toll calls will be paid for by the respective users.

1. Separate Telephone Lines: Provide additional telephone lines as required below and as required by Section 01 52 13 Field Offices and Sheds:

1.1 Where an office has more than two (2) occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant.

1.2 Provide dedicated telephone lines for a separate fax machine in both the Contractor’s office and the DCS / Construction Administrator’s office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including but not limited to the following:

2.1 Local police and fire departments;

2.2 Ambulance service;

2.3 Contractor;

2.4 Architect & Engineers’ offices;

2.5 Subcontractors;

2.6 Suppliers;

2.7 DCS Project Manager;

2.8 Construction Administrator;

2.9 OSBI and OSFM Inspectors;

2.10 User Agency representative.

01 51 36 TEMPORARY WATER


B. Existing Water Service: Water for construction purposes may be taken from the existing service. The Contractor shall provide connections, approved backflow prevention device, meter and pipe to the water main or nearest hydrant, subject to the approval of DCS. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall remove the temporary connections and backfill if necessary. If new water service is installed before construction is complete, the new system


Page 3 of 7


may be used provided it is returned to the Owner in as-new condition. The Contractor shall pay for the water used, as metered.

01 52 13 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS


B Support Facilities Installation:

1. General: Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities in designated area(s) as shown in the Contract Documents. Final placement of the field office trailers is to be approved by the Construction Administrator.

1.1 Maintain support facilities until Acceptance of the Work. Remove prior to Acceptance of the Work with permission from the Owner.

2. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weather tight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project Site. Keep all offices clean and orderly, sweep weekly, and remove rubbish on a daily basis. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

C. General Contractor Provided Field Offices/Equipment: The General Contractor shall provide an office for their own use and a method to contact them by e-mail and telephone at any point and time. The General Contractor shall supply the Construction Administrator and the Owner office or trailer(s) with a water cooler for hot and cold water.

1. State User Agency Provided Field Offices:

The State User Agency will furnish, without charge, one (1) room for the General Contractor’s use as an office in an existing building. The Owner and Construction Administrator will share space with the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall provide and install a 5-lb ABC fire extinguisher and an approved first aid kit. The General Contractor shall be responsible for furniture and shall keep this area clean and return it to its original condition after use. The General Contractor shall provide the following furniture and Equipment, which will remain his property. The furniture may be used but shall be in good condition as judged by the Owner and Construction Administrator.

1.1 The General Contractor shall provide a lockable chemical toilet(s) with toilet tissue for the owners’ use. The General Contractor shall maintain the facility in a sanitary condition. (See 01 52 19 Temporary Sanitary Facilities).

1.2 One (1) Lockable, double-pedestal, office desks, each with an executive chair.

1.3 One (1) Plan tables.

1.4 One (1) Plan racks.

1.5 Six (6) Conference chairs and a conference table (approx. 5 feet x 12 feet).

1.6 One (1) Side tables (approx. 3 feet x 5 feet).

1.7 One (1) Wall mounted, cork display boards (4 foot x 6 foot).

1.8 One (1) Wall mounted, white, wipe-off board, with markers (3 foot x 4 foot).

1.9 Two (2) File cabinets (lockable four drawer letter size).

1.10 Two (2) Bookshelves each with 10 linear feet x 12 inch wide shelving.

1.11 Two (2) Large capacity waste receptacles.

1.12 One (4) Plain paper, Fax Machine with dedicated telephone line approved by Owner.

1.13 Two (2) Telephones with telephone lines and voice mail.

1.14 One (4) Telephones lines (dedicated to computer use) with high-speed Internet connection (minimum of DSL or cable modem service).

2. Field Office Computer System


Page 4 of 7


The General Contractor shall provide 1 Field Office Computer System(s) for the Department’s exclusive use for each field office specified. The General Contractor to provide a desktop computer system in accordance with the minimum requirements listed below.

2.1 Field Office Laptop Computer System:

2.2 Network/Wireless: Ethernet or wireless card to be compatible with the selected internet and office network connections;

2.3 Miscellaneous: One compatible port replicator with AC adapter, one additional AC adapter, one DC adapter and one padded carrying case

3. Computer Software:

The General Contractor shall provide software for the computer system in accordance with the minimum requirements listed below.

3.1 Operating System Software: Latest version of Windows Operating System

3.2 Productivity Software: Microsoft Office , Adobe, Internet Explorer

3.3 Security Software: Norton Anti Virus or Equivalent

3.4 All software shall include the most current updates and patches at the time the computer system is provided to the Owner. The General Contractor shall provide for installation of updates and patches for the operating system, productivity and security software during the term of use of the computer system by the Owner. Updates and patches shall be provided by an automatic update method.

3.5 The Owner may install and maintain proprietary software on the computer in order to run the Owner’s construction management programs.

4. Miscellaneous Computer Requirements

The initial condition of the computer system shall be nearly pristine. All owner installed e-mail accounts, games, spyware, online services, applications, network or other profiles previously set up on the system shall be removed prior to placement in the field office. If the system was provided for a previous DCS contract, all software not specified shall be removed prior to placement in the current field office.

4.1 The General Contractor shall provide an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), and full time surge suppression for each field office computer system specified in this Section.

4.2 The General Contractor shall provide all cables, connections and software required to connect the field office computer system to the printer and the scanner.

4.3 When more than one computer system is specified for a field office, the General Contractor shall provide either an Ethernet or wireless office network to allow all computer systems in the field office to access the field office internet service, the printer and the scanner.

4.4 The General Contractor shall provide appropriate dust covers for all field office desktop computer systems.

4.5 The General Contractor shall provide all manuals necessary for operation of the computer system and software with the system and shall include all documentation normally furnished with the equipment and software when purchased.

4.6 The Owner will be utilizing the computer system to run or access Owner provided construction management software applications. These applications are known to run on Intel and AMD compatible equipment when using the Windows operating system. If the Owner experiences problems running these applications due to hardware or software compatibility, the


Page 5 of 7


General Contractor shall replace the equipment to ensure compatibility to the satisfaction of the Owner within five (5) business days.

4.7 The computer system shall be maintained in good working order. If a portion of the system becomes defective, inoperable, damaged, or stolen, that portion shall be repaired or replaced within five (5) business days after the General Contractor is notified by the Owner. If the computer system and related accessories are not maintained by the General Contractor as required, the Owner may withhold partial payments until the computer system is operational to the Owner’s satisfaction.

5. Field Office Internet Service:

The General Contractor shall provide broadband internet service for the field office. .

D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on-site.

1. Storage sheds for tools, materials and equipment shall be weathertight with heat, lighting and ventilation for products requiring controlled conditions.

2. Remove temporary materials, equipment services and construction before Substantial Completion.

3. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Restore existing facilities used during construction to be specified or to original condition.

01 52 19 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES


B. General Contractor’s Construction Work: Provide toilet facilities for General Contractor’s and subcontractor’s employees engaged on the Project, including employees of other contractors in accordance with the OSHA Table D-1 (29CFR CH.XVII, OSHA Standard 1926.51) below. Locate toilets where directed and maintain them in a sanitary condition.

Number Of Employees Minimum Number Of Facilities*

20 or less 1 toilet

20 or more 1 toilet and 1 urinal per 40 employees

200 or more 1 toilet and 1 urinal per 50 employees

*Toilet/Urinal Combinations shall count as only one facility.

1. Job sites, not provided with a sanitary sewer, shall be provided with one of the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by State Codes:

1.1 Chemical toilets;

3. Locate toilet facilities no more than 1000 feet from any work location.

C. The General Contractor shall provide, where directed, chemical toilets with toilet tissue, plus wash basins with water, soap and paper towels. The General Contractor shall maintain the facilities in a sanitary condition.

D. If women are employed in the work, provide separate, designated facilities for them of the same kind. Provide an adequate number of each kind of facility for each gender.

01 54 00 CONSTRUCTION AIDS


Page 6 of 7



B. The General Contractor shall furnish tools, apparatus and appliances, hoists and/or cranes and power for same, scaffolding, runways, ladders, temporary supports and bracing and similar work or material necessary to insure convenience and safety in the execution of the Contract Documents except where this is otherwise specified in any Technical Specification Section. All such items shall meet the approval of DCS but responsibility for design, strength, and safety shall remain with the General Contractor. All such items shall comply with Federal OSHA regulations and applicable codes, statutes, rules and regulations, including compliance with the requirements of the current edition of the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" published by the A.G.C. (Associated General Contractors of America) and the standards of the Connecticut Department of Labor (DOL).

C. Staging/laydown areas, exterior, and interior, required for the execution of the Contract Documents, shall be furnished, erected, relocated if necessary, and removed by the general Contractor. Staging/laydown shall be maintained in a safe condition without charge to the Owner and for the use of all trades as needed.

01 56 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES


B. Provide barriers to prevent public entry into construction areas and to protect existing facilities from damage by construction operations.

C. Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated on the Construction Documents, or enclose the entire construction site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates.

1. Chain Link Fence: Provide chain link construction fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel and earth. Use a six (6) foot-high (minimum) chain link fence with top rail and filter fabric screening. At completion of the project, the Contractor must remove the construction fence completely, including all portions of below-ground footings. Fence posts must be removed, not sawn off flush with the soil line.

2. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Provide keys to the Construction Administrator.

3. Storage/laydown areas: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

D. Provide covered walkways as required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing buildings.

E. Provide barriers around all trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, materials' dumping, chemically injurious materials, puddles, or running water.

F. Provide temporary, insulated, weathertight closures at openings to the exterior to provide acceptable working conditions and protection for materials, to allow for temporary heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

G. Barriers and enclosures shall be in conformance with code requirements. Do not block egress from occupied buildings unless necessary to further the work of the Contract. In this case, secure the Department's approval of an alternate egress plan.

H. See also Division 00 General Condition, Article 19 “Protection of the Work, Persons, and Property.

01 56 43 TEMPORARY PROTECTION


Page 7 of 7



B. Protect buildings, equipment, furnishings, grounds, and plantings from damage. Any damage shall be repaired or otherwise made good at no expense to the State.

C. Provide protective coverings and barricades to prevent damage. The General Contractor shall be held responsible for, and must make good at his own expense, any water, or other type of damage due to improper coverings. Protect the public and building personnel from injury.

D. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage.

E. Provide protective coverings for walls, projections, jambs, sills and soffits of openings. Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects and storage. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces and on lawn and landscaped areas.

F. See also Division 00 General Condition, Article 19 “Protection of the Work, Persons, and Property.

End

Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities And Controls

SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


Page 1 of 1


01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Summary: Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements contains the following subsections:

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


B. Materials and Equipment: Shall be delivered, stored and handled to prevent intrusion of foreign matter and damage by weather or breakage. Packaged materials shall be delivered and stored in original, unbroken packages.

1. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, that quantities are correct and products are undamaged.

2. Packages, materials and equipment showing evidence of damage will be rejected and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Storage and Protection:

1. Store products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity range required by manufacturer.

2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

3. Store loose granular material on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

4. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to insure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. Keep log showing date, time and problems, if any.

5. Stone, masonry units and similar materials shall be stored on platforms or dry skids and shall be adequately covered and protected against damage.

6. The Contractor shall prepare, as directed by the Owner, one area or space in the building for storage of State-owned equipment.

End

Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements

SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES



01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Summary: Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Procedures contains the following

subsections:

01 71 23 Field Engineering Not Used 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching Not Used 01 74 13 Progress Cleaning Not Used 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management & Disposal Not Used 01 75 00 Starting And Adjusting Not Used 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Not Used 01 78 23 Operation And Maintenance Data Not Used 01 78 30 Warranties And Bonds Not Used

01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING


B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide chases, channels or openings where needed.

C. The Contractor shall install sleeves, inserts, and hangers furnished by the trades needing same.

D. After installing work into openings, channels, and/or chases, the Contractor shall close same. If finishes are to be restored, the new work shall match the original and shall be done by the trade customarily responsible for the particular kind of work.

E. Written permission shall be obtained from the Contractor before cutting beams, arches, lintels or other structural members.

F. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 1. Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Architect/Engineer of the cutting and

patching proposal before cutting and shall submit all Architect/Engineer approval letters to the Construction Administrator before patching the following structural elements: 1.1 Foundation construction. 1.2 Bearing and retaining walls. 1.3 Structural concrete. 1.4 Structural steel. 1.5 Lintels. 1.6 Structural decking. 1.7 Miscellaneous structural metals. 1.8 Exterior curtain-wall construction. 1.9 Equipment supports. 1.10 Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 1.11 Structural systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

G. Do cutting and patching to integrate all elements of the work. Provide penetrations of existing surfaces. Provide samples for testing. Seal penetrations through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs, as applicable; restore or preserve fire-rated and smoke-barrier construction. Construction and finishes shall match original work.

H. The Contractor shall verify dimensions for built-in work and/or work adjoining that of other trades before ordering any material or doing any work. Discrepancies shall be submitted to the Construction Administrator before proceeding with the work.




I. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.

J. Also see Division 00 General Conditions Article 23 “Cutting, Fitting, Patching, and Digging”.

01 74 13 PROGRESS CLEANING


B. This Section includes: 1. Cleaning requirements during construction operations. 2. Final cleaning prior to turning the project over to the Owner.

C. Quality Assurance 2. Coordinate with Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.

2.1 Contractor shall provide progress cleaning that minimizes sources of food, water, and harborage available to pests.

D. Utilize non-toxic cleaning materials and methods. 1. Use natural cleaning materials where feasible. Natural cleaning materials include:

1.1 abrasive cleaners: substitute 1/2 lemon dipped in borax. 1.2 ammonia: substitute vinegar, salt and water mixture, or baking soda and

water. 1.3 disinfectants: substitute 1/2 cup borax in gallon water. 1.4 drain cleaners: substitute 1/4 cup baking soda and 1/4 cup vinegar in boiling

water. 1.5 upholstery cleaners: substitute dry cornstarch.

E. Maintain areas under the General Contractor’s control free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain in a clean and orderly condition.

F. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces before closing the space.

G. Periodically clean interior areas before start of surface finishing and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis.

H. The General Contractor shall control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulates will not adhere to wet or newly-coated surfaces.

I. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily and dispose of legally off-site. No scrap/debris shall remain inside the building or anywhere on site upon final acceptance of the project.

J. Final Cleaning: 1. At completion of Work, remove all remaining waste materials, rubbish, tools,

equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and clean all exposed surfaces; leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 1.1 After review of trees to remain by Architect and Owner, remove tree tags. 1.2 Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971 and the approved

Integrated Pest management (IPM) plan. K. See also Division 00 General Conditions, Article 24 “Cleaning Up”.

01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING





B. Summary: 1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling

requests for building system start up and system demonstration and includes the following: 1.1 Starting Systems. 1.2 Demonstration and instructions. 1.3 Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 01 Section 01 45 00 "Quality Control" specifies quality assurance and

inspecting services. 2. Division 01 Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" specifies requirements for

contract close out requirements for system operation and maintenance data and extra materials.

D. Starting Systems: 1. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. 2. Provide written notification to the Owner’s Construction Administrator thirty (30)

Calendar Days prior to start-up of each item. 3. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper

lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, and control sequence for other conditions that may cause damage.

4. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

5. Verify that wiring and support components are complete and tested. 6. When referenced in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide

an authorized representative to be present at the site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

7. Submit a written report in accordance with Division 01 Section 01 45 00 "Quality Control" that the equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning properly.

E. Demonstration and Instructions: 1. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner and Agency

Personnel fourteen (14) Calendar Days prior to substantial completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation perform demonstration for

season within six (6) months. 3. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents

of manual with Owner and Agency Personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

4. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintenance, and shutdown of each item at agreed upon scheduled time and at equipment or designated location.

5. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during demonstration.

6. Starting and adjusting equipment does not constitute acceptance by the owner since commissioning is a requirement of this contract. Additionally, the warrantee does not begin until substantial completion has been granted for that specific item.

F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. The Contractor will employ and pay for the testing services of an independent

consultant to verify the testing, adjusting, and balancing.




2. Reports will be submitted by the independent testing consultant to the Construction Administrator indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. The Owner may employ and pay for the services of an independent consultant to verify testing, adjusting, and balancing which was performed by the Contractor.

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


B. Substantial Completion: 1. Upon completion of the work, the General Contractor shall submit to the State a

Certificate of Substantial Completion wherein the General Contractor certifies that all conditions of the Contract Documents have been met, and that the facility is ready for occupancy by the Agency. Issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by the Owner shall be a pre-condition for payment by the Owner. 1.1 Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for Certification

of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1.2 In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent (100%) completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1.2.1 Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated

in the Contract Documents and a statement showing all accounting of the Contract Documents.

1.2.3 If 100 percent (100%) completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete shall be provided as well as a schedule for completion of work.

1.3 Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 1.4 Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance

agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 1.5 Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the

Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

1.6 Submit as-built record drawings, maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

1.7 Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 1.8 Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the

Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

1.9 Demonstration, through operation and testing, the functions of all systems and/or equipment to the satisfaction of the Owner for compliance to the contract. Complete testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

1.10 Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting. 1.11 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes. 1.12 Compliance with other terms as outlined in the Contract Documents. 1.13 List of all the General Contractor’s suppliers, sub-contractors, etc.

Include name of firm, address, FEIN number and CT Tax I.D. number.




2. Inspection Procedures: The General Contractor shall be ready and prepared when they request a Substantial Completion inspection. If the inspection reveals that the work is not complete, there are extensive punchlist items and as the items listed above are not complete, the Construction Administrator, Owner, and Agency will determine the inspection has failed.

3. The General Contractor is responsible for all costs to re-inspect due to a failed inspection. 3.1 The General Contractor will repeat inspection when requested and assured

that the Work is substantially complete. 3.2 Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for

Acceptance of the Work. C. Acceptance of the Work

1. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting a Final Inspection and Certificate of Acceptance and Final Payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1.1 Submit a request for the Final Inspection and Certificate of Acceptance, with

releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

1.2 Submit a certified copy of the Architect's Final Inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect.

1.3 Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

1.4 Submit consent of surety to Final Payment. 1.5 Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with

insurance requirements. D. Reinspection Procedure: The Inspection Group will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of

notice from the Construction Administrator that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Owner. 1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Construction Administrator will prepare a

Certificate of Acceptance for issuance by the Owner. If the Work is incomplete, the Construction Administrator will advise the General Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for Acceptance.

E. Issuance of a Certificate of Acceptance, in accordance with CGS § 4-61(b)(2) as amended, by the Owner does not alter the responsibility of the General Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

F. General Contractor’s As-Built Drawings Submittal: 1. General: The General Contractor shall not use the As-Built Drawings for construction

purposes. Protect General Contractor’s As-Built Drawings from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to the As-Built Drawings for Owner‘s and Construction Administrator’s reference during normal working hours. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. Failure to keep documents current is sufficient cause to withhold progress payments. 1.1 The General Contractor shall also engage the services of a Surveyor

registered in the State of Connecticut to conduct a final survey to determine the location of exterior underground utility lines and to record the results, and update existing electronic media.




1.2 The record of exterior underground utilities shall be made at the time of installation on Mylar film drawing and AutoCAD (latest version) compatible disks. The drawing shall bear the seal of the Land Surveyor and a statement of accuracy.

2. General Contractor’s As-Built Drawings: The General Contractor shall maintain one clean, complete undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Failure to keep As-built Documents current is sufficient cause to withhold progress payments. 2.1 Mark record sets with erasable pencil to distinguish between variations in

separate categories of the Work. 2.2 Mark all new information that is not shown on Contract Drawings. 2.3 Note related Agreement Amendments where applicable. 2.4 Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with

durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.

2.5 Upon completion of the work, the General Contractor shall submit Record Drawings to the Construction Administrator for the Owner's Records who will pass them on to the Architect or Engineer for transferring the changes to the Record Drawing Mylar Tracings.

2.6 Submit electronic format data of all Coordination Drawing drawings as required by the owner.

2.7 Refer to Section 01 45 00 “Quality Control” Paragraph 8.3.6 for required as-built drawings and specifications for fire alarm systems.

2.8 Upon completion of the work, the General Contractor shall submit Record Drawings to the Architect and/or Engineer for transferring the changes to the Record Drawings.

G. General Contractor’s Record Documents: Within thirty (30) Calendar Days after receipt of the General Contractor’s “As-Built Drawings” the Architect/Engineers shall convert the General Contractor "As-Built" information into an electronic CADD format as required by the Owner, using the original Architect/Engineer contract documents as base drawings. The Architect shall produce “Record Documents” that show all of the significant modifications made during the course of the project.. The Architect’s shall produce two (2) sets of electronic CADD format “Record Documents” on electronic media as required by the Owner and (1) set of reproducible Mylar’s “Record Documents”. The original Mylar “Cover Sheet” that includes the original Architect/Engineer Team Members dated signatures and professional seals shall be the Record Documents Cover Sheet. The Architect’s final “Record Documents” (electronic media and reproducible Mylar’s) shall be made at the Architect’s expense and shall become the property of the State.

I. General Contractor’s As-Built Product Data: The General Contractor shall maintain one copy of each As-Built Product Data submittal and a markup of record drawings and As-Built Specifications. 1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in

comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

3. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of As-Built Product Data to the Construction Administrator for the Owner's records.

4. The Architect and Engineers will be responsible for the accuracy of As-Built Drawings.




J. General Contractor’s Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the appropriate Architect/Engineer Team Members shall meet with the Owner, Construction Administrator, and the Agency's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner/Agency instructions regarding delivery to the Owner/Agency Sample storage area.

K. General Contractor’s Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Construction Administrator for the Owner's records.

L. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch, 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder according to Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data”. The manual shall include, but not be limited to, the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule. 9. List of vendors and addresses.

M. Closeout Procedures: 1. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that

requires regular maintenance to meet with the Agency's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1.1 Maintenance manuals. 1.2 Record documents. 1.3 Spare parts and materials. 1.4 Tools. 1.5 Lubricants. 1.6 Fuels. 1.7 Identification systems. 1.8 Control sequences. 1.9 Hazards. 1.10 Cleaning. 1.11 Warranties and bonds. 1.12 Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

2. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 2.1 Startup. 2.2 Shutdown. 2.3 Emergency operations. 2.4 Noise and vibration adjustments. 2.5 Safety procedures.




2.6 Economy and efficiency adjustments. 2.7 Effective energy utilization.

N. Final Cleaning: 1. General: The Contract Documents require general cleaning during construction.

Regular site cleaning is included in Section 01 74 13 “Progress Cleaning”. 2. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion and Certification of Occupancy.

3. Interior: 3.1 Remove labels that are not permanent labels. 3.2 Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and

windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Remove paint spots; wash and polish glass.

3.3 Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.

3.4 Wash washable surfaces of mechanical, electrical equipment and fixtures and replace filters, clean strainers on mechanical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

3.5 Clean and polish finish hardware. 3.6 Clean and polish tile and other glazed surfaces. 3.7 Clean floors; wax and buff resilient tile. Clean vinyl or rubber base. 3.8 Vacuum and/or dust walls, ceilings, lighting fixtures, ceiling diffusers and

other wall and ceiling items. 3.9 Remove defacements, streaks, fingerprints, and erection marks.

4. Exterior: 4.1 Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and

other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth, even-textured surface.

4.2 Clean exposed exterior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances

4.3 Clean roofs, gutters and downspouts. 4.4 Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction equipment

and facilities from the site, and deposit it legally elsewhere. 4.5 Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and

windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Remove paint spots; wash and polish glass.

5. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the work of rodents, insects, and other pests.

6. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction.

7. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Agency's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous




materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. 7.1 Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work,

they become the Agency's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Construction Administrator.

7.2 Leave building clean and ready for occupancy. If the Design Builder fails to clean up, the Owner may do so, with the cost charged to the Developer.

O. Prerequisites To Functional Completion 1. All TAB work and the commissioning of systems must be complete prior to Functional

Completion, unless approved in writing by the DCS Project Manager. Exceptions to this are the planned control system training performed after occupancy and any required seasonal or approved deferred testing. This includes for all systems, but is not limited to: 1.1 Completed and signed start-up and prefunctional checklist documentation; 1.2 Requested trend log data; 1.3 Submission of final approved TAB report; 1.4. Completion of all functional testing; 1.5 Required training of Owner personnel completed and approved; 1.6 Submission of the approved O&M manuals; 1.7 All identified deficiencies have been corrected or are approved by the Owner

to be accepted from this milestone. 2. The DCS Project Manager and Construction Administrator will determine the date of

Functional Completion after reviewing the Commissioning Authority (CxA) Agent’s recommendation for Functional Completion.

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Summary: This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Preparing and submitting operation and maintenance manuals for building operating

systems and equipment. 2. Preparing and submitting instruction manuals covering the care, preservation, and

maintenance of architectural products and finishes. C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" specifies preparation of Shop Drawings and Product Data.

2. Division 01 Section 01 75 00 "Starting and Adjusting" specifies instruction of the Owner and Agency operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of building systems and equipment and the general requirements for starting-up equipment and systems.

3. Division 01 Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" specifies general closeout requirements.

4. Division 01 Section 01 78 30 "Warranties and Bonds" specifies requirements for submittal of warranties and bonds.

5. Appropriate Sections of the Divisions 02 through 49 specify special operation and maintenance data requirements for specific pieces of equipment or building operating systems.

D. Quality Assurance 1. Maintenance Manual Preparation: In preparation of maintenance manuals, use

personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved.




1.1 Where maintenance manuals require written instructions, use personnel skilled in technical writing where necessary for communication of essential data.

1.2 Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, use draftsmen capable of preparing drawings clearly in an understandable format.

2. Instructions for the Owner and Agency Personnel: The Contractor must use experienced instructors thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system involved, to instruct the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel.

E. Submittals: 1. Submittal Schedule: Comply with the following schedule for submitting operation

and maintenance manuals: 1.1 Before Substantial Completion, when each installation that requires

operation and maintenance manuals is nominally complete, submit two (2) draft copies of each manual to the Construction Administrator for review. Include a complete index or table of contents of each manual. 1.1.1 The Construction Administrator will return one (1) copy of the draft

with comments within twenty-one (21) Calendar Days of receipt. 1.1.2 Submit three (3) copies of data in final form at least twenty (21)

Calendar Days before final inspection. The Construction Administrator will return one (1) copy within twenty (21) Calendar Days after final inspection, with comments.

2. After final inspection, make corrections or modifications to comply with the Architect's comments. Submit final copies to the Construction Administrator within twenty (21) Calendar Days of receipt of the Architect's comments.

3. Form of Submittal: Prepare operation and maintenance manuals in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Owner's operating personnel. Organize into suitable sets of manageable size. Where possible, assemble instructions for similar equipment into a single binder.

4. Binders: For each manual, provide heavy-duty, commercial-quality, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11- inch paper. Provide a clear plastic sleeve on the spine to hold labels describing contents. Provide pockets in the covers to receive folded sheets. 4.1 Where two (2) or more binders are necessary to accommodate data,

correlate data in each binder into related groupings according to the Project Manual table of contents. Cross-reference other binders where necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of the piece of equipment or system.

4.2 Identify each binder on front and spine, with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”, Project title or name, and subject matter covered. Indicate volume number for multiple volume sets of manuals.

5. Dividers: Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid-covered tabs for each separate section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Provide a typed description of the product and major parts of equipment included in the section on each divider.

6. Protective Plastic Jackets: Provide protective, transparent, plastic jackets designed to enclose diagnostic software for computerized electronic equipment.

7. Text Material: Where maintenance manuals require written material, use the manufacturer's standard printed material. If manufacturer's standard printed material is not available, provide specially prepared data, neatly typewritten, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq ft white bond paper.

8. Drawings: Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, provide reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind in with text. 8.1 Where oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to the same size as

text pages and use as a foldout.




8.2 If drawings are too large to be used practically as a foldout, place the drawing, neatly folded, in front or rear pocket of binder. Insert a typewritten page indicating drawing title, description of contents, and drawing location at the appropriate location in the manual.

F. Manual Content 1. In each manual include information specified in the individual Specification Section

and the following information for each major component of building equipment and its controls: 1.1 General system or equipment description. 1.2 Design factors and assumptions. 1.3 Copies of applicable shop drawings and product data. 1.4 System or equipment identification, including:

1.4.1 Name of manufacturer. 1.4.2 Model number. 1.4.3 Serial number of each component.

1.5 Operating instructions. 1.6 Emergency instructions. 1.7 Wiring diagrams. 1.8 Inspection and test procedures. 1.9 Maintenance procedures and schedules. 1.10 Precautions against improper use and maintenance. 1.11 Copies of warranties. 1.12 Repair instructions including spare parts listing. 1.13 Sources of required maintenance materials and related services. 1.14 Manual index.

2. Organize each manual into separate sections for each piece of related equipment. As a minimum, each manual shall contain a title page; a table of contents; copies of product data, supplemented by drawings and written text; and copies of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 2.1 Title Page: Provide a title page in a transparent, plastic envelope as the

first sheet of each manual. Provide the following information: 2.1.1 Subject matter covered by the manual. 2.1.2 Name and address of the Project. 2.1.3 Date of submittal. 2.1.4 Name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor. 2.1.5 Name and address of the Architect and Construction

Administrator. 2.1.6 Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and

maintenance manuals. 2.2 Table of Contents: After title page, include a typewritten table of contents

for each volume, arranged systematically according to the Project Manual format. Include a list of each product included, identified by product name or other appropriate identifying symbol and indexed to the content of the volume. 2.2.1 Where a system requires more than one volume to accommodate

data, provide a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

2.3 Provide a general information section immediately following table of contents, listing each product included in the manual, identified by product name. Under each product, list the name, address, and telephone number




of the subcontractor or Installer and the maintenance contractor. Clearly delineate the extent of responsibility of each of these entities. Include a local source for replacement parts and equipment.

2.4 Product Data: Where the manuals include manufacturer's standard printed data, include only sheets that are pertinent to the part or product installed. Mark each sheet to identify each part or product included in the installation. Where the Project includes more than one (1) item in a tabular format, identify each item, using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data that is applicable to the installation, and delete references to information that is not applicable.

2.5 Written Text: Prepare written text to provide necessary information where manufacturer's standard printed data is not available, and the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. Prepare written text where it is necessary to provide additional information or to supplement data included in the manual. Organize text in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. Where necessary, provide a logical sequence of instruction for each operation or maintenance procedure.

2.6 Drawings: Provide specially prepared drawings where necessary to supplement manufacturer's printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment or systems or to provide control or flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in project record drawings to assure correct illustration of the completed installation. 2.6.1 Do not use original Record Documents as part of operation and

maintenance manuals. 2.7 Warranties and/or Bonds: Provide a copy of each warranty and/or bond in

the appropriate manual for the information of the Owner's operating personnel. Provide written data outlining procedures to follow in the event of product failure. List circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranty or bond.

G. Material And Finishes Maintenance Manual: 1. Submit four (4) copies of each manual, in final form, on material and finishes to the

Construction Administrator for distribution. Provide one (1) section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. Provide a second section for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. 1.1 Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on care

and maintenance of materials and finishes. 2. Architectural Products: Provide manufacturer's data and instructions on care and

maintenance of architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. 2.1 Manufacturer's Data: Provide complete information on architectural

products, including the following, as applicable: 2.1.1 Manufacturer's catalog number. 2.1.2 Size. 2.1.3 Material composition. 2.1.4 Color. 2.1.5 Texture. 2.1.6 Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

2.2 Care and Maintenance Instructions: Provide information on care and maintenance, including manufacturer's recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. Provide information on cleaning agents and methods that could prove detrimental to the product. Include manufacturer's recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.




3. Moisture Protection and Products Exposed to the Weather: Provide complete manufacturer's data with instructions on inspection, maintenance, and repair of products exposed to the weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes. 3.1 Manufacturer's Data: Provide manufacturer's data giving detailed

information, including the following, as applicable: 3.1.1 Applicable standards. 3.1.2 Chemical composition. 3.1.3 Installation details. 3.1.4 Inspection procedures. 3.1.5 Maintenance information. 3.1.6 Repair procedures.

H. Equipment And Systems Maintenance Manual: 1. Submit four (4) copies of each manual, in final form, on equipment and systems to

the Construction Administrator for distribution. Provide separate manuals for each unit of equipment, each operating system, and each electric and electronic system. 1.1 Refer to individual Specification Sections for additional requirements on

operation and maintenance of the various pieces of equipment and operating systems.

2. Equipment and Systems: Provide the following information for each piece of equipment, each building operating system, and each electric or electronic system. 2.1 Description: Provide a complete description of each unit and related

component parts, including the following: 2.1.1 Equipment or system function. 2.1.2 Operating characteristics. 2.1.3 Limiting conditions. 2.1.4 Performance curves. 2.1.5 Engineering data and tests. 2.1.6 Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

2.2 Manufacturer's Information: For each manufacturer of a component part or piece of equipment, provide the following: 2.2.1 Printed operation and maintenance instructions. 2.2.2 Assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 2.2.3 List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

2.3 Maintenance Procedures: Provide information detailing essential maintenance procedures, including the following:

2.4 Operating Procedures: Provide information on equipment and system operating procedures, including the following: 2.4.1 Startup procedures. 2.4.2 Equipment or system break-in. 2.4.3 Routine and normal operating instructions. 2.4.4 Regulation and control procedures. 2.4.5 Instructions on stopping. 2.4.6 Shutdown and emergency instructions. 2.4.7 Summer and winter operating instructions. 2.4.8 Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 2.4.9 Special operating instructions.




2.5 Servicing Schedule: Provide a schedule of routine servicing and lubrication requirements, including a list of required lubricants for equipment with moving parts.

2.6 Controls: Provide a description of the sequence of operation and as-installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer for systems requiring controls.

2.7 Identification Drawings: Provide each Contractor's Identification Drawings. 2.7.1 Provide as-installed, color-coded, piping diagrams, where required

for identification. 2.8 Valve Tags: Provide charts of valve-tag numbers, with the location and

function of each valve. 2.9 Circuit Directories: For electric and electronic systems, provide complete

circuit directories of panel boards, including the following: 2.9.1 Controls. 2.9.2 Communication.

3. Electronic Media: 3.1 For equipment which requires maintenance by operational personnel,

provide a professionally developed DVD for the use of maintenance training for the facility. Each DVD will be accompanied by a written index which can be utilized to find any specific item of information by time or place on the DVD.

3.2 The General Contractor is responsible for this production. This DVD will be provided to the Construction Administrator at the same time as the delivery of the other maintenance material.

3.3 The DVDmust be able to be edited for future changes to the equipment and modifications as they occur.

01 78 30 WARRANTIES AND BONDS


B. Summary: This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the General Contractor’s period for

correction of the Work. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 01 Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" specifies procedures for submitting warranties.

2. Division 01 Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" specifies contract closeout procedures.

3. Division 01 Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" specifies required operation and maintenance data.

4. The Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

5. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

D. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the General Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the General Contractor.




E. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

F. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

G. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The General Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

H. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to

limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

I. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the General Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

J. The General Contractor shall warranty all materials and workmanship for a period of eighteen (18) months from the date of Substantial Completion. In addition, the General Contractor shall furnish the warranties listed below. Submit four copies of each to the Architect in the supplier's standard form or in the form given below if there is no standard form available.

K. Specification/Warranty Table: The General Contractor shall provide for all warranties as shown in the Specification/Warranty table:

Specification / Warranty Table Item No. Section No. Specification Product/Warranty

1. 03 Floor hardener:

5 year, material and workmanship. 2. 05 Expansion Joint Covers:

5 year material & workmanship. 3. 07 Single-Ply Membrane Roofing, Base Flashing and Insulation:

10 year unlimited, materials and installation, and; 15 year material and workmanship, and; 2 year General Contractor’s warranty for installation.

4. 07 Built Up Roofing (BUR), Base Flashing, and Insulation: 20 year material and workmanship, and;

2 General Contractor’s warranty for installation. 5. 07 Metal Roofing and Siding:

20 year against rupture, cracks or perforation due to corrosion, and;

20 year for fluorocarbon finish (if used) against peeling, blistering,

fading and chalking as limited by industry standards, and; 10 year weathertightness warranty by General Contractor’s installer.

6. 07 Copper Roofing:

10 year against rupture, cracks or perforation due to corrosion and

including materials and workmanship. 7. 07 Vents and Hatches:

5 year product and installation, including weathertightness. 8. 07 Waterproofing:

5 year material and workmanship. 9. 07 Water Repellent:




The term offered for the Specific product. 10. 07 Exterior Expansion Joint Covers:

5 year material and workmanship, including weathertightness. 11. 07 Wood Shingles (roofing, siding):

10 year for material and workmanship. 12. 07 Exterior - Interior Caulking and Sealants:

5 year, material and workmanship. 13. 07 Metal Flashing and Sheet Metal:

3 year, material and workmanship. 14. 07 Asphalt Roof Shingles:

25 year, material pro-rated. 15. 07 Asphalt Roof Shingles Installation:

15 year, workmanship, pro-rated. 16. 08 Solid Wood Core and Mineral Core doors:

Lifetime for interior doors. 5 year for exterior doors.

17. 08 Overhead Doors (coiling or sectional): 5 year material and workmanship.

18. 08 Skylights: 5 Year product and installation, including weathertightness.

19. 08 Closers, Locksets, Exit Bolts:

Longest term offered by manufacturer for grade/class of particular item, material and workmanship.

20. 08 Insulating glass:

10 year against failure of hermetic seal, interpane dusting, or misting

including replacement of unit. 21. 08 Windows:

5 year material and workmanship including weathertightness. 22. 08 Laminated Glass:

10 year against delamination. 23. 08 Storefront/Curtain Wall:

5 year material and workmanship (insulating glass separate). Air and water infiltration and strength to specified AAMA designation.

24. 09 Carpet: 10 year wear and color fastness, and; 3 year installation.

25. 10 Operable Partitions: 5 Years, material, and workmanship.

26. 10 088300 Mirrors: 15 years against silver spoilage.

27. 14 Elevators and Wheelchair Lifts: 18 months for material, workmanship, and installation.

28 22 Electric Heating Cable: 10 years, material, and installation.

29 22 Water Softener: 10 years, material, and installation.

30 22 Instantaneous Heat Exchangers: 1 year, material, and installation.

30 22 Instantaneous Heat Exchangers: 1 year, material, and installation.

31 23 Fuel Storage Tank: 30 years, material, and installation.

32 23 Compressors and Pumps: 5 years, material and installation,

33 26 Dimming Controls: 8 years, material and installation,

34 26 Switchboards and Panels: 5 years, material and installation,

35 26 Engine Generators: 10 years, material and installation,




36 26 Uninterruptable Power Supply: 3 years, material and installation,

37 26 Emergency Lighting Batteries: 10 years, material and installation,

38 26 Lighting Ballasts: 5 years, material and installation,

39 32 Plant Material, Turf and Grasses: 24 months, material and installation, and growth.

L. Submit certification that finish materials are fire rated as specified. M. Form of Warranty: Warranties shall be submitted in following format:

Warranty

Commissioner: (Insert Commissioner’s Name) Department of Administrative Services

Division of Construction Services 165 Capitol Avenue

Hartford, Connecticut 06106

Project Number: (Insert DCS Project Number) Project Title: (Insert Project Title)

I (We) hereby warranty

the work on the referenced project for a period of years

from , 20 against failures of workmanship and materials in accordance

with the requirements of Section , Page , Paragraph , of the Specifications.

Installer Subcontractor Vendor/Suppliers Manufacturer

Installer or Subcontractor or

Vendor/Suppliers or Manufacturer Name:

Installer or Subcontractor or

Vendor/Suppliers or Manufacturer Signature:

General Contractor’s Name

General Contractor’s Signature:

or

General Contractor’s Authorized Agent Signature:

N. Bonds shall be by approved Surety Companies, made out to the Commissioner, Department of Administrative Services on companies’ standard form.

O. Warranties, Guarantees, or bonds supplied by the General Contractor’s Subcontractors or Vendors/Suppliers or Manufacturers shall reference the project name, number, and location and be certified by the General Contractor to be for the product and installation on the project and must be countersigned by the General Contractor.

P. Submittals: 1. Submit written warranties prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the

General Contractor’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for




the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Owner.

2. Forms for special warranties are included in this Section. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the General Contractor’s, and by the General Contractor’s subcontractor or vendor/supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Construction Administrator, for approval prior to final execution. 2.1 Refer to the Divisions 02 through 48 Sections for specific content

requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. 3. 4. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-

covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-inch by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 4.1 Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate

warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and telephone number of the Installer.

4.2 Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," DCS Project Number, Project Title, name of the General Contractor, and name of General Contractor’s subcontractor or vendor/supplier, or manufacturer.

4.3 When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

End

Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Procedures

SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Page 1 of 6

AMENTA EMMA ARCHITECTS July 14, 2017

CT DAS/DCS PROJECT NO.: BI-NN-665

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by

selective demolition operations. 4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


Page 2 of 6



1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's

partial occupancy of completed Work.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.


Page 3 of 6



2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.


Page 4 of 6



1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or

video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or

duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. c. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in

Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.


Page 5 of 6



3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly

dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and

to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose

excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.


Page 6 of 6



F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.

1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and

Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119

SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS

Page 1 of 6



SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For steel framing and supports for countertops, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed in the State of CT responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers, certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Welding certificates.


Page 2 of 6



D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design steel framing and supports for countertops.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg Fambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.


Page 3 of 6



2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A with hex nuts, ASTM A 563and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors [or] [chemical anchors].

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.


Page 4 of 6



B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.6 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.


Page 5 of 6



1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" unless indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for steel framing and supports for countertops securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.


Page 6 of 6



3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.


SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

Page 1 of 7



SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel pipe and tube railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Railing brackets. 3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.

2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post,

handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.

a. Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation by an engineer licensed in the State of CT.


Page 2 of 7




A. Welding certificates.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Wagner, R & B, Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=1544

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457002544


Page 3 of 7



1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbs. / ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbs. applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inchclearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.


Page 4 of 7




A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting,".

E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

F. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows

after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I. Form Changes in Direction as Follows:


Page 5 of 7



1. by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

L. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

M. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.


Page 6 of 7



2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.4 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs.

Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through

concealed steel reinforcements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."


Page 7 of 7



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.


SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

Page 1 of 6



SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Utility shelving. 5. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners.


Page 2 of 6



4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-

treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated,


Page 3 of 6



provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof framing and blocking. 3. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection

with roofing. 4. Plywood backing panels.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Northern species; NLGA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

B. Other Framing: No. 2 grade of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Utility shelving.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 3. Northern species; NLGA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of the following species and grades:


Page 4 of 6



1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on [ICC-ES AC01] ICC-ES AC58 ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.


A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.


Page 5 of 6



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.


Page 6 of 6



2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.

C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


SECTION 06 41 13 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

Page 1 of 6



SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Architectural wood cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural wood cabinets unless

concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 3. Shop finishing of architectural wood cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products fire-retardant-treated materials cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and

reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items

installed in architectural wood cabinets. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels.


Page 2 of 6



D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12 inches long for

lumber and 12 by 12 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.

2. Thermoset decorative panels, 12 by 12 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on one edge.

3. Corner pieces as follows:

a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.

b. Miter joints for standing trim.

4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

1. Composite wood products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Adhesives.

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of typical architectural wood cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed

Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


Page 3 of 6




A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CABINETS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

2.2 WOOD CABINETS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Type of Construction: Face frame.

C. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush inset.


Page 4 of 6



D. Reveal Dimension: 1/16” .

E. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Poplar

F. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium-density fiberboard.

G. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match materials indicated for exposed surfaces.

a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding.

H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally

fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as follows:

1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.

B. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.

C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.

E. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

F. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

G. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


Page 5 of 6




A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish architectural wood cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural wood cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of cabinets.

C. Opaque Finish:

1. Grade: Custom Economy. 2. Finish: System - 4, water-based latex acrylic. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.


Page 6 of 6



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. For shop finished items use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.


A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS

Page 1 of 7



SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


Page 2 of 7




A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications

indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. c. Pecora





Page 3 of 7



B. Silicone, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.

2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.

B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated.




















Page 4 of 7



2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with





Page 5 of 7



joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,

harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace

them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads


Page 6 of 7



of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 2 tests for the first 100 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform one test for each 100 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates

or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


Page 7 of 7



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#1.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints in glass unit masonry assemblies. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement JS-#2.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-#3.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 100/50, NT . 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


SECTION 08 12 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

Page 1 of 6



SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.




A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 6. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


Page 2 of 6




A. Product Test Reports: For each type of frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each unit to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Apex Industries, Inc. 2. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc. 4. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 5. Daybar Industries, Ltd. 6. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; Assa Abloy Group Company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.









Page 3 of 6



2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2..

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. 3. Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. 4. Construction: Full profile welded. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts

with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less

than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.


Page 4 of 6



G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor;

however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or

fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or

fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom

of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows.

Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

7. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a 45-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.


Page 5 of 6



1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-

metal work for hardware.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. b. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly

set and secured.


Page 6 of 6



c. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

d. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion

anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to

manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and

plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.


A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.


SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Page 1 of 5



SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with opaque finish.




A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and

edges representing actual materials to be used.

a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


Page 2 of 5




A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during remainder of construction period.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inchspan.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Eggers Industries. 2. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. 3. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.






Page 3 of 5



B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting

hardware.

3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.

a. Apply MDO to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers.

3. Exposed Verticaland Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core: Particleboard . 5. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed

before veneering. 6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable

requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.


Page 4 of 5



2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099123" Interior Painting."

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted ontop and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Opaque Finish:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV curable,

acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Semigloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, install per manufacture installation instruction and recommendations.

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.


Page 5 of 5



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS

Page 1 of 4



SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel lites. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details.

C. Samples: For each type of the following:

1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. 3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.


Page 2 of 4




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. 2. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 3. National Glass Industries.

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process.

B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality, ultraclear (low-iron) float glass with a minimum 91 percent visible light transmission.






Page 3 of 4



1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.

C. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. b. Liquid Nails Adhesive. c. Macco Adhesives. d. OSI Sealants; Henkel Corporation. e. Pecora Corporation.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

D. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint, as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer, to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.








Page 4 of 4



B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual," "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.


SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

Page 1 of 5



SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.



1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members."


A. Evaluation Reports: For embossed steel studs and runners firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

B. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/360 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft..

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.


Page 2 of 5



B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) MBA Building Supplies. 2) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 3) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 4) Steel Network, Inc. (The).

b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical movement.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2) Fire Trak Corp. 3) Steel Network, Inc. (The).

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.


a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. USG.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.


a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. c. USG.

2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the

















Page 3 of 5



design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0179 inch. b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches.

E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. United States Gypsum Company.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing

installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.






Page 4 of 5



D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner

track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:


Page 5 of 5



1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD

Page 1 of 6



SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.




B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of trim accessory indicated.


A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


Page 2 of 6




A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.












Page 3 of 6



3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:







Page 4 of 6



1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,

sandable topping compound.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Grabber Construction Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. United States Gypsum Company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.







Page 5 of 6



D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and

decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated.


Page 6 of 6



B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


SECTION 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING

Page 1 of 10



SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic mosaic tile. 2. Porcelain tile. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Waterproof membrane. 5. Crack isolation membrane.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in

tile surfaces. 2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.



1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.




Page 2 of 10



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of

tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.

2. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's Foreman Certification. 3. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by

the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed



Page 3 of 10




A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain waterproof membrane and crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Waterproof membrane. 2. Crack isolation membrane.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.


Page 4 of 10



C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type CT-3: Glazed porcelain floor tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile; Continental Slate or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. c. Crossville, Inc. d. Grupo Porcelanite. e. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: 3 by 3 inches. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 6. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Continental Slate, Persion Gold Mosaic CS54 9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching

characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.

B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-1: Glazed wall tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile; Forest Park or

a comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. c. Grupo Porcelanite. d. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

2. Module Size: 6” X 36”. 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. Provide bullnose edge at

exposed corners. 6. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: Forest Park, Summertree, 1/3rd bond 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching

characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining

flat tile.















Page 5 of 10



b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

C. Ceramic Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile; Terra Antica or

a comparable product by one of the following:

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. c. Grupo Porcelanite. d. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

2. Module Size: 18” X 18”. 3. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 6. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. Provide bullnose edge at exposed corners. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: Terra Antica, Celeste / Grigio TA04, ½ bond 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching

characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining

flat tile. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces

designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope min., with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. Refer to details on drawings.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.

1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.


a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.













Page 6 of 10



2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.



2.7 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.

1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.

2. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded-wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for minimum wire size.

3. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847.

a. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.

b. Base Metal and Finish for Exterior Applications: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. c. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat. d. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self-furring. e. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd..

4. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

B. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15.


a. ARDEX Americas. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.

2.8 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.














Page 7 of 10




2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

C. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.


a. Custom Building Products. b. Jamo Inc. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.

2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.










Page 8 of 10



4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:


Page 9 of 10



1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 3. Porcelain Tile: 1/16 inch.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in improved modified dry-set mortar (thinset).

2. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in improved modified dry-set mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant.

K. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it.

3.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.


Page 10 of 10



1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.9 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F112 and ANSI A108.1C; cement mortar bed (thickset) bonded to concrete, waterproofing, crack isolation membrane, and epoxy grout.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-3. b. Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: epoxy grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C ; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board over waterproofing membrane and epoxy grout.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 and CT-2. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

C. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA B415; thinset mortar on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: CT-1 and CT-2. b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.


SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING

Page 1 of 6



SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1. Wood. 2. Gypsum board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.


Page 2 of 6



C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.


Page 3 of 6



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Dulux (formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. 4. Glidden Professional.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.







Page 4 of 6



G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand

smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.


Page 5 of 6



2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Wood Substrates: Wood trim .

1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI INT 6.3T:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.


Page 6 of 6



c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

B. Wood Substrates: casework.

1. Latex over Latex Primer System MPI INT 6.4R:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #43.


SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

Page 1 of 4



SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Private-use bathroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Custodial accessories.


1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

3. Include electrical characteristics.

B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.


Page 2 of 4




A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED MATERIALS

A. Owner-Furnished Materials: Toilet Paper Dispenser, Soap Dispenser, Paper Towel Dispenser, and Floor Mounted Waste Receptacle.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain private use bathroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Grab Bar, key notes #1,#2,#3,#4, #21, and #22:


a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Underlavatory Guard:


a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Truebro by IPS Corporation.

2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct

contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.









Page 3 of 4



2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Mop and Broom Holder, key note #31:


a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation.

2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 36 inches. 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.






Page 4 of 4



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.


SECTION 12 36 61.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

Page 1 of 4



SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material backsplashes. 3. Solid surface material end splashes. 4. Solid surface material apron fronts.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.

1.4 . INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


Page 2 of 4




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. Mock up shall consist of one sink within

one bathroom. . 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed



A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.


a. Cambria. b. Corian. c. Wilsonart LLC.

2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Custom.

B. Configuration:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top with separate apron, 2 inches high, recessed 1/2-inch behind front edge.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.




Page 3 of 4



C. Countertops: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch-thick particleboard with exposed edges built up with 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material .

D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material.

E. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly. 2. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in the shop.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

G. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field if required.

1. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches of a sink or cooktop and not where a countertop section less than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.

2. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. Provide at least three splines in each joint.

H. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

a. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch radius at juncture of cutout edges with top

surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. 2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar

items.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.


Page 4 of 4



B. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into metal brackets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

D. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.

2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

E. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

F. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

H. Apply sealant to gaps at walls with clear silicone.

END OF SECTION 123661.16

SECTION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PAGE 1 OF 6

AMENTA EMMA ARCHITECTS CT DAS/DCS PROJECT NO.: BI-NN-665JULY 14, 2017

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 078400 - Firestopping.

B. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Pipingidentification.

C. Section 211300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler systems design.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250;The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The AmericanSociety of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.

C. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of MechanicalEngineers; 2011.

D. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999(Reapproved 2009).

E. ASTM A197/A197M - Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron; 2006.

F. ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2008.

G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire ProtectionAssociation; 2002.

H. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;current edition.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.


PAGE 2 OF 6

AMENTA EMMA ARCHITECTS CT DAS/DCS PROJECT NO.: BI-NN-665JULY 14. 2017

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data andratings.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor andwall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and supportdetails, and piping connections.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Conform to UL requirements.

C. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure ratingmarked on valve body.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBLITIES

A. All permits and fees.

B. Hoisting, rigging, transportation costs and installation of necessary appurtenances.

C. The Contractor shall visit the premises and note all pertinent facts and details includingconditions under which the work must be carried out. No allowance will be made forfailure to have done so.

D. Holes - Cutting and Patching: Cutting will be by core boring, patch will require bothwaterproofing and fireproofing.


A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.


PAGE 3 OF 6


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code.

2.2 ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10 or ASTM A 795 Schedule 40, galvanized.Hot-dip galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A123; average weight of coating shall benot less than 1.8 oz. per sq.ft. of surface (inside and outside).1. Standard weight Schedule 40 with grooved coupling in sizes 1-1/2" and 2".

Standard square cut grooves to coupling manufacturer's specifications.2. Standard weight Schedule 40 with threaded coupling and fittings in sizes 2" and

smaller.3. Light wall Schedule 10 with grooved couplings in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Rolled

grooves; no cut grooves or threading will be allowed on Schedule 10.

B. Standard Fittings:1. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4,

threaded fittings; ASTM A153 hot-dip galvanized.2. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A197; ASTM

A153 hot-dip galvanized.

C. Mechanical Grooved Couplings and Fittings:1. Fittings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 or malleable iron conforming to

ASTM A47; ASTM A153 hot-dip galvanized. Fitting shall be from samemanufacturer as couplings.

2. Couplings: Housing clamps to engage grooves and lock "C" shaped elastomericseal gaskest with bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 009 and 75 Coupings. GasketGrade "E" EPDM (type A) Flushseal. Heat-treated plated carbon steel trackheadbolts per ASTM A449 and ASTM A183.

3. Mechanical Tee: Mechanical coupling for outlet or branch, mating housing withelastomeric gasket over hole cut in pipe. Victaulic Styles 920 and 920N boltedbranch outlets. Housing of ASTM A536 ductile iron, ASTM A153 hot-dipgalvanized.Gasket Grade "E" EPDM. Heat-treated plated carbon steel trackheadbolts per ASTM A449 and ASTM A183.

2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 3/8 to 3 inch: Malleable iron, split ring extension hanger.


PAGE 4 OF 6


B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable ring, with knurledswivel. NFPA threaded rod sizes.

C. Hanger attachment to structural steel beam: Universal or wide mouth malleable ironC-type beam clamp with locknut, U.L. Listed. Secure with retaining strap hammeredtight to beam flange.

D. Hanger attachment to wood structure: Carbon steel or malleable iron side beam bracketwith tapped rod hole or carbon steel side beam bracket with punched hole and doublerod nuts. Attach with pair of 1-1/4" screws for pipe 2" and under and lag screw orthrough bolt and washers for pipe over 2".

E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steelclamp.

G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Up to and including 2 inches:1. Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon

seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle , threaded ends .

2.5 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valve:1. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordancewith NFPA.

B. Fire protection piping shall be seismically restrained per the current Building Code.


PAGE 5 OF 6


C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintaingradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and otherwork.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors.

G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment.

3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. Any sprinkler pipe over

1'-6" in length requires a hanger and the maximum overhang beyond the lasthanger shall not exceed 1'-6". Hangers are to be installed on both sides of groovedpipe couplings.

2. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers forpipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. End of line hangers forpendent sprinklers shall prevent upward movement of pipe.

3. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently ofconnected horizontal piping.

4. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, providemultiple or trapeze hangers.

3.4 PIPING SYSTEM

A. The piping system shall be arranged so that the entire system can be flushed and drainedthrough accessible low points. Slope piping towards main drain or provide auxiliarydrains for water in trapped sections of pipe.

B. Pipe and fittings for drain lines shall be galvanized.

C. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.

D. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations toachieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.

E. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components arecompatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joiningfittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.


PAGE 6 OF 6


F. Grooved fittings and couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations. Piping shall be cut and prepared per the coupling manufacturer'sstandards.

G. Threaded joints shall be made with teflon liquid joints compound applied to malethreads only.

H. Chrome-plated escutcheon shall be used on all exposed piping which penetrates eitherwalls or ceilings.

3.5 VALVES

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protectivecoatings prior to installation.

B. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. Alldrain piping shall be galvanized.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 211300 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Dry-pipe sprinkler system.

B. System design, installation, and certification.



B. Section 210500 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, andvalves.

C. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

1.4 SYSTEM DECRIPTION

A. Scope of Work: Revisions to the existing dry pipe automatic sprinkler system for therenovation of toilet rooms.

B. Modifications to existing sprinkler system include: Revisions to existing branch linesand branch line take-offs to reconfigure sprinkler coverage for revised architecturallayouts with new ceilings. Installation of new sprinklers with the fabrication of newdrops or modification of existing.

C. Furnish all necessary labor, materials, tool, equipment, appurtenances, instruments, etc.necessary to fully complete the Fire Protection System in accordance with the plans andspecifications and both local and state fire codes and NFPA #13.


A. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire ProtectionAssociation; 2002.

B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;current edition.

1.6 SUBMITTALS



PAGE 2 OF 5


B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, includingmanufacturers catalog information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details,weights, support requirements, and piping connections.

C. Shop Drawings:1. Sealed plans with detailed pipe layout indicating, hangers and supports, sprinklers,

components and accessories. Indicate sprinkler locations fully coordinated withfinal ceiling layouts.

2. Submit shop drawings and product data to authority having jurisdiction, RatingBureau and RZ Design Associates, Inc. for approval.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations ofpiping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicingrequirements, record drawings, Test Certificates, replacement part numbers andavailability, and location and numbers of service depot.


A. Conform to UL requirements.

B. Design by a NICET Level IV Certified Sprinkler Technician or under directsupervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work andlicensed in Connecticut.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this sectionwith minimum three years experience .

E. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBLITIES

A. The Fire Protection Contractor shall provide notification of outage and impairment tothe existing fire protection systems to general contractor, building owner and localauthorities.

B. Expenses for Fire Watches are the responsibility of the Fire Protection Contractor.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic; do not rely on scaling of drawings. Make such deviationsand offsets as necessary to meet the space requirements.


PAGE 3 OF 5


D. The contractor shall be responsible for water damage to the property of the owner, thework of other trades, and existing building systems during all phases of the work.

E. Coordination Drawings: The Fire Protection Contactor shall incorporate the shopdrawing sprinkler design into the master coordination drawings and work with the othertrade contractors to resolve conflicts.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra sprinklers of type and size matching those installed, in quantity requiredby referenced NFPA design and installation standard.

B. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type.

C. Provide red enamel finished steel sheetmetal storage cabinet in location designated.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRINKLERS

A. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type .1. Finish: Brass.2. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type, temperature rated for specific area hazard.

B. Dry Sprinklers: Recessed dry pendent type with matching push on escutcheon plate.1. Finish: Chrome plated.2. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type, quick response, temperature rated for specific area

hazard.

C. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The complete system shall be installed in accordance with Rules and Regulationspertaining to Light Hazard Occupancy (not to exceed 168 sq. ft. per head) and complywith the full requirements of the regulatory agencies. All piping modifications shallfollow the hydraulic design format of the original layout.

B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall have prepared by a NICET Level IV CertifiedSprinkler Technician or under a P.E. work installation drawings (Shop Drawings) andshall submit them to the engineer and Rating Bureau for approval.

C. Before commencing work, the Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate with othertrades, so that no possible interferences will occur. If due to inadequate coordination,extra work is entailed, the Fire Protection Contractor shall be held fully responsible.


PAGE 4 OF 5


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. Special care must be taken toinsure that piping above hung ceilings is run to maintain maximum headroom andclearance for access to equipment of other trades and to avoid conflict with electricalconduits, light fixtures, other piping, ductwork etc.

D. Pipe shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces. Place above finished ceilings orin chases, shafts, wall cavities or soffits.

E. Pipe size for drops to sprinkler heads located below suspended ceilings shall be 1 inchminimum.

3.3 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Sprinkler heads of the proper configuration and numbers are to be installed as requiredin accordance with regulations pertaining to Light Hazard Occupancies and meet thefull requirements of the NFPA, Local Fire Department, State Fire Marshal, FireInsurance Company, Rating Bureau and other agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, andsprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replacepainted sprinklers.

C. Install heads with Teflon liquid joint compound applied to male threads only.

D. Install guards on sprinklers in locations subject to mechanical damage.

E. Mount sprinkler head cabinet in the location directed by the Owner Representative.Stock with spare sprinkler heads of each type and or temperature rating and a sprinklerhead wrench per NFPA #13.

3.4 TESTING

A. Hydrostatically test entire system. Test system at no less than 200 psi for two (2) hoursafter completion, in accordance with NFPA #13.

B. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. Furnish to the insurance carrier,Contractor's Material and Test Certificate. Fill in and sign form as outlined in NFPA#13.


PAGE 5 OF 5


C. During and after completion, the entire installation shall be subject to inspection andtesting by the insurance carrier.

D. Notify authority having jurisdiction of testing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220510 PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS

PAGE 1 OF 19


PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of thisDivision and are to be considered a part of this Contract.

B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions arerepeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or tocall particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the GeneralConditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted ifnot repeated therein.

C. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/orequipment and/or materials as required under each Section of this Division.

D. The following information contains specifications of Work in connection with, and inaddition to, this Division:1. All drawings associated with the project.2. All specifications associated with the project.

E. Division of work responsibilities shall be as defined and directed by the Bidding Agentand/or the Bidding General Contractor.

1.3 INTENT

A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested andready for operation.

B. Furnish, deliver and install any apparatus, appliance, material or Work not shown onDrawings but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidentalaccessories necessary to make the Work complete and perfect in all respects and readyfor operation, even if not particularly specified, under their respective Section withoutadditional expense to the Owner.

C. Include in the work minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary forproper installation and operation, as though they were hereinafter shown or specified.

D. Provide Engineer written notice of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate orunsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities havingjurisdiction; and any necessary items of Work omitted. In the absence of such written


PAGE 2 OF 19


notice, it is mutually agreed that Work under each Section has included the cost of allrequired items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system withoutextra compensation.

E. The Work indicated is diagrammatic. The Architect and/or Engineer may require aspart of this Contract, the relocation of devices to reasonable distances from the generallocations shown.

F. Verbal clarifications of the Drawings or Specifications during the bid period are not tobe relied upon. Refer any questions or clarifications to the Engineer at least fiveWorking days prior to bidding to allow for issuance of an addendum. After the five-daydeadline, Bidder must make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder feels itnecessary.

1.4 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and workincluded in the Contract. (Do not scale the Drawings.) Consult the ArchitecturalDrawings and Details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are notdefinitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.

B. Closely follow Drawings in layout of Work; check Drawings of other Divisions toverify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. Wherespace conditions appear inadequate, Engineer shall be notified before proceeding withinstallations.

C. Engineer may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout asneeded to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of thework.

D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of theDocuments, include the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or highercost in the Contract price. The Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner inwhich the work shall be installed.

1.5 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Before submitting a Bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and shall become thoroughlyfamiliar with all conditions under which the work will be installed. Contractor will beheld responsible for any assumptions, omissions or errors made as a result of failure tobecome familiar with the site and the Contract Documents.

B. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. AllWork shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at thesite and check the correctness of same as related to the Work.


PAGE 3 OF 19


C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements andthose indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the Drawings andSpecifications, notify the Engineer do not proceed with that Work until instructionshave been received from the Engineer.

1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The Codes and Standards listed below apply to all Work. Where Codes or Standardsare mentioned in these Specifications, follow the latest edition or revision.

B. The current adopted editions of the following State or local Codes apply:1. 2003 International Building Code2. 2005 Connecticut Supplement with 2009 and 2011 Amendments3. 2003 International Existing Building Code4. 2003 International Mechanical Code5. 2003 International Plumbing Code6. Connecticut Gas Equipment and Piping Code7. 2005 National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)8. Admendments to the 2006 International Energy Conservation Code9. Admendments to the 2003 International Residential Code10. ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

C. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules andrecommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, therecommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and therequirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction.

D. Include in the Work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, testing,services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws,ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

1.7 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; pay all Government and State sales taxesand fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensionsin connection with the Work. File all necessary Drawings, prepare all Documents andobtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments havingjurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspections for Work and deliver a copyto the Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work.

1.8 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

A. General: This project is in a seismic zone per State and/or Local Codes and Ordinancesand all materials and equipment shall be installed, supported, and seismically restrained


PAGE 4 OF 19


accordingly. Verify current seismic requirements based on project location and withCode requirements.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualifiedto practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced inproviding engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are definedas those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraintsthat are similar to those required for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer,for the following:1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of

vibration isolation bases, design of seismic supports and selection of seismicrestraints for all equipment and materials.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages andattachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliarymotor slides and rails, and base weights.

3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints, supportsand snubbers.

4. Seismic Separation Assemblies: Refer to the Architectural and/or Structuraldrawings for locations of seismic joints.

D. Installation: Installation shall be carried out in strict accordance with the SeismicEngineer's submittal, current Code, accepted standards and the equipment and materialmanufacturers' recommendations.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Carry out all work in conjunction with other trades and give full cooperation in orderthat all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particularemphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing otherContractors, especially the General Contractor or Construction Manager, withinformation as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels,access doors, etc. required by other trades, and to allow for serviceable access toequipment.

B. Mechanical contractors' shall initiate coordination drawings and sections clearlyshowing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades, at noextra charge to the Owner. The Contractors' shall prepare coordination drawings at ascale no less than 1/4"=1'-0", showing the work of all trades, including but not limitedto, the following: proposed ductwork installation in detail, including ceiling heights,approved structural steel shop drawings, duct heights, access doors, light fixtures,registers and diffusers, sprinkler piping, electrical distribution conduits, wires, panelsand any other electrical work which may conflict with the sheet metal ducts or piping,waste and vent piping, water piping, storm piping, and rain leaders. Provide elevation


PAGE 5 OF 19


details showing connections and equipment layout and configuration based on approvedsubmittals. Each shall use a different color code. A coordination meeting of allContractors involved is then to be held and all possible conflicts are to be resolved. Alltrades shall sign acceptance of the drawings and then shall submit two (2) prints of eachdrawing to the Engineer for record.

C. Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrangeWork so as to avoid interference. In general, ductwork, heating piping, sprinkler pipingand drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. TheEngineer regarding the arrangement of Work, which cannot be agreed upon by theContractors, will make final decisions. Service of equipment will take precedence.

D. Where the Work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or willinterfere with Work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make asatisfactory adjustment.

E. If Work is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or so as to causeinterference with Work of other Sections, the Contractor causing the interference willmake necessary changes to correct the condition without extra charge to the Owner.

F. Initial contact and coordination has been conducted with utility entities for the purposeof the preparation of Bid Documents. The Contractor shall coordinate all final specificutility requirements.

1.10 ACCEPTANCES

A. The equipment, materials, Workmanship, design and arrangement of all Work installedare subject to the review of the Engineer.

B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, submit to the Engineer for review a listof manufacturers of equipment proposed for the Work. The intent to use the exactmakes specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting sucha list.

C. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipmentspecified, notify the Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of the awarding of theContract. In such instances, deviations may be made pending acceptance by theEngineer or the Owner's representative.

D. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured articleis specified by reference to the catalog or model number of a manufacturer, theSpecifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over thebasic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, verify theduty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where theContractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent.


PAGE 6 OF 19


E. If material or equipment is installed before shop drawing review, liability for itsremoval and replacement is assumed by the Contractor, at no extra charge to the Owner,if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent ofthe Drawings and Specifications.

F. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject Work in progressshall not be interpreted as acceptance of Work not in conformance with the Drawingsand/or Specifications. Correct Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/orSpecifications whenever non-conformance is discovered.

1.11 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (substitute or provide an equivalent) from theequipment or materials as hereinafter specified, he shall do so by making a request inwriting within 60 days from the Award of Contract. The Contractor shall state in hisrequest whether it is a substitution or an equivalent to that specified, and the amount ofcredit involved. A copy of said request shall be included in the Base Bid withmanufacturer's equipment cuts.1. The Base Product Specification shall be based on using the materials and

equipment as specified and scheduled with no exceptions. EquipmentManufacturers Scheduled on Drawings are considered Base Product Specificationand any other acceptable manufacturers listed in the specifications is considered anequivalent manufacturer to the Base Product Specification. Unlisted manufacturersare considered a substitution and equipment deviation and subject to therequirements for equipment substitution and deviation. When any alternatemanufacturer does not qualify acceptable, as determined by the Engineer, providethe Base Bid manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner.

2. Where an equivalent manufacturer is listed in the specifications, it may or may notindicate that there is an equal product available. Any products must meet allcriteria of the Base Product Specification as determined by the Engineer.

B. Substitutions and Equipment Deviations will not be considered if they have a directbearing on the changing or revising of Contract Documents or if it involves otherContractor's scope of work or thier equipment. Coordination with all trades is requiredand must be acceptable to all other involved Contractors.

C. Substitutions may be considered for one of the following:1. Substitution for Cause: Changes proposed by the Contractor that are required due

to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatorychanges, or unavailability of warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by the Contractor or Owner thatare not required in order to meet other Project requirements, but may offeradvantage to either the Owner or Contractor.


PAGE 7 OF 19


D. In these Specifications and on the accompanying Drawings, one or more makes ofmaterials, apparatus or appliances may have been specified for use in this installation. This has been done for convenience in fixing the standard of workmanship, finish anddesign required for installation. In the event that only one (1) manufacturer of a productis specified and it is found that the manufacturer has discontinued the product, theContractor shall use an acceptable equivalent product that meets the requirements of anequivalent product, as noted below, and has all the features of the originally specifiedproduct. The details of workmanship, finish and design, and the guaranteedperformance of any material, apparatus or appliance which the Contractor desires todeviate for those mentioned herein shall also conform to these standards.

E. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-classproduct made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for the Engineer's review.

F. Where two or more names are given as equivalents, the Contractor must use thespecified item or one of the named equivalents. Where one name only is used and isfollowed by the words "or acceptable equivalent", the Contractor must use the itemnamed or he may apply for an equipment deviation through the prescribed manner inaccordance with this Specification.

G. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as an "accepted equivalent" shallmeet the following requirements:1. The equivalent shall have the same construction features such as, but not limited

to:2. Material thickness, gauge, weight, density, etc.3. Welded, riveted, bolted, etc., construction4. Finish, undercoatings, corrosion protection5. The equivalent shall perform with the same or better operating efficiency.6. The equivalent shall have equal or greater reserve capacity.7. The equivalent shall be locally represented by the manufacturer for service, parts

and technical information.8. The equivalent shall bear the same labels of performance certification as is

applicable to the specified item, such as AMCA or ARI labels.

H. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified ordetailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions,foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical orarchitectural layout, all such redesign and all new drawings and detailing requiredtherefore shall be prepared by the Designers of Record at the expense of the Contractorand at no additional cost to the Owner.

I. Where such accepted deviation or substitution requires a different quantity andarrangement of piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit andequipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall, with


PAGE 8 OF 19


the acceptance by the Engineer, furnish and install any such additional equipmentrequired by the system at no additional cost to the Owner, including any costs added toother trades due to the substitution.

J. The Engineer shall determine if an "accepted equivalent" to a manufacturer listed in theSpecifications is considered acceptable.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal information.

B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment andmaterial specified in each section and coordinated ductwork layouts. No material orequipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has receivedshop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properlyreviewed.

C. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before anymaterial or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review copies ofall shop drawings to be incorporated in the Contract. Refer to the General Conditionsand Supplementary General Conditions for the quantity of copies required forsubmission. Where quantities are not specified, provide seven (9) copies for review.

D. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for allsystems, materials, equipment and/or devices. Shop drawings shall includemanufacturers' names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams and other such descriptive dataas may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in eachcategory (example: all fixtures) of all shop drawings, catalog cuts, material lists, etc.,shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to apartial shop drawing submittal. Partial submissions shall be rejected.

E. Equipment shop drawings shall contain full range performance curves, graphs, tables orother pertinent data which clearly indicates operational range of a given unit size. Computer generated/plotted curves, based solely on design performance, will not beaccepted.

F. All specific options and/or alternatives shall be clearly indicated. Failure to do so shallbe grounds for rejection.

G. Submittals shall be marked with the trade involved, i.e., HVAC, plumbing, fireprotection, etc. and the specific associated specification section.

H. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a coversheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or materialbeing submitted.


PAGE 9 OF 19


I. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for review shall not entitle theContractor to an extension of Contract time. Contractor must allow for a one weekreview at the Engineer's office plus normal delivery time to the G.C., Architect,Engineer, and return to the Architect, and G.C. No claim for extension by reason ofsuch default will be allowed, nor shall the Contractor be entitled to purchase, furnishand/or install equipment which has not been reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractorshall incur all costs associated with delay of construction due to equipment and/ormaterials arriving late due to late or improper shop drawing submittal.

J. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation workand for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shopdetails to other trades as required.

K. Acceptance rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee ofmeasurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does notindicate that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any wayrelieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material orperforming work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verifyavailable space prior to submitting shop drawings.

L. Acceptance of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity nor relieve Contractor of hisresponsibility to comply with intent of Drawings and Specifications.

M. Acceptance of shop drawings is final and no further changes will be allowed withoutthe written consent of the Engineer.

N. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shallhave those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished.

O. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer at least five (5) working days prior toBidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. After the five (5) day deadline, Biddershall make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder deems if necessary.

P. Contractor shall make any corrections required by Engineer and shall resubmit requirednumber of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples until accepted. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings torevisions other than corrections requested by Engineer on previous submissions. Engineer shall review no more than one resubmittal of any shop drawing or sample atOwner's expense. The fees for review of additional resubmittals shall be paid by theContractor at the Engineer's standard rates.


PAGE 10 OF 19


1.13 CHANGES IN WORK

A. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and theArchitect, issued after Contracts have been awarded, authorizing a change in the workor an adjustment in the Contract sum or the Contract time. A Change Order signed bythe Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in theContract sum or the Contract time.

B. All changes in the work shall follow the recommendations of the AIA "GeneralConditions of the Contract for Construction", Article 12.

1.14 MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION

A. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer'snameplate giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial and modelnumber, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. Nameplate data shall not be obstructed. The nameplate of a Contractor or distributorwill not be acceptable.

B. All material and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shallbear the label of or be listed by UL, or other accredited authoritative agencies or testingorganizations approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain at the job site a record set of Project Drawings on which any changes inlocation or routing of all equipment, materials and access panels shall be recorded.

B. At the end of construction, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a complete setof As-Built Drawings, including all updated coordination drawings, ductwork andpiping plans. As-Builts shall be drawn on the latest version of Autocad or compatiblesoftware, approved in writing, prior to submittal. The Owner shall be provided with a"CD Rom" disk and one set of reproducible mylar sepias.

1.16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as otherwise specificallyindicated, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected,connected and finished in every detail and be so selected and arranged as to fit properlyinto the building spaces. Where no specific type or quality of material is given, afirst-class standard article as accepted by industry standards shall be furnished.

B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall beconstantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled workmen,


PAGE 11 OF 19


fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect,connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system.

C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, allequipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and inaccordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes theperformance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.

D. All labor for installation of mechanical systems shall be performed by experienced,skilled tradesmen under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All workshall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat,workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in hisopinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. TheContractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to theOwner.

E. Year-2000 Compliant: All digitally controlled/monitored equipment and systems shallbe certified "Year 2000 Compliant". Computer hardware and software shall be capableof accurately processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between thetwentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations. All programcodes shall be "non-date sensitive" codes that will not cause an automatic programmalfunction, stop command, miscalculation or similar function stopping continued andproper operation upon a sequence of numbers that occur by date.

1.17 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all otherSections from damage by work or workmen and shall include making good all damagethus caused.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has beenaccepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully storematerial and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close openends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry offoreign material.

C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting,setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling andprotecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of theequipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged.

D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather,vehicles, dirt and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical orabsorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.


PAGE 12 OF 19


1.18 BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall furnish all necessary supports,rails, framing, bases and piers required for all equipment furnished under this Division.

B. Unless otherwise indicated in individual trade Sections, pumps, fans, air handlers,boilers, chillers, tanks, compressors and other rotating machinery shall be mounted on aminimum of six (6") inch high concrete pads which shall be furnished and installed perDivision 3. All pads shall be extended six (6") inches beyond machine base in alldirections with top edge chamfered. Shop drawings of all foundations and pads shall besubmitted to the Engineer for review before they are constructed. The MechanicalContractor shall field coordinate all required dimensional and necessary loadinginformation.

C. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers where mounted on thefloor shall be of the same finish quality as the adjacent and surrounding flooringmaterial.

D. Unless otherwise shown, all equipment shall be securely attached to the buildingstructure in an acceptable manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature;any attachments that are insufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be replaced asdirected without extra cost to the Owner.

E. All equipment supports shall be designed and constructed such that the equipment willbe capable of resisting both vertical and horizontal movement. The equipment shall bepositively anchored to the bases or supports to resist vertical movement. Theequipment and its supports shall be provided with suitable restraints to resist horizontalmovement from any direction as dictated by applicable seismic Codes.

1.19 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. The Contractor shall provide, set in place and be held responsible for the location of allsleeves, inserts and anchor bolts required for the work. In the event that failure to do sorequires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done at the Contractor'sexpense.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish cast-in-place steel sleeves, inserts andanchors in sufficient time to be installed during initial concrete pours. Where jobschedules make this impossible, coordinate and obtain acceptance from the StructuralEngineer for alternate installation methods.

C. All pipes and conduits passing through floors, walls or partitions shall be provided withsleeves having an inside diameter one (1") inch larger than the outside diameter of thepipe, conduit or insulation enclosing the pipe.


PAGE 13 OF 19


D. Piping insulation shall run continuous through sleeve.

E. Penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings and all floors (except slab on grade) inwhich piping or ducts pass shall be filled solidly with acceptable fire-stopping material.Sleeves shall be steel or a UL / FM listed and approved assembly.

F. When ducts, piping or conduit penetrate the floor of a mechanical room located abovean occupied space, such penetrations shall be made completely watertight, such that aliquid leak shall not pass through the penetration.

1.20 FIRE-STOPS AND SEALS

A. Refer to Division 7 Specification for additional and more specific information.

B. Fire-stopping systems shall be submitted as shop drawing.

C. Penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceiling or floors shall be sealed with a ULapproved fire-stop fitting classified for an hourly rating equivalent to the fire rating ofthe wall, ceiling or floor.

D. Thruwall and floor seals shall be used to provide a positive means of sealing pipes orducts which pass through the concrete foundation of a structure below grade or belowground water level. Seals shall also be used at entry points through concrete walls orfloors which must be sealed.

1.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching shall be done per Division 1 requirements. The Contractorshall furnish sketches showing the location and sizes of all openings, chases, etc.,required for the installation of work.

B. Work under this Division shall include furnishing, locating and setting inserts and/orsleeves required before the floors and walls are built or be responsible for cutting,drilling or chopping where sleeves and inserts were not installed or correctly located. The Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.

C. Exercise extreme caution when core drilling or punching openings in concrete floorslabs in order to avoid cutting or damaging structural members. No structural membersor structural slabs/floors shall be cut without the written acceptance of the StructuralEngineer and all such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by him.

D. SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING1. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services

necessary for erection and delivery into the premises any equipment and apparatus


PAGE 14 OF 19


furnished under this Division. Remove same from premises when no longerrequired.

1.22 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation and backfilling shall be done per Division 2 of the Specifications.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate sizes, depths, fill and beddingrequirements and any other excavation work required under this Division per code andlocal utility requirements.

1.23 WATERPROOFING

A. Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete and floors in wetareas, the method of installation shall be reviewed by the Engineer before work is done. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required tomake openings absolutely watertight.

1.24 ACCESSIBILITY AND ACCESS PANELS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases,the adequate thickness of partitions, and the adequate clearance in double partitions andhung ceilings for the proper installation of the work.

B. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessiblepositions. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to: motors, controllers, coil,valves, switchgear, drain points, etc. Access doors shall be furnished if required forbetter accessibility. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to allow betteraccessibility, but changes of magnitude or which involve extra cost shall not be madewithout the acceptance of the Engineer.

C. Access doors in walls, ceilings, floors, etc., shall be field coordinated. It is theresponsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and provide information regarding thesizes and quantities of access doors required for his work. The Contractor shall arrangehis work in such a manner as to minimize the quantity of access doors required, such asgrouping shutoff valves in the same area. Where possible, locate valves in alreadyaccessible areas, such as lay-in ceilings, etc.

D. On a clean set of prints, the Contractor shall mark in red pencil the location of eachrequired access door, including its size and fire rating (if any), and shall submit the printto the Architect for review before access doors are purchased or installed.

E. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor shall physically demonstrate that allequipment and devices installed have been located and/or provided with adequateaccess panels for repair, maintenance and/or operation. Any equipment not sofurnished shall be relocated or provided with additional access panels by the installing


PAGE 15 OF 19


Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All access panel or door locations shallbe indicated on Owner's final as-built record drawings.

F. Permanent ladders for access to equipment when shown on Plans shall be furnished andinstalled. Coordinate exact requirements in field.

1.25 TEMPORARY OPENINGS

A. The Contractor shall ascertain from an examination of the Drawings whether anyspecial temporary openings in the building will be required for the admission ofapparatus provided under this Division and shall coordinate the requirementsaccordingly. In the event of failure of the Contractor to give sufficient notice in time toarrange for these openings during construction, the Contractor shall assume all costs ofproviding such openings thereafter.

1.26 ESCUTCHEONS

A. The Contractor shall provide escutcheons on pipes wherever they pass through floors,ceilings, walls or partitions in finished visible locations.

1.27 PAINTING

A. All finish painting in completed areas shall be performed per other divisions of theSpecifications.

B. All materials shipped to the job site under this Division, such as piping, fittings,plumbing fixtures, valves,etc., shall have standard manufacturer's finish, unlessotherwise specified by Architect.

1.28 PIPE EXPANSION

A. All pipe connections shall be installed to allow for freedom of movement of the pipingduring expansion and contraction without springing. Provide engineered design, layout,details and fabrication, submitted with registered professional engineer sign and seal, ofswing joints, expansion loops and expansion joints with proper anchors and guides. Payparticular attention to plastic piping with high coefficients of expansion.

B. Consideration of required seismic lateral restraints shall be given when anchoringpiping and making provision for expansion.

1.29 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified, all wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 16Specifications.

B. All motor controllers not factory mounted on mechanical equipment shall be furnished,mounted, and installed by the Division 16 contractor, and shall be coordinated with this


PAGE 16 OF 19


contractor. Provide properly sized overload heaters and all required accessories with allmotor controllers. See Division 16 Motor Controllers for motor controllerrequirements.

C. All power wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 16 complete from powersource to motor or equipment junction box including power wiring through the motorcontroller and proper means of disconnect per NEC and Division 16. The Division 16Contractor shall provide all disconnects, unless noted otherwise.

1.30 QUIET OPERATION

A. Equipment and material used in the various systems described herein shall not producea sound level greater than 55 decibels in the area served. If noise level is deemedobjectionable by the Owner/Engineer, the Contractor shall test and record sound levelsin the presence of the Owner/Engineer. The sound level shall be observed on the "A"weighting network of a sound level or sound survey meter. The ASHRAE "Guide andData Book" provides a means to determine sound level of mechanical equipment whenthe total of background plus equipment sound levels exceeds the minimum acceptableequipment sound level.

B. If objectionable noises or vibrations of any magnitude are produced and transmitted tooccupied portions of the building by apparatus, piping, ducts or other parts of themechanical work, the Contractor shall make such changes or additions as necessarywithout extra cost to the Owner.

1.31 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skilled labor to assure the proper operationand to provide all required current and preventative maintenance for all equipment andcontrols provided under this Division until final acceptance of the building by theOwner. The Contractor shall not assume acceptance of the building by the Owner untilhe receives written notification.

B. The Contractor shall receive calls for any and all problems experienced in the operationof the equipment provided under this Division and he shall take steps to immediatelycorrect any deficiencies that may exist.

C. The Contractor shall provide a check list and shall put a copy of it in the boiler or mainmechanical room. The check list shall itemize each piece of equipment furnished underhis Section.

D. The Contractor shall certify on this check list that he has examined each piece ofequipment and that, in his opinion, it is operating as intended by the manufacturer, ithas been properly lubricated, and that all necessary current and preventativemaintenance has been performed as recommended by the manufacturer and by good andaccepted practice.


PAGE 17 OF 19


E. The Contractor shall check all controls in the building to ascertain that they arefunctioning as designed. This shall apply to all thermostats, aquastats, humidistats,freezestats and firestats, etc. This portion of the work shall be performed by theContractor who installed the controls.

F. During construction, the Contractor shall ensure that all filters are in place on allequipment. If the equipment is operated during construction (see restrictions section ofthis specification), strict attention shall be paid to maintaining clean and effective filtersand cleaning ductwork and equipment. Filters shall be new and/or clean when thesystem testing and balancing takes place. The Contractor shall bear the cost of allfilters and media during construction until final acceptance by the Owner. Thisrequirement shall apply equally to fluid filters and strainers.

G. Where normal preventative maintenance for any piece of equipment requires specialtools, the Contractor shall furnish the appropriate tools for that piece of equipment (i.e.,special filter removal hooks, valve wrenches, etc.).

1.32 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused inaccordance with manufacturer's reccommended maintenance procedures.

1.33 LUBRICATION

A. All equipment installed under this Contract having moving parts and requiringlubrication shall be properly lubricated according to manufacturer's recommendationsprior to testing and operation. Any such equipment discovered to have been operatedbefore lubrication by the Contractor is subject to rejection and replacement at noadditional cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install, as appropriate on all equipment requiringlubrication, Zerk pressure gun grease fittings or sight gravity-feed oilers equipped withshutoff and needle valve adjustment.1. Units furnished with sealed bearings and lifetime lubrication are exempted.2. All fittings and oilers are to be fully accessible for lubrication with equipment

which does not require special adapters.3. Where fittings would be otherwise inaccessible, furnish and install extended grease

lines.

1.34 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the jobsite clean, safe and neatthroughout the duration of construction. The Contractor shall clean up his own debrisdaily and shall coordinate removal of rubbish and debris with the GeneralContractor/Construction Manager.


PAGE 18 OF 19


B. No debris, construction materials, cigarette butts, coffee cups, etc., shall be left abovesuspended ceilings.

C. Terminal equipment and plumbing fixtures shall cleaned at substantial completion.

D. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after beingplaced in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnectedwherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in thecourse of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system isreconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. During the course of construction, all pipes shall be capped in an acceptable manner toinsure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter.

F. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from thepremises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil orgrease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areasleft clean.

1.35 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessaryskilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specifiedunder each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fullyinstruct the Owner or the Owner's representative in the operation, adjustment andmaintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least 72 hoursnotice to the Owner, Engineer, and Commissioning Agent in advance of this period.1. Prior to the instruction period, the contractor shall have approved Owner's Manuals

on site for aiding in the instructions.

B. The Contractor shall formally submit for delivery to the Engineer a minimum of three(3) Owner's Manuals, to be complete bound sets of typewritten or blueprintedinstructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in thisDivision. All instructions shall be submitted in draft for review prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating andmaintenance instruction.

C. The Contractor, in the above-mentioned instructions, shall include the maintenanceschedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division.

D. The appropriate Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routinemaintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assureaccessibility to all devices.


PAGE 19 OF 19


E. An authorized manufacturer's representative shall attest in writing that the equipmenthas been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. These letters willbe bound into the operating and maintenance books.

F. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related tooperating instructions.

1.36 ADJUSTING AND TESTING

A. Prior to factory star-up procedures, the Contractor shall perform prefunctional checksand procedures to ensure that the equipment is installed properly and are operational.1. The prefunctional checklists and procedures are to be provided by the

Commisioning Agent. These forms must be filled out and approved before finalstart-up and adjustments are made by the factory representative.

B. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put infinal adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer andthe Commissioning Agent that they are in proper adjustment, the controls operate asdescribed in the sequence of operation and all systems are in satisfactory, permanentoperating condition.

1.37 GUARANTEES

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, material and workmanship under theseSpecifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of finalacceptance by Owner, unless otherwise noted.

B. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materialsor workmanship shall be corrected or replaced immediately by the Contractor withoutexpense to the Owner. Such repairs or replacements shall be made to the Engineer'ssatisfaction.

1.38 RESTRICTIONS

A. Piping shall not be run in any concrete floor slab. Written approval from the StructuralEngineer may be obtained only after submission and approval of a layout shop drawing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220511 PLUMBING DEMOLITION

PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Plumbing demolition.1. Existing plumbing fixtures, water piping, sanitary/waste piping, storm piping as

indicated on the plans, decribed in notes or implied by nature of the work.a. All plumbing water piping removed from active lines to remain shall be

capped watertight.b. All sanitary branch piping removed from active systems to remain shall either

have a new cleanout provided at termination or the branch line shall beremoved to within 24" of the active main and capped.

c. Removal shall be complete to behind finished surfaces.

B. Demolition shall include the removal of all hangers and supports, anchors and otheritems not required for the new work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individualsections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions in the field. Note which items are to remain and which itemsare to be removed as indicated on drawings.

B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing recorddocuments.

D. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation, i.e. asbestos. Where asbestos materials are deemed to be part of the equipment, the abatementcontractor shall be responsible for demolition and proper removal and disposal ofequipment.

E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.


PAGE 2 OF 3


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.

B. Provide temporary piping and connections to maintain existing systems in serviceduring construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or piping,coordinate shut-down time with owner.

C. Existing Domestic Cold Water System: Maintain existing systems in service. Disablesystems only to make switchovers and/or connections. Minimize outage duration.1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely

disabling system.

D. Existing Sanitary System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only tomake switchovers and/or connections. Minimize outage duration.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING PLUMBING WORK

A. All demolition work shall be scheduled and coordinated in order to accommodateconstruction phasing schedule.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply, provide isolation valve and cap atmains.

D. Contractor shall make safe all work associated with this division.

E. Disconnect and remove plumbing piping and fittings serving equipment that has beenremoved .

F. Disconnect and remove existing equipment, piping and fittings as indicated on thedrawings.

3.4 REUSE OF EXISTING PLUMBING PIPING

A. Reuse of existing plumbing water, waste, sanitary, or storm piping as shown, noted orimplied on the plans or in the specifictions shall be allowed after an extensiveinvestigation to determine condition.

B. Water piping1. Check for external condition of the piping including but not limited to damage,

corrosion, scale deposits or other evidence of leakage.2. Before any new pipe connections are made, provide an air test of 150 psi for a

minimum of four (4) hours.


PAGE 3 OF 3


3. Provide further investigation of existing piping if there is a drop in pressure duringthe four hour time period.

C. Below slab or concealed waste, sanitary, and storm piping1. Piping shall be augered or "snaked out" as a first step in determining suitability for

reuse.2. For all existing piping size 3" and larger to remain for reuse, provide a remote

control camera survey with all inspected piping noted for any breaks, build-up,debris, dips or general deterioration.

3. Provide a permanent record of camera recordings and color coded plan mark-upsindicating where there may be cause for concern.

D. For all piping to be reused, when new work connections are completed, refer to otherspecification sections for testing of the systems.



END OF SECTION

SECTION 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 2


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.


A. EJMA (STDS) - EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; NinthEdition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,

face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot andper assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and totalnumber of wires in braid.

2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, andmaximum expansion compensation.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions, specialprocedures, and external controls.

E. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connectors,expansion joints, anchors, and guides.

F. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.


A. Conform to UL requirements.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Alignment Guides:

SECTION 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PAGE 2 OF 2


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association)Standards.

C. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.

D. Substitute grooved piping for vibration isolated equipment instead of flexibleconnectors. Grooved piping need not be anchored.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 2


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.

B. Thermometers and thermometer wells.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and locationfor manufactured components.


A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for requiredrough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometers shall be as equal to "WIKA" Type T19010302008XWI.

B. Thermometer: ASTM E 1, 360 degree adjustable angle with locking nut, blue liquidfilled (non- mercury), V-Shaped polyester Case with glass window.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipessmaller than 2-1/2 inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allowclearance from insulation.

C. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largestappropriate scale.

D. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normaloperating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

SECTION 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PAGE 2 OF 2


E. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrateto zero.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220548 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Equipment support bases.

B. Vibration isolators.

C. Vibration isolators.

D. Seismic restraints.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing vibration isolation equipmentand/or seismic restraints for plumbing equipment and piping systems furnished underthis Division.

B. Vibration isolators shall be provided for motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP, includingconnected piping.

C. Equipment and piping systems shall be seismically restrained as required by Section1621 of the currently applicable IBC building code and the 2005 ConnecticutSupplement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special proceduresand setting dimensions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All vibration isolation equipment shall be from the same manufacturer to assure singleresponsibility and shall be Mason Industries, or equal by Peabody Noise Control orVibration Mounting and Control

B. Seismic restraints shall be as manufactured by Mason Industries, or equal by B-Line orTolco.


A. General:


PAGE 2 OF 4


1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniformdeflection and stability requirements under all operating loads.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, appliances, and equipment and perform all operationsnecessary for the complete execution of the installation of noise and vibration isolationdevices and seismic restraints specified in this section.

B. All piping to be isolated according to this section of the specification shall freely passthrough walls and floors with out rigid connections. penetration points shall be sleevedor otherwise formed to allow passage of piping, and maintain a minimum of 3/4" and maximum of 1-1/4" clearance around the outside surfaces. This clearance space shall betightly packed with 1.50 PCF fiberglass, and caulked airtight, after installation of pipingand ductwork.

C. The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection ofsprings to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections, for all isolators, basedon the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.

D. Installation of all vibration isolation material specified herein shall be accomplishedfollowing the manufacturer's writen instructions.

E. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices,the seismic Engineer of record shall visit the site and inspect the installation. Uponcompletion of inspection, the engineer shall provide a stamped letter of compliancecertifying that all components have been installed and adjusted properly.

3.2 PIPING

A. All piping in the building which is connected to vibration isolated equipment shall benoise isolated at connections to the building structure per the Schedule at the end ofthis section.

B. Horizontal Piping: Where required piping shall incorporate seismic restaint cables at allchanges of direction and at interval not to exceed those in the table below.

C. Vertical Piping: Riser clamps shall be anchored at each floor to provide seismicrestraint.

D. Maximum Laterial Restraint spacing for Piping:


PAGE 3 OF 4


SIZE THREADED & MECH JOINEDCOPPERCASTPVC (NOMINAL) FLANGED STEEL (GROOVED) STEEL IRONABS

2" & Under24'16' 20' 10' 8'

2.5" - 6"36'24' 20' 10' 8'

8" to 20"48'32' 30' 10' 8'

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install neoprene pad isolators in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Hangers shall be suspended from and restrainted by subtantial structural members, notthe slab diaphragm, unless specifically approved by the Arhitect.

C. Isolators shall be installed with the hanger box as close to the structure as possible.Hanger rods shall be aligned so as to clear the hanger box.

D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operatingconditions.1. The installation or use of vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position

of equipment or piping that will result in stresses in the pipe connections ormisalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, equipment andpiping shall be maintained in a rigid position during installation. The load shall notbe transferred to the isolator until the installation is complete and under fulloperational load.

E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantiallydifferent from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to finalheight. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

F. Provide seismic snubbers for all equipment and piping mounted on isolators. Snubequipment designated for post-disaster use to 0.05 inch maximum clearance. Othersnubbers shall have clearance between 0.15 inch and 0.25 inch.

G. Seismic restraints shall be installed after equipment is in operating position to assuredesign clearances are maintained.

H. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators orresilient hangers for scheduled distance.1. Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support.2. 5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support.


PAGE 4 OF 4



A. The Vibration and Seismic manufacturer shall inspect isolated equipment afterinstallation and submit report. Include static deflections.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL



A. Tags.

B. Pipe Markers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanicalidentification.

C. Chart and Schedule: Submit (2) valve charts and schedules, including valve tagnumber, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. Chartsand schedules shall be mounted within mechanical areas served, and shall also bepermanently bound and submitted with O&M manuals and 'As-Built' documents.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.

B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.

C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

2.2 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: minimum 19 gauge Brass with stamped black filled letters; tag sizeminimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. Provide brass bead chain withlocking link.

B. Valve Chart & Schedules: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Comply with ASME A13.1.


PAGE 2 OF 3


B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, snap-on vinyl, preformed to fitaround pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrowand identification of fluid being conveyed.

C. Plastic Tape: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing.Provide same color tape as pipe markers being used.

D. Underground Pipe Markers: Colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, withaluminum backing, minimum 6 inches wide by 5 mil thick, manufactured for directburial service.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 099000 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clearlacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099000.

D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 12 to 16 inches below finished grade, directlyabove buried pipe.

F. Identify pumps, water heaters, tanks, filters, and water treatment devices with plasticnameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plasticnameplates.

H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.


PAGE 3 OF 3


I. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags onpiping 1/2" and smaller outside diameter. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed15 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, ateach side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.


A. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;2007.

B. ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting ThermalInsulating and Finishing Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).

C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Propertiesby Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.

D. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible ElastomericCellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2013.

E. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.

F. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid ThermalInsulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.

G. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact withAustenitic Stainless Steel; 2008.

H. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge orExpanded Rubber; 2007.

I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2013a.

J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission ofMaterials; 2012.

K. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

L. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



PAGE 2 OF 5


B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials andthickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptableworkmanship and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of workspecified in this section with minimum three years of experience.


A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,and thickness.


A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

B. MANUFACTURERS:1. Johns Manville Corporation2. Knauf Fiber Glass3. CertainTeed Corporation

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturers:1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation; : www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible.1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.


PAGE 3 OF 5


2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminizedfilm; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of0.02 perm-inches.

D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:1. Compatible with insulation.

F. Insulating Cement/Mastic:1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Manufacturer:1. Armacell LLC; ______: www.armacell.us.2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying withASTM C534/C534M Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

2.4 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic.1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.d. Thickness: 10 mil.e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

3. Covering Adhesive Mastic:a. Compatible with insulation.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C534/C534M



















SECTION 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PAGE 4 OF 5


B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) formed aluminum sheet with factoryapplied polyethyllene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface.1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.2. Finish: Smooth.3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective

liner.5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel on 8 inch

centers.PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire systemincluding fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies,roof drain bodies, and expansion joints.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with

self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material andthickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive orPVC fitting covers.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 90 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions atequipment.

G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or

field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips withpressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.







































SECTION 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PAGE 5 OF 5


2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness asadjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

H. Inserts and Shields:1. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.2. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.3. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.4. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section078400.

J. All piping exposed in finished spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.

K. Install PVC protective jackets on all piping in mechanical and utility, service, or storagerooms less than 10'-0" Above Finished Floor.

L. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heattracer.

END OF SECTION

























SECTION 221005 PLUMBING PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.1. Sanitary sewer.2. Domestic water.

1.2 SUBMITTALS



A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completingsections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.


A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (ifused), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe andfittings.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield

assemblies.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.


PAGE 2 OF 4


2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.1. Fittings: Cast iron.2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield

assemblies.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.1. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.32, sovent.2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.

2.4 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and

bronze.2. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372

approved or certified, utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.a. Manufacturers:

1) Viega LLC; Model ______: www.viega.com.


A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select

appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze

hangers.3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.

2.6 BALL VALVESPART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.



PAGE 3 OF 4


3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel andperpendicular to walls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use ofspace.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220719.

G. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for

pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple or trapeze hangers.8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 099000. Hangers

and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces arenot considered exposed.

10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; referto Section 220548.

11. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

3.4 APPLICATION

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of locationindicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot slope.


PAGE 4 OF 4


B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at lowpoints.

3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 331300.

B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughoutsystem to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.

D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual atminimum 15 percent of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0mg/L.

H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets andfrom water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Water closets.

B. Lavatories.

C. Service sinks.

D. Showers.

E. Eye and face wash fountains.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions,utility sizes, trim, and finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSPART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

2.2 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, floor mounted, siphon jet flushaction, china bolt caps.1. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud).2. Flush Operation: Manual, oscillating handle.3. Handle Height: 44 inches or less.4. Color: White.

B. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stopsand accessories.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NSF%2061










SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES PAGE 2 OF 4


1. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop.2. Manufacturers:

a. Sloan Valve Company; Model ______: www.sloanvalve.com.

C. Seats:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bemis Manufacturing Company; Model ______: www.bemismfg.com.

2.3 LAVATORIES

A. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hunglavatory, ___ by ___ inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, rectangular basin withsplash lip, front overflow, and soap depression.

B. Supply Faucet Manufacturers:1. Sloan Valve Compnay.

C. Sensor Operated Faucet: Cast brass, chrome plated, deck mounted with sensor locatedon neck of spout.1. Spout Style: Standard.2. Mixing Valve: None, single line for tempered water.3. Water Supply: 3/8 inch compression connections.4. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 0.5 GPM, laminar flow device. 5. Finish: Polished chrome.

D. Accessories:1. Chrome plated 17 gage, 0.0538 inch brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with

escutcheon.2. Carrier:

2.4 BATHTUBS AND SHOWERS

2.5 SHOWERS

A. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower supply with indexed handles, bent showerarm with adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum 2.5 gallons per minuteflow, and escutcheon.

B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower supply with pressure balanced mixingvalves, integral service stops, bent shower arm with adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum flow, and escutcheon.

C. Shower Head:








































2.6 SERVICE SINKS

A. Service Sink Manufacturers:

B. Bowl: 36 by 24 by 10 inch high white molded stone, floor mounted, with one inchwide shoulders, vinyl bumper guard, stainless steel strainer.

C. Accessories:1. 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.2. Hose clamp hanger.3. Mop hanger.

2.7 EMERGENCY EYE AND FACE WASHPART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.

B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation ofcounter top lavatories and sinks.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated infixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install components level and plumb.

B. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 079005,color to match fixture.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openingsbefore rough-in and installation.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,or overflow.




































3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION












SECTION 230500 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

PAGE 1 OF 20


PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions are a part of thisDivision and are to be considered a part of this Contract.

B. Where items of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions arerepeated in other Sections of the Specifications, it is merely intended to qualify or tocall particular attention to them. It is not intended that any other parts of the GeneralConditions and Supplementary General Conditions shall be assumed to be omitted ifnot repeated therein.

C. This Section applies equally and specifically to all Contractors supplying labor and/orequipment and/or materials as required under each Section of this Division.

D. The following information contains specifications of Work in connection with, and inaddition to, this Division:1. All drawings associated with the project.2. All specifications associated with the project.

E. Division of work responsibilities shall be as defined and directed by the Bidding Agentand/or the Bidding General Contractor.

1.3 INTENT

A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested andready for operation.

B. Furnish, deliver and install any apparatus, appliance, material or Work not shown onDrawings but mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidentalaccessories necessary to make the Work complete and perfect in all respects and readyfor operation, even if not particularly specified, under their respective Section withoutadditional expense to the Owner.

C. Include in the work minor details not usually shown or specified but necessary forproper installation and operation, as though they were hereinafter shown or specified.

D. Provide Engineer written notice of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate orunsuitable; in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities havingjurisdiction; and any necessary items of Work omitted. In the absence of such written


PAGE 2 OF 20


notice, it is mutually agreed that Work under each Section has included the cost of allrequired items for the accepted, satisfactory functioning of the entire system withoutextra compensation.

E. The Work indicated is diagrammatic. The Architect and/or Engineer may require aspart of this Contract, the relocation of devices to reasonable distances from the generallocations shown.

F. Verbal clarifications of the Drawings or Specifications during the bid period are not tobe relied upon. Refer any questions or clarifications to the Engineer at least fiveWorking days prior to bidding to allow for issuance of an addendum. After the five-daydeadline, Bidder must make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder feels itnecessary.

1.4 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and workincluded in the Contract. (Do not scale the Drawings.) Consult the ArchitecturalDrawings and Details for exact location of fixtures and equipment; where same are notdefinitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.

B. Closely follow Drawings in layout of Work; check Drawings of other Divisions toverify spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. Wherespace conditions appear inadequate, Engineer shall be notified before proceeding withinstallations.

C. Engineer may, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout asneeded to prevent conflict with work of other trades and/or for proper execution of thework.

D. Where variances occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within either of theDocuments, include the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or highercost in the Contract price. The Engineer shall decide on the item and the manner inwhich the work shall be installed.

1.5 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Before submitting a Bid, the Contractor shall visit the site and shall become thoroughlyfamiliar with all conditions under which the work will be installed. Contractor will beheld responsible for any assumptions, omissions or errors made as a result of failure tobecome familiar with the site and the Contract Documents.

B. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. AllWork shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at thesite and check the correctness of same as related to the Work.


PAGE 3 OF 20


C. Should the Contractor discover any discrepancies between actual measurements andthose indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the Drawings andSpecifications, notify the Engineer do not proceed with that Work until instructionshave been received from the Engineer.

1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The Codes and Standards listed below apply to all Work. Where Codes or Standardsare mentioned in these Specifications, follow the latest edition or revision.

B. The current adopted editions of the following State or local Codes apply:1. 2003 International Building Code2. 2009 and 2011 Amendments to the 2005 Connecticut Supplement3. 2003 International Existing Building Code4. 2003 International Mechanical Code5. 2003 International Plumbing Code6. 2005 National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)7. 2009 International Energy Conservation Code8. ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

C. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules andrecommendations of the NFPA, the requirements of the local utility companies, therecommendations of the fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction and therequirements of all Governmental departments having jurisdiction.

D. Include in the Work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, testing,services, apparatus and Drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws,ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

1.7 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits; pay all Government and State sales taxesand fees where applicable, and other costs, including utility connections or extensionsin connection with the Work. File all necessary Drawings, prepare all Documents andobtain all necessary approvals of all Governmental and State departments havingjurisdiction, obtain all required certificates of inspections for Work and deliver a copyto the Engineer before request for acceptance and final payment for the Work.

1.8 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

A. General: This project is in a seismic zone per State and/or Local Codes and Ordinancesand all materials and equipment shall be installed, supported, and seismically restrainedaccordingly. Verify current seismic requirements based on project location and withCode requirements.


PAGE 4 OF 20


B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualifiedto practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced inproviding engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are definedas those performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraintsthat are similar to those required for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer,for the following:1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of

vibration isolation bases, design of seismic supports and selection of seismicrestraints for all equipment and materials.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages andattachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliarymotor slides and rails, and base weights.

3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints, supportsand snubbers.

4. Seismic Separation Assemblies: Refer to the Architectural and/or Structuraldrawings for locations of seismic joints.

D. Installation: Installation shall be carried out in strict accordance with the SeismicEngineer's submittal, current Code, accepted standards and the equipment and materialmanufacturers' recommendations.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Carry out all work in conjunction with other trades and give full cooperation in orderthat all work may proceed with a minimum of delay and interference. Particularemphasis is placed on timely installation of major apparatus and furnishing otherContractors, especially the General Contractor or Construction Manager, withinformation as to openings, chases, sleeves, bases, inserts, equipment locations, panels,access doors, etc. required by other trades, and to allow for serviceable access toequipment.

B. Mechanical contractors' shall initiate coordination drawings and sections clearlyshowing how the work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades, at noextra charge to the Owner. The Contractors' shall prepare coordination drawings at ascale no less than 1/4"=1'-0", showing the work of all trades, including but not limitedto, the following: proposed ductwork installation in detail, including ceiling heights,approved structural steel shop drawings, duct heights, access doors, light fixtures,registers and diffusers, sprinkler piping, electrical distribution conduits, wires, panelsand any other electrical work which may conflict with the sheet metal ducts or piping,waste and vent piping, water piping, storm piping, and rain leaders. Provide elevationdetails showing connections and equipment layout and configuration based on approvedsubmittals. Each shall use a different color code. A coordination meeting of all


PAGE 5 OF 20


Contractors involved is then to be held and all possible conflicts are to be resolved. Alltrades shall sign acceptance of the drawings and then shall submit two (2) prints of eachdrawing to the Engineer for record.

C. Contractors are required to examine all of the Project Drawings and mutually arrangeWork so as to avoid interference. In general, ductwork, heating piping, sprinkler pipingand drainage lines take precedence over water, gas and electrical conduits. TheEngineer regarding the arrangement of Work, which cannot be agreed upon by theContractors, will make final decisions. Service of equipment will take precedence.

D. Where the Work of the Contractor will be installed in close proximity to or willinterfere with Work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make asatisfactory adjustment.

E. If Work is installed before coordinating with other Divisions or so as to causeinterference with Work of other Sections, the Contractor causing the interference willmake necessary changes to correct the condition without extra charge to the Owner.

F. Initial contact and coordination has been conducted with utility entities for the purposeof the preparation of Bid Documents. The Contractor shall coordinate all final specificutility requirements.

1.10 ACCEPTANCES

A. The equipment, materials, Workmanship, design and arrangement of all Work installedare subject to the review of the Engineer.

B. Within 30 days after the awarding of a Contract, submit to the Engineer for review a listof manufacturers of equipment proposed for the Work. The intent to use the exactmakes specified does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of submitting sucha list.

C. If extensive or unacceptable delivery time is expected on a particular item of equipmentspecified, notify the Engineer, in writing, within 30 days of the awarding of theContract. In such instances, deviations may be made pending acceptance by theEngineer or the Owner's representative.

D. Where any specific material, process or method of construction or manufactured articleis specified by reference to the catalog or model number of a manufacturer, theSpecifications are to be used as a guide and are not intended to take precedence over thebasic duty and performance specified or noted on the Drawings. In all cases, verify theduty specified with the specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review. Equipment characteristics are to be used as mandatory requirements where theContractor proposes to use an acceptable equivalent.


PAGE 6 OF 20


E. If material or equipment is installed before shop drawing review, liability for itsremoval and replacement is assumed by the Contractor, at no extra charge to the Owner,if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material or equipment does not meet the intent ofthe Drawings and Specifications.

F. Failure on the part of the Engineer to reject shop drawings or to reject Work in progressshall not be interpreted as acceptance of Work not in conformance with the Drawingsand/or Specifications. Correct Work not in conformance with the Drawings and/orSpecifications whenever non-conformance is discovered.

1.11 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. Where the Contractor proposes to deviate (substitute or provide an equivalent) from theequipment or materials as hereinafter specified, he shall do so by making a request inwriting. The Contractor shall state in his request whether it is a substitution or anequivalent to that specified, and the amount of credit involved. A copy of said requestshall be included in the Base Bid with manufacturer's equipment cuts.1. The Base Bid shall be based on using the materials and equipment as specified and

scheduled with no exceptions. Equipment Manufacturers Scheduled on Drawingsare considered Base Bid and any other acceptable manufacturers listed in thespecifications is considered a substitution and equipment deviation and subject tothe requirements for equipment substitution and deviation. When any alternatemanufacturer does not qualify acceptable, as determined by the Engineer, providethe Base Bid manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner.

B. In these Specifications and on the accompanying Drawings, one or more makes ofmaterials, apparatus or appliances may have been specified for use in this installation. This has been done for convenience in fixing the standard of workmanship, finish anddesign required for installation. In the event that only one (1) manufacturer of a productis specified and it is found that the manufacturer has discontinued the product, theContractor shall use an acceptable equivalent product that meets the requirements of anequivalent product, as noted below, and has all the features of the originally specifiedproduct. The details of workmanship, finish and design, and the guaranteedperformance of any material, apparatus or appliance which the Contractor desires todeviate for those mentioned herein shall also conform to these standards.

C. Where no specific make of material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-classproduct made by a reputable manufacturer may be submitted for the Engineer's review.

D. Where two or more names are given as equivalents or where one name only is used andis followed by the words "or acceptable equivalent", the Contractor must use the itemnamed or he may apply for an equipment deviation through the prescribed manner inaccordance with this Specification.


PAGE 7 OF 20


E. Equipment, material or devices submitted for review as an "accepted equivalent" shallmeet the following requirements:1. The equivalent shall have the same construction features such as, but not limited

to:2. Material thickness, gauge, weight, density, etc.3. Welded, riveted, bolted, etc., construction4. Finish, undercoatings, corrosion protection5. The equivalent shall perform with the same or better operating efficiency.6. The equivalent shall have equal or greater reserve capacity.7. The equivalent shall be locally represented by the manufacturer for service, parts

and technical information.8. The equivalent shall bear the same labels of performance certification as is

applicable to the specified item, such as AMCA or ARI labels.

F. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than specified ordetailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions,foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical orarchitectural layout, all such redesign and all new drawings and detailing requiredtherefore shall be prepared by the Designers of Record at the expense of the Contractorand at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Where such accepted deviation or substitution requires a different quantity andarrangement of piping, ductwork, valves, pumps, insulation, wiring, conduit andequipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall, withthe acceptance by the Engineer, furnish and install any such additional equipmentrequired by the system at no additional cost to the Owner, including any costs added toother trades due to the substitution.

H. The Engineer shall determine if an "accepted equivalent" to a manufacturer listed in theSpecifications is considered acceptable.

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal information.

B. The Contractor shall submit for review detailed shop drawings of all equipment andmaterial specified in each section and coordinated ductwork layouts. No material orequipment may be delivered to the job site or installed until the Contractor has receivedshop drawings for the particular material or equipment which have been properlyreviewed.

C. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 60 days after award of Contract before anymaterial or equipment is purchased. The Contractor shall submit for review copies ofall shop drawings to be incorporated in the Contract. Refer to the General Conditions


PAGE 8 OF 20


and Supplementary General Conditions for the quantity of copies required forsubmission. Where quantities are not specified, provide seven (9) copies for review.

D. Provide shop drawings for all devices specified under equipment specifications for allsystems, materials, equipment and/or devices. Shop drawings shall includemanufacturers' names, catalog numbers, cuts, diagrams and other such descriptive dataas may be required to identify and accept the equipment. A complete list in eachcategory (example: all fixtures) of all shop drawings, catalog cuts, material lists, etc.,shall be submitted to the Engineer at one time. No consideration will be given to apartial shop drawing submittal. Partial submissions shall be rejected.

E. Equipment shop drawings shall contain full range performance curves, graphs, tables orother pertinent data which clearly indicates operational range of a given unit size. Computer generated/plotted curves, based solely on design performance, will not beaccepted.

F. All specific options and/or alternatives shall be clearly indicated. Failure to do so shallbe grounds for rejection.

G. Submittals shall be marked with the trade involved, i.e., HVAC, plumbing, fireprotection, etc. and the specific associated specification section.

H. Where multiple quantities or types of equipment are being submitted, provide a coversheet (with a list of contents) on the submittal identifying the equipment or materialbeing submitted.

I. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for review shall not entitle theContractor to an extension of Contract time. Contractor must allow for a one weekreview at the Engineer's office plus normal delivery time to the G.C., Architect,Engineer, and return to the Architect, and G.C. No claim for extension by reason ofsuch default will be allowed, nor shall the Contractor be entitled to purchase, furnishand/or install equipment which has not been reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractorshall incur all costs associated with delay of construction due to equipment and/ormaterials arriving late due to late or improper shop drawing submittal.

J. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary templates, patterns, etc., for installation workand for the purpose of making adjoining work conform; furnish setting plans and shopdetails to other trades as required.

K. Acceptance rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee ofmeasurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, review does notindicate that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any wayrelieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material orperforming work as required by the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Verifyavailable space prior to submitting shop drawings.


PAGE 9 OF 20


L. Acceptance of shop drawings shall not apply to quantity nor relieve Contractor of hisresponsibility to comply with intent of Drawings and Specifications.

M. Acceptance of shop drawings is final and no further changes will be allowed withoutthe written consent of the Engineer.

N. Shop drawing submittal sheets which may show items that are not being furnished shallhave those items crossed off to clearly indicate which items will be furnished.

O. Bidders shall not rely on any verbal clarification of the Drawings and/or Specifications. Any questions shall be referred to the Engineer at least five (5) working days prior toBidding to allow for issuance of an Addendum. After the five (5) day deadline, Biddershall make a decision and qualify the Bid, if the Bidder deems if necessary.

P. Contractor shall make any corrections required by Engineer and shall resubmit requirednumber of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples until accepted. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings torevisions other than corrections requested by Engineer on previous submissions. Engineer shall review no more than one resubmittal of any shop drawing or sample atOwner's expense. The fees for review of additional resubmittals shall be paid by theContractor at the Engineer's standard rates.

1.13 CHANGES IN WORK

A. A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and theArchitect, issued after Contracts have been awarded, authorizing a change in the workor an adjustment in the Contract sum or the Contract time. A Change Order signed bythe Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in theContract sum or the Contract time.

B. All changes in the work shall follow the recommendations of the AIA "GeneralConditions of the Contract for Construction", Article 12.

1.14 MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION

A. All component parts of each item of equipment or device shall bear the manufacturer'snameplate giving name of manufacturer, description, size, type, serial and modelnumber, electrical characteristics, etc., in order to facilitate maintenance or replacement. Nameplate data shall not be obstructed. The nameplate of a Contractor or distributorwill not be acceptable.

B. All material and equipment for the electrical portion of the mechanical systems shallbear the label of or be listed by UL, or other accredited authoritative agencies or testingorganizations approved by the authority having jurisdiction.


PAGE 10 OF 20


1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain at the job site a record set of Mechanical Drawings on which any changes inlocation or routing of all equipment, materials and access panels shall be recorded.

B. At the end of construction, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a complete setof As-Built Drawings, including all updated coordination drawings, ductwork andpiping plans. As-Builts shall be drawn on the latest version of Autocad or compatiblesoftware, approved in writing, prior to submittal.

1.16 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as otherwise specificallyindicated, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected,connected and finished in every detail and be so selected and arranged as to fit properlyinto the building spaces. Where no specific type or quality of material is given, afirst-class standard article as accepted by industry standards shall be furnished.

B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall beconstantly in charge of the installation of the work together with all skilled workmen,fitters, metal workers, welders, helpers and laborers required to unload, transfer, erect,connect, adjust, start, operate and test each system.

C. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings or Specifications, allequipment and materials shall be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer and inaccordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes theperformance of such tests as the manufacturer recommends.

D. All labor for installation of mechanical systems shall be performed by experienced,skilled tradesmen under the supervision of a licensed journeyman foreman. All workshall be of a quality consistent with good trade practice and shall be installed in a neat,workmanlike manner. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any work which, in hisopinion, has been installed in a substandard, dangerous or unserviceable manner. TheContractor shall replace said work in a satisfactory manner at no extra cost to theOwner.

E. Year-2000 Compliant: All digitally controlled/monitored equipment and systems shallbe certified "Year 2000 Compliant". Computer hardware and software shall be capableof accurately processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between thetwentieth and twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations. All programcodes shall be "non-date sensitive" codes that will not cause an automatic programmalfunction, stop command, miscalculation or similar function stopping continued andproper operation upon a sequence of numbers that occur by date.


PAGE 11 OF 20


1.17 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all otherSections from damage by work or workmen and shall include making good all damagethus caused.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until the facility has beenaccepted by the Owner. Protect work against theft, injury or damage and carefully storematerial and equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close openends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry offoreign material.

C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting,setting in place and completely connecting equipment supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling andprotecting equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of theequipment and fixtures which are missing or damaged.

D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather,vehicles, dirt and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical orabsorbent equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage.

1.18 BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall furnish all necessary supports,rails, framing, bases and piers required for all equipment furnished under this Division.

B. Unless otherwise shown, all equipment shall be securely attached to the buildingstructure in an acceptable manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature;any attachments that are insufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, shall be replaced asdirected without extra cost to the Owner.

C. All equipment supports shall be designed and constructed such that the equipment willbe capable of resisting both vertical and horizontal movement. The equipment shall bepositively anchored to the bases or supports to resist vertical movement. Theequipment and its supports shall be provided with suitable restraints to resist horizontalmovement from any direction as dictated by applicable seismic Codes.

1.19 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. The Contractor shall provide, set in place and be held responsible for the location of allsleeves, inserts and anchor bolts required for the work. In the event that failure to do sorequires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done at the Contractor'sexpense.


PAGE 12 OF 20


B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish cast-in-place steel sleeves, inserts andanchors in sufficient time to be installed during initial concrete pours. Where jobschedules make this impossible, coordinate and obtain acceptance from the StructuralEngineer for alternate installation methods.

C. All pipes and conduits passing through floors, walls or partitions shall be provided withsleeves having an inside diameter one (1") inch larger than the outside diameter of thepipe, conduit or insulation enclosing the pipe.

D. Piping insulation shall run continuous through sleeve.

E. Penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings and all floors (except slab on grade) inwhich piping or ducts pass shall be filled solidly with acceptable fire-stopping material.Sleeves shall be steel or a UL / FM listed and approved assembly.

F. When ducts, piping or conduit penetrate the floor of a mechanical room located abovean occupied space, such penetrations shall be made completely watertight, such that aliquid leak shall not pass through the penetration.

1.20 FIRE-STOPS AND SEALS

A. Refer to Division 7 Specification for additional and more specific information.

B. Fire-stopping systems shall be submitted as shop drawing.

C. Penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceiling or floors shall be sealed with a ULapproved fire-stop fitting classified for an hourly rating equivalent to the fire rating ofthe wall, ceiling or floor.

D. Thruwall and floor seals shall be used to provide a positive means of sealing pipes orducts which pass through the concrete foundation of a structure below grade or belowground water level. Seals shall also be used at entry points through concrete walls orfloors which must be sealed.

1.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching shall be done per Division 1 requirements. The Contractorshall furnish sketches showing the location and sizes of all openings, chases, etc.,required for the installation of work.

B. Work under this Division shall include furnishing, locating and setting inserts and/orsleeves required before the floors and walls are built or be responsible for cutting,drilling or chopping where sleeves and inserts were not installed or correctly located. The Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.


PAGE 13 OF 20


C. Exercise extreme caution when core drilling or punching openings in concrete floorslabs in order to avoid cutting or damaging structural members. No structural membersor structural slabs/floors shall be cut without the written acceptance of the StructuralEngineer and all such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by him.

1.22 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING

A. The Contractor shall furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary forerection and delivery into the premises any equipment and apparatus furnished underthis Division. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.23 WATERPROOFING

A. Where any work pierces waterproofing, including waterproof concrete and floors in wetareas, the method of installation shall be reviewed by the Engineer before work is done. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary sleeves, caulking and flashing required tomake openings absolutely watertight.

1.24 ACCESSIBILITY AND ACCESS PANELS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases,the adequate thickness of partitions, and the adequate clearance in double partitions andhung ceilings for the proper installation of the work.

B. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessiblepositions. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to: motors, controllers, coil,valves, switchgear, drain points, etc. Access doors shall be furnished if required forbetter accessibility. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to allow betteraccessibility, but changes of magnitude or which involve extra cost shall not be madewithout the acceptance of the Engineer.

C. Access doors in walls, ceilings, floors, etc., shall be field coordinated. It is theresponsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and provide information regarding thesizes and quantities of access doors required for his work. The Contractor shall arrangehis work in such a manner as to minimize the quantity of access doors required, such asgrouping shutoff valves in the same area. Where possible, locate valves in alreadyaccessible areas, such as lay-in ceilings, etc.

D. On a clean set of prints, the Contractor shall mark in red pencil the location of eachrequired access door, including its size and fire rating (if any), and shall submit the printto the Architect for review before access doors are purchased or installed.

E. Upon completion of the Project, the Contractor shall physically demonstrate that allequipment and devices installed have been located and/or provided with adequateaccess panels for repair, maintenance and/or operation. Any equipment not so


PAGE 14 OF 20


furnished shall be relocated or provided with additional access panels by the installingContractor at no additional cost to the Owner. All access panel or door locations shallbe indicated on Owner's final as-built record drawings.

F. Permanent ladders for access to equipment when shown on Plans shall be furnished andinstalled. Coordinate exact requirements in field.

1.25 TEMPORARY OPENINGS

A. The Contractor shall ascertain from an examination of the Drawings whether anyspecial temporary openings in the building will be required for the admission ofapparatus provided under this Division and shall coordinate the requirementsaccordingly. In the event of failure of the Contractor to give sufficient notice in time toarrange for these openings during construction, the Contractor shall assume all costs ofproviding such openings thereafter.

1.26 SHUTDOWNS

A. When installation of a new system requires the temporary shutdown of an existingoperating system, the connection of the new system shall be performed at such time asdesignated by the Owner's representative.

B. The Engineer and the Owner shall be notified of the estimated duration of the shutdownperiod at least ten (10) days in advance of the date the work is to be performed.

C. Work shall be arranged for continuous performance whenever possible. The Contractorshall provide all necessary labor, including overtime if required, to assure that existingoperating services will be shut down only during the time actually required to makenecessary connections.

1.27 TAGS AND CHARTS

A. Each valve and piece of apparatus under this Division shall be provided with suitablebrass or laminated plastic tags securely fastened with brass chains, screws or rivets. Equipment shall be numbered with laminated plastic tags or neatly stenciled letters two(2") inches high using designations in equipment schedules and/or shall conform to adirectory indicating number, location and use of each item. Directories shall beprepared under each Section and shall be glass framed.

B. Directory shall indicate valve tag number and the unit number, floor/area branch line,main line, service or other pertinent data to quickly and easily identify the valve'spurpose.


PAGE 15 OF 20


1.28 ESCUTCHEONS

A. The Contractor shall provide escutcheons on pipes wherever they pass through floors,ceilings, walls or partitions in finished visible locations.

1.29 PAINTING

A. All finish painting in completed areas shall be performed per Division 9 of theSpecifications.

B. All materials shipped to the job site under this Division, such as grilles, registers and/orradiation covers, shall have standard manufacturer's finish, unless otherwise specifiedby Architect.

C. The Contractor shall paint the interior of all ducts wherever the interior of the duct canbe seen through a register or louver. Paint shall be flat black, rust preventative type.

D. All outdoor piping, fittings and hangers shall be properly primed with zinc-rich primerand finished with a minimum of two (2) coats of high grade exterior enamel.


A. Unless otherwise specified, all wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 26Specifications.

B. All motor controllers not factory mounted on mechanical equipment shall be furnished,mounted, and installed by the Division 26 contractor, and shall be coordinated with thiscontractor. Provide properly sized overload heaters and all required accessories with allmotor controllers. See Division 26 Motor Controllers for motor controllerrequirements.

C. All power wiring shall be furnished and installed per Division 26 complete from powersource to motor or equipment junction box including power wiring through the motorcontroller and proper means of disconnect per NEC and Division 26. The Division 26Contractor shall provide all disconnects, unless noted otherwise.

1.31 QUIET OPERATION

A. If noise level is deemed objectionable by the Owner/Engineer, the Contractor shall testand record sound levels in the presence of the Owner/Engineer. The sound level shallbe observed on the "A" weighting network of a sound level or sound survey meter. TheASHRAE "Guide and Data Book" provides a means to determine sound level ofmechanical equipment when the total of background plus equipment sound levelsexceeds the minimum acceptable equipment sound level.


PAGE 16 OF 20


B. If objectionable noises or vibrations of any magnitude are produced and transmitted tooccupied portions of the building by apparatus, piping, ducts or other parts of themechanical work, the Contractor shall make such changes or additions as necessarywithout extra cost to the Owner.

1.32 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor shall provide the necessary skilled labor to assure the proper operationand to provide all required current and preventative maintenance for all equipment andcontrols provided under this Division until final acceptance of the building by theOwner. The Contractor shall not assume acceptance of the building by the Owner untilhe receives written notification.

B. The Contractor shall receive calls for any and all problems experienced in the operationof the equipment provided under this Division and he shall take steps to immediatelycorrect any deficiencies that may exist.

C. The Contractor shall provide a check list and shall put a copy of it in the boiler or mainmechanical room. The check list shall itemize each piece of equipment furnished underhis Section.

D. The Contractor shall certify on this check list that he has examined each piece ofequipment and that, in his opinion, it is operating as intended by the manufacturer, ithas been properly lubricated, and that all necessary current and preventativemaintenance has been performed as recommended by the manufacturer and by good andaccepted practice.

E. The Contractor shall check all controls in the building to ascertain that they arefunctioning as designed. This shall apply to all thermostats, aquastats, humidistats,freezestats and firestats, etc. This portion of the work shall be performed by theContractor who installed the controls.

F. During construction, the Contractor shall ensure that all filters are in place on allequipment. If the equipment is operated during construction (see restrictions section ofthis specification), strict attention shall be paid to maintaining clean and effective filtersand cleaning ductwork and equipment. Filters shall be new and/or clean when thesystem testing and balancing takes place. The Contractor shall bear the cost of allfilters and media during construction until final acceptance by the Owner. Thisrequirement shall apply equally to fluid filters and strainers.

G. Where normal preventative maintenance for any piece of equipment requires specialtools, the Contractor shall furnish the appropriate tools for that piece of equipment (i.e.,special filter removal hooks, valve wrenches, etc.).


PAGE 17 OF 20


1.33 AIR ELIMINATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for bleeding all air from closed hydronic pipingsystems after the system has been filled, and thereafter rebleeding as often as requiredto completely eliminate all air from the system.

B. Where work on an existing piping system has allowed air to enter that system, theContractor shall also bleed that system even if no piping work was done in the areawhere air has developed.

C. Where air cannot be bled from any piping due to the absence of an air vent, theContractor shall install a manual air vent in locations required to successfully bleedsuch air.

D. Where the piping layout would require an air vent in an inaccessible location, theContractor shall install an extended 1/4-inch copper bleed line and petcock to anaccessible location such as a closet, mechanical room, above lay-in ceiling, etc.

1.34 LUBRICATION

A. All equipment installed under this Contract having moving parts and requiringlubrication shall be properly lubricated according to manufacturer's recommendationsprior to testing and operation. Any such equipment discovered to have been operatedbefore lubrication by the Contractor is subject to rejection and replacement at noadditional cost to the Owner. Units furnished with sealed bearings are exempted.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install, as appropriate on all equipment requiringlubrication, Zerk pressure gun grease fittings or sight gravity-feed oilers equipped withshutoff and needle valve adjustment. Units furnished with sealed bearings and lifetimelubrication are exempted. All fittings and oilers are to be fully accessible forlubrication with equipment which does not require special adapters. Where fittingswould be otherwise inaccessible, furnish and install extended grease lines.

1.35 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the jobsite clean, safe and neatthroughout the duration of construction. The Contractor shall clean up his own debrisdaily and shall coordinate removal of rubbish and debris with the GeneralContractor/Construction Manager.

B. No debris, construction materials, cigarette butts, coffee cups, etc., shall be left abovesuspended ceilings.

C. Terminal equipment and plumbing fixtures shall cleaned at substantial completion.


PAGE 18 OF 20


D. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after beingplaced in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned and reconnectedwherever necessary to locate and/or remove obstructions. Any work damaged in thecourse of removing obstructions shall be repaired or replaced when the system isreconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped in an acceptablemanner to insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter.

F. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from thepremises all rubbish, debris and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil orgrease stains on floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areasleft clean.

1.36 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Upon completion of all work and tests, the Contractor shall furnish the necessaryskilled labor and helpers for operating his system and equipment for a period specifiedunder each applicable Section of this Division. During this period, he shall fullyinstruct the Owner or the Owner's representative in the operation, adjustment andmaintenance of all equipment furnished. The Contractor shall give at least 72 hoursnotice to the Owner and the Engineer in advance of this period.

B. The Contractor shall formally submit for delivery to the Engineer three (3) completebound sets of typewritten or blueprinted instructions for operating and maintaining allsystems and equipment included in this Division. All instructions shall be submitted indraft for review prior to final issue. Manufacturer's advertising literature or catalogswill not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instruction.

C. The Contractor, in the above-mentioned instructions, shall include the maintenanceschedule for the principal items of equipment furnished under this Division.

D. The appropriate Contractor shall physically demonstrate procedures for all routinemaintenance of all equipment furnished under each respective Section to assureaccessibility to all devices.

E. An authorized manufacturer's representative shall attest in writing that the equipmenthas been properly installed prior to startup of any major equipment. The followingequipment will require this inspection: pumps; air conditioning equipment, controls, airhandling equipment, boilers. These letters will be bound into the operating andmaintenance books.

F. Refer to individual trade Sections for any other particular requirements related tooperating instructions.


PAGE 19 OF 20


1.37 ADJUSTING AND TESTING

A. After all the equipment and accessories to be furnished are in place, they shall be put infinal adjustment and subjected to such operating tests so as to assure the Engineer thatthey are in proper adjustment, the control operate as described in the sequence ofoperation and all systems are in satisfactory, permanent operating condition.

B. Where requested by the Engineer, a factory-trained service engineering representativeshall inspect the installation and assist in the initial startup and adjustment to theequipment. The period of these services shall be for such time as necessary to secureproper installation and adjustments. After the equipment is placed in permanentoperation, the service engineering representative shall supervise the initial operation ofthe equipment and instruct the personnel responsible for operation and maintenance ofthe equipment. The service engineering representative shall notify the Contractor inwriting that the equipment was installed according to manufacturer's recommendationsand is operating as intended by the manufacturer.

1.38 GUARANTEES

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, material and workmanship under theseSpecifications and the Contract for a period of one (1) year from the date of finalacceptance by Owner, unless otherwise noted.

B. All refrigeration compressors shall have five (5) year guarantee from the date of finalacceptance by the Owner unless otherwise noted.

C. During this guarantee period, all defects developing through faulty equipment, materialsor workmanship shall be corrected or replaced immediately by the Contractor withoutexpense to the Owner. Such repairs or replacements shall be made to the Engineer'ssatisfaction.

1.39 RESTRICTIONS

A. Mechanical equipment provided under this Division may not be used for temporaryheating/cooling requirements due to premature wear and dirt/dust infiltration. Equipment shall be protected from dust and debris during construction. Duct openingshall be protected during construction to prevent dust and debris from being transportedthrough ductwork to equipment or other spaces and to ensure ductwork is clean andready for use at the time of equipment start-up.Written approval may be obtained fromthe Owner only after submission of a written cleaning plan and guarantee/warrantyextension.


PAGE 20 OF 20


PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED.PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 230501 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

PAGE 1 OF 2


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Mechanical demolition.1. Existing mechanical equipment; hydronic supply & return piping, valves and

fittings;pumped condensate drain piping; supply, return & outdoor air ductwork;register, grilles & diffusers; temperature control system components and controlwiring.

2. Items indicated for reuse shall be carefully removed and stored on site forre-installation in location(s) indicated on the new construction plans.

B. Demolition shall include the removal of all hangers and supports, anchors and otheritems not required for the new work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions in the field. Note which items are to remain and which itemsare to be removed as indicated on drawings.



D. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation, i.e. asbestos. Where asbestos materials are deemed to be part of the equipment, the abatementcontractor shall be responsible for demolition and proper removal and disposal ofequipment.


SECTION 230501 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

PAGE 2 OF 2


3.2 PREPARATION


B. Provide temporary piping, ductwork, control wiring, and connections to maintainexisting systems in service during construction. When work must be performed onenergized equipment or piping, coordinate shut-down time with owner.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK

A. All demolition work shall be scheduled and coordinated in order to accommodateconstruction phasing schedule.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply, provide isolation valve and cap atmains.

D. Contractor shall make safe all work associated with this division.

E. Disconnect and remove mechanical piping and fittings serving equipment that has beenremoved .

F. Disconnect and remove existing equipment, piping and fittings as indicated on thedrawings.



END OF SECTION

SECTION 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 6


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Single phase electric motors.

B. Three phase electric motors.


A. Section 233423 - HVAC Power Ventilators.

B. Section 238127 - Small Split-System Heating and Cooling.

C. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

D. Section 262913 - Enclosed Controllers.


A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American BearingManufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).

B. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors andGenerators; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.

C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2011.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connectionrequirements.

C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor forthree phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections,lubrication, and wiring instructions.


PAGE 2 OF 6


E. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.

F. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacementsizes, and lubrication instructions.


A. Conform to NFPA 70.

B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approvalof high efficiency motors.

C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UnderwritersLaboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory coversand suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motorsfrom equipment and store separately.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 262717 for required electrical characteristics.

B. Construction:1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation

class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, fullload amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number,service factor, power factor, efficiency.

D. Wiring Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and

materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70,threaded for conduit.


PAGE 3 OF 6


2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, providethreaded conduit connection in end frame.

2.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.

B. Motors located in exterior locations, wet air streams downstream of sprayed coildehumidifiers, draw through cooling towers, air cooled condensers, humidifiers, directdrive axial fans, roll filters, explosion proof environments, and dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.

2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperaturerise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings,automatic reset overload protector.

2.4 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.

C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA DesignB characteristics.

D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for DesignB motors.

E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.

F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine freefrom electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with endbrackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped withplugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt


PAGE 4 OF 6


center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes onnameplate.

I. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.

J. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressurewith rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shieldedwith waterproof non-washing grease.

K. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested inaccordance with IEEE 112.

L. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested inaccordance with IEEE 112.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in anyposition.

C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. NEMA Open Motor Service Factors.1. 1/6-1/3 hp:

a. 1800 rpm: 1.35.2. 1/2 hp:

a. 1800 rpm: 1.25.3. 3/4 hp:

a. 1800 rpm: 1.25.4. 1 hp:

a. 1800 rpm: 1.15.5. 1.5-150 hp:

a. 1800 rpm: 1.15.

B. Three Phase - Energy Efficient, Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled Performance:1. 1800 rpm.

a. 1 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 143T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 84.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 82.


PAGE 5 OF 6


b. 1-1/2 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 145T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 85.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 84.

c. 2 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 145T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 85.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 84.

d. 3 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 182T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 83.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 87.

e. 5 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 184T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 83.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 88.

f. 7-1/2 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 213T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 85.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 89.

g. 10 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 215T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 84.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 90.

h. 15 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 254T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 86.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 91.

i. 20 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 256T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 85.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 91.

j. 25 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 284T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 84.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 92.

k. 30 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 286T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 86.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 93.

l. 40 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 324T.


PAGE 6 OF 6


2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 83.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 93.

m. 50 hp:1) NEMA Frame: 326T.2) Minimum Percent Power Factor: 85.3) Minimum Percent Efficiency: 93.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

PAGE 1 OF 8


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Vibration isolators.

B. Seismic restraint/expansion.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 23 05 00 - Mechanical General Conditions.

B. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping.

C. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping.

D. Section 23 31 00 - Hydronic Piping.

E. Section 23 72 13 - Air-to Air Energy Recovery Units.

F. Section 23 81 27 Small Split-System Heating and Cooling.

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. Housekeeping Pads1. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure

details and design shall be prepared by the restraint vendor.2. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to provide

a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermostanchor bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-inanchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate theACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment.

B. Supplementary Support Steel1. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping,

ductwork, etc. including roof-mounted equipment, as required or specified.

C. Attachments1. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads,

concrete inserts, double-sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with therequirements of the vibration vendor's calculations.


PAGE 2 OF 8


1.5 DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Section includes furnishing and installing vibration isolation equipmentand/or seismic restraint/expansion for mechanical equipment and piping systems andductwork furnished under this Division.

B. Vibration isolators shall be provided for motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP, includingconnected piping, ductwork and raceways.

C. Mechanical equipment and raceway systems shall be seismically restrained as requiredby Section 1621 of the currently applicable IBC building code and the ConnecticutSupplement.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittial Procedures, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load oneach.1. Horsepower of each motor, and lowest operating RPM of both driven and driver,

in each supported unit.2. Calculated static load of each isolator, in pounds.3. Scheduled deflection of each isolator. Identification of each isolator selected by

number and spring color.4. For spring isolators: Spring diameters, deflections, compressed height, and solid

spring height.

C. Shop Drawings: Locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load on each. Indicate seismic control measures.1. Calculate total lateral and longitudinal forces, in pounds for each pipe or ductwork

segment and piece of equipment. The total lateral force is defined in IBC 2003,Section 1621.1.4

2. For seismic restraints: published data or certified drawings showing constructiondetails, capacities and calculated force acting in all directions at each point ofattachment, or California OSHPD pre-approved "R" numbers, certifying G forcecapabilities.

D. Seismic calculations shall be submitted with the seal of a professional engineer who islegally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who isexperienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

E. Coordination Drawings:1. Drawings showing equipment base construction for each machine, including

dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations.


PAGE 3 OF 8


2. Drawings showing methods of suspension, support guides for conduit, piping andductwork.

3. Drawings showing methods for isolation of conduits, pipes and ductworkpenetrating walls and floor slabs.

4. Concrete and steel details for bases including anchor bolt locations.5. Number and location of seismic restraint/expansion and anchors for each piece of

equipment and piping system. Coordination drawings shall be reviewed by theseismic engineer of record, detailing restraint/expansion locations. Eachcoordination drawing shall bear the seismic engineer's stamp certifying review ofthe designed systems.

6. Specific details of restraint/expansion including anchor bolts for mounting andmaximum loading at each location, for each piece of equipment and/or raceway.

7. Submitted drawings shall detail location and construction details of racewayexpansion fittings at building seismic joints to accomodate 4" displacement.

8. Refer to the Architectural and/or Structural drawings for locations of seismicjoints.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special proceduresand setting dimensions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Amber/Booth: www.amberbooth.com

B. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com.

C. Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com. (Reference Standard)

D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Restrained Open Spring Isolators:1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with

working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color codesprings for load carrying capacity.

2. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprenesound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware.

3. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements forneoprene pad isolators.

4. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.5. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene

coated springs.


PAGE 4 OF 8


B. Seismic Restrained Open Spring Isolators:1. Provide built-in vertical limit stops with minimum 1/4" clearance under normal

operation.2. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment when subject to wind load.3. Capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection.

Installed and operating heights shall be identical.4. Adjustable and removable spring pack with separate neoprene pad isolation.5. OSHPD pre-approved "R" number certifying acceleration capabilities.6. Deflection shall be 1" minimum with additional capabilities where specified.7. Electro-galvanized housing.

C. Spring Hanger:1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with

working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color codesprings for load carrying capacity.

2. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation element meeting requirements forneoprene mount isolators.

3. Misalignment: Capable of 30 degree hanger rod misalignment.

D. Neoprene Pad Isolators:1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.

a. Hardness: 50 durometer.b. Thickness: Minimum 3/4 inch.c. Maximum Loading: 50 psi.d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width.

2. Configuration: Single layer.

E. Bridge bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2" andall directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron castingcontaining two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shallprevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the castingduring normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compoundedto bridge bearing specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certifiedhorizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured byMason Industries, Inc.

F. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assembliesconsisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeveprevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes asrequired. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panelhorizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeveis elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel


PAGE 5 OF 8


isolation in 3 planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends of steel crossmembers where applicable. All neoprene shall be bridge-bearing quality. Bushingassemblies shall be type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

G. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shallsurround the anchor bolt and have a flat washer face to avoid metal-to-metal contact.Neoprene bushings shall be type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

H. Flexible spherical expansion joints shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers,liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raisedface rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2"and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintainshape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similarinterlocks. 14" and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 190 F with auniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250 F. Safety factors to burst andflange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markingsverifying a 5-minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to theabove specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Control rodsneed only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determinesthe installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rodsare not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2" thickNeoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximumon the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shutoff valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ as manufactured by MasonIndustries, Inc.

I. Flexible hose shall have bronze braid and copper solder ends. Hoses shall be installedon the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipmentshafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be type CPSB as manufactured by MasonIndustries, Inc.

2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Suspended Equipment and Pipe and Ductwork:1. Mechanical equipment, pipe and ductwork requiring seismic bracing shall be

supported by structure designed to withstand the lateral and longitudinal forces asdetermined in the current applicable Building Code.

2. Seismic bracing for mechanical equipment, pipe and ductwork shall be a seismicrestraint system type SCB as manufactured by Mason Industries or rigid membersystem as manufactured by Tolco.

3. Suspended equipment utilizing vibration isolating elements as part of thesuspending structure shall incorporate seismic restraint cables at all mountingpoints (minimum of four points). Cables shall be installed at 45 degree angle tovertical and 45 degree angles to equipment longitudinal axes. Seismic restraintcables shall be type SCB as manufactured by Mason Industries.


PAGE 6 OF 8


B. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can beslid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from fulldiameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring underload. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.OEvaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchorsshall be type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, appliances, and equipment and perform all operationsnecessary for the complete execution of the installation of noise and vibration isolationdevices and seismic restraints specified in this section.

B. All piping and ductwork to be isolated according to this section of the specificationshall freely pass through walls and floors with out rigid connections. Penetration pointsshall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or ductwork, andmaintain a minimum of 3/4" and maximum of 1-1/4" clearance around the outsidesurfaces. This clearance space shall be tightly packed with 1.50 PCF fiberglass, andcaulked airtight, after installation of piping and ductwork.

C. The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection ofsprings to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections, for all isolators, basedon the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.

D. Installation of all vibration isolation material specified herein shall be accomplishedfollowing the manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Upon completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices,the seismic Engineer of record shall visit the site and inspect the installation. Uponcompletion of inspection, the engineer shall provide a stamped letter of compliancecertifying that all components have been installed and adjusted properly.

3.2 PIPING

A. All piping in the building which are connected to vibration isolated equipment shall benoise isolated at connections to the building structure per the Schedule at the end ofthis section.

B. Horizontal Piping: Where required raceway shall incorporate seismic restraint cables atall changes of direction and at interval not to exceed those in the table below.

C. Vertical Piping: Riser clamps shall be anchored at each floor to provide seismicrestraint.


PAGE 7 OF 8


D. Maximum Laterial Restraint spacing for Piping:

Size Threaded & Mech Joined Copper (Nominal) Flanged Steel (Grooved) Steel

2" & Under24' 16' 20'

2.5" - 6"36' 24' 20'

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install neoprene pad isolators in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Hangers shall be suspended from and restrained by substantial structural members, notthe slab diaphragm, unless specifically approved by the Architect.

C. Isolators shall be installed with the hanger box as close to the structure as possible.Hanger rods shall be aligned so as to clear the hanger box.

D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operatingconditions.1. The installation or use of vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position

of equipment or piping that will result in stresses in the pipe connections ormisalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, equipment andpiping shall be maintained in a rigid position during installation. The load shall notbe transferred to the isolator until the installation is complete and under fulloperational load.

E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantiallydifferent from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to finalheight. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

F. Seismic restraints shall be installed after equipment is in operating position to assuredesign clearances are maintained.

G. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators orresilient hangers for scheduled distance.1. Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support.2. 5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support.


A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include staticdeflections.


PAGE 8 OF 8


3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Pipe Isolation Schedule.1. 1 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 120 diameters from equipment.2. 2 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 90 diameters from equipment.3. 3 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 80 diameters from equipment.4. 4 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 75 diameters from equipment.5. 6 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Stencils.

D. Pipe Markers.

E. Ceiling Tacks.


A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Identification Painting.


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Societyof Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanicalidentification.

C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

E. Samples: Submit two labels 1" x _3" inch in size.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.


PAGE 2 OF 4


B. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.

C. Control Panels: Nameplates.

D. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.

E. Ductwork: Stencilled painting.

F. Piping: Pipe markers.

G. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.

B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.

C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.3 NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.1. Letter Color: White.2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.3. Background Color: Black.

2.4 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter withsmooth edges.

B. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:1. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 099123, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming toASME A13.1.

2.6 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.


PAGE 3 OF 4


B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fitaround pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrowand identification of fluid being conveyed.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesivebacking and printed markings.

2.7 CEILING TACKS

A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

B. Color code as follows:1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 099123 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Applywith sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099123.

D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

F. Identify HVAC equipment with plastic nameplates.

G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plasticnameplates.

H. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.

I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.


PAGE 4 OF 4


J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install inclear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet onstraight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side ofpenetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

M. Install ductwork with stencilled painting. Identify with air handling unit identificationnumber and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side ofpenetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

N. Locate ceiling tacks to locate equipment, valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PAGE 1 OF 10


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.

C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.


A. Section 230500 - Mechanical General Conditions.

B. Section 23 34 23 - HVAC Power Ventilators.

C. Section 23 81 01 - Terminal Heat Transfer.


A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated AirBalance Council; 2002.

B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ofBuilding Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; AmericanSociety of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988, with1997 Errata.

C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing ofEnvironmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, SeventhEdition.

D. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metaland Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures

B. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisorfor approval within 30 days after award of Contract.


PAGE 2 OF 10


C. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancingstandard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.1. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiencymeasurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,parameters, formulas to be used.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece ofequipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to begathered for each.

c. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their mostrecent calibration date.

d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct andpiping drawings during the process.

e. Final test report forms to be used.f. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue,

including:1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).2) Diffuser proportioning.3) Branch/submain proportioning.4) Total flow calculations.5) Rechecking.6) Diversity issues.

g. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via

hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitottraverse, SA or RA flow stations.

2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.h. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating

at the lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this.i. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all

conditions.j. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified

and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.).k. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper

capacity.l. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement

methods.m. Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if

specified.n. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.).o. Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any.p. Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified.


PAGE 3 OF 10


q. False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified.r. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room

pressure differentials.s. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted

work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests(scope and frequency).

t. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency anddistribution.

D. Field Logs: Submit at least twice a week to Construction Manager.

E. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installerall setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identifiedduring TAB that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation.

F. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

Provide final copies for Amenta Emma Architects and for inclusion in operatingand maintenance manuals.

3. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete withindex page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Includeset of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspondwith data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

4. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date ofcalibration.

5. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends areport format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.

6. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.7. Include the following on the title page of each report:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.d. Project name.e. Project location.f. Project Engineer.g. Project Contractor.h. Project altitude.i. Report date.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations.


PAGE 4 OF 10


PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental

Systems.4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.5. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced andcomplete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.

C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, includingfire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing andinspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified

in this section.2. Having minimum of ten years documented experience.3. Certified by one of the following:

a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completionsubmit AABC National Performance Guaranty.

b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy

Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.

E. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure thefollowing conditions:1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition

to final filters.5. Duct systems are clean of debris.


PAGE 5 OF 10


6. Fans are rotating correctly.7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.10. Air outlets are installed and connected.11. Duct system leakage is minimized.12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.13. Pumps are rotating correctly.14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent propersystem balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or

balanced.

B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Makeinstruments available to Amenta Emma Architects to facilitate spot checks duringtesting.

C. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supplysystems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent ofdesign to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent ofdesign.

3.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:1. Running log of events and issues.2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.3. Contract interpretation requests.4. Lists of completed tests.

B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.


PAGE 6 OF 10


C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowingsettings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurementswere taken and cross reference the location in the final report.

E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or thatsuch disruption has been rectified.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheckpoints or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

H. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submitreport.

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectionalarea of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free fromobjectionable drafts and noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments donot create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by ductinternal devices such as dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changesrequired. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outletor inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coilpressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percentloading of filters.


PAGE 7 OF 10


I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers fordesign conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers tocheck leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extremeconditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling,and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems toprovide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inchespositive static pressure near the building entries.

M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow settingindicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation forautomatic variable air volume temperature control.

N. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust air flow switches for proper operation.

3.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges todetermine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are notinstalled, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transferelements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transferelements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperaturedifferential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transferelements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves,and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed forbalance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual systemparts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to otherparts.


PAGE 8 OF 10


3.8 SCOPE

A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:1. Terminal Heat Transfer Units2. Air Inlets and Outlets3. Small Split-System Heating & Cooling Systems

3.9 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED

A. Report:1. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performanceb. Notable characteristics of systemc. Description of systems operation sequenced. summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building

pressurizatione. Nomenclature used throughout reportf. Test Conditions

2. Instrument List:a. Manufacturerb. Model numberc. Serial numberd. Rangee. Calibration date

B. Electric Motors:1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load5. RPM 6. Service factor7. Starter size, rating, heater elements8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

C. V-Belt Drives:1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM4. Belt, size and quantity5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual


PAGE 9 OF 10


D. Air Moving Equipment:1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number4. Serial number5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual7. Return air flow, specified and actual8. Outside air flow, specified and actual9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual10. Inlet pressure11. Discharge pressure12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore13. Number of Belts/Make/Size14. Fan RPM

E. Duct Traverses:1. System zone/branch2. Duct size3. Area 4. Design velocity5. Design air flow6. Test velocity7. Test air flow8. Duct static pressure9. Air temperature10. Air correction factor

F. Air Distribution Tests:1. Air terminal number2. Room number/location3. Terminal type4. Terminal size5. Area factor6. Design velocity7. Design air flow8. Test (final) velocity9. Test (final) air flow10. Percent of design air flow

G. Small Split-System Heating & Cooling Systems::1. Identification/number


PAGE 10 OF 10


2. Location3. Service4. Manufacturer5. Air flow, design and actual6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual10. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual11. Air pressure drop, design and actual12. Number of compressors

END OF SECTION

SECTION 230713 DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Duct insulation.


A. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Metal and non-metal ducts.

B. Section 233000 - Air Duct Accessories.


A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Propertiesby Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.

B. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation forCommercial and Industrial Applications; 2011.

C. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.

D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2013a.

E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission ofMaterials; 2012.

F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

G. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and AirConditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



PAGE 2 OF 4



C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensureacceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of thetype specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of workspecified in this section, with minimum 3 years of experience and approved bymanufacturer.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer'sidentification, including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, andmechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.PART 2 PRODUCTS



B. MANUFACTURERS:1. Johns Manville Corporation2. Knauf Fiber Glass3. CertainTeed Corporation

2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, formaldehyde-free, noncombustible blanket,Greenguard Certified.1. 'K' value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.


PAGE 3 OF 4


2. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.3. Density: 0.75 lb/cuft.4. Equal to Johns Manville Microlite XG.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Barrier Tape:1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with

pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

D. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

2.3 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.1. 'K' value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.2. Maximum service temperature: 450 degrees F.3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in

accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Barrier Tape:1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with

pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

D. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.


PAGE 4 OF 4


3.2 INSTALLATION



C. Duct Insulation Application:1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor

barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners

where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insertspacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrieradhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allowoperation without disturbing wrapping.

3.3 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Exhaust Ducts in Attic : 1-1/2"

END OF SECTION

SECTION 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Piping insulation.


A. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

B. Section 232300 - Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.


A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements andThermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.

B. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;2007.

C. ASTM C449 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting ThermalInsulating and Finishing Cement; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).

D. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Propertiesby Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.

E. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible ElastomericCellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2013.

F. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.

G. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact withAustenitic Stainless Steel; 2008.

H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2013a.

I. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

J. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


PAGE 2 OF 5


1.5 SUBMITTALS



C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptableworkmanship and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Productsspecified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.


A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,and thickness.


A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturers:1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.4. CertainTeed Corporation; : www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible,GREENGUARD certified.1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.27 at 75 degrees F.2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.4. Equal to Johns Manville Micro-Lok HP.


PAGE 3 OF 5


C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminizedfilm; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of0.02 perm-inches.

D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive/Mastic:1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

F. Insulating Cement:1. ASTM C449/C449M.

2.3 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION

A. Manufacturer:1. Aeroflex USA, Inc: www.aeroflexusa.com.2. Armacell LLC; Armaflex: www.armacell.us.3. K-Flex USA LLC; ______: www.kflexusa.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: Closed cell flexible elastomeric pipe (tube) insulation complying withASTM C 534 Type I, tubular Grade 1, GREENGUARD certified1. Minimum Service Temperature: -297 degrees F.2. Maximum Service Temperature: +220 degrees F.3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.4. Equal to AP Armaflex.

C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, Low V.O.C. contact adhesive, compatible withinsulation equal to Armaflex 520 BLV.

D. For insulation exposed to weather, apply Armaflex WB finish.

E. For insulation thickness greater than 1", provide two layers of insulation in accordancewith manufacturer's recommendations for multi-layering.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.


PAGE 4 OF 5


3.2 INSTALLATION



C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system includingfittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

E. Pipes conveying fluids over 105 degrees F: Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

F. Inserts and Shields:1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.4. Insert configuration: Minimum 12 inches long, of same thickness and contour as

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

G. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section078400.

H. Exterior Applications: Provide two coats of UV resistant finish for flexible elastomericcellular insulation without jacketing.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Heating Systems:1. Heating Water Supply and Return (Glass Fiber Insulation):

a. 1-1/2" pipe size or less, 1-1/2" thickness, per 2009 IECCb. 2" pipe size or larger, 2" thickness, per 2009 IECC

B. Cooling Systems (Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation):1. Air Conditioning Condensate Drains:

a. 1/2" thickness for copper pipeb. 0" for PVC pipe

2. Refrigerant Gas and Liquid: 1-1/2" per 2009 IECC

END OF SECTION


PAGE 5 OF 5


SECTION 230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS

PAGE 1 OF 1


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Section 23 81 01 - Terminal Heat Transfer.

B. Section 23 81 27 - Small Split-System Heating and Cooling.PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USEDPART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DUCTLESS SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT CONTROL:

A. The units shall provide cooling for the space served to maintain space temperaturesetpoint (75°F adj.).

B. The air conditioning unit shall be controlled by unit manufacturer's control system.Mechanical contractor shall mount the space remote controller and wire to the unitmanufacturer's control system terminals in the indoor and outdoor units.

3.2 FINNED-TUBE RADIATION CONTROL:

A. The new finned-tube ratiation shall be controlled by the existing temperature controlsystem.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 15


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Hydronic system requirements.

B. Heating water piping, above grade.

C. Equipment drains and overflows.

D. Pipe hangers and supports.

E. Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections.

F. Valves:1. Gate valves.2. Globe or angle valves.3. Ball valves.4. Butterfly valves.5. Check valves.

G. Flow controls.


A. Section 09900 - Painting and Coating.

B. Section 230548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

C. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

D. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

E. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties.


A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and BrazingQualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The AmericanSociety of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.


PAGE 2 OF 15


C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of MechanicalEngineers; 1998 (R2006).

D. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The AmericanSociety of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).

E. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings;2001 (R2010).

F. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

G. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; TheAmerican Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).

H. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of MechanicalEngineers; 2008 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

I. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.

J. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought CarbonSteel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2011a.

K. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.

L. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.

M. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005(Reapproved 2011).

N. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2012.

O. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-RatedPipe (SDR Series); 2009.

P. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic PipeFittings, Schedule 40; 2006.

Q. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic PipeFittings, Schedule 80; 2006.

R. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints withPoly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).


PAGE 3 OF 15


S. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed MechanicalCouplings for Use in Piping Applications; 2007.

T. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;2011 and errata.

U. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.

V. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems;American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5).

W. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA C606).

X. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints ; 1997.

Y. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture,Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of theValve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system componentsare compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicingare consistently provided.

B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners in accessible locations.

C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatusconnections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment orother apparatus.

D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in opensystems.

E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicatedotherwise.

F. Use ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

G. Use globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

H. Use butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems interchangeably with gateand globe valves.


PAGE 4 OF 15


I. Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems for throttling andisolation service.

J. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.

K. Use 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points ofpiping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME (BPVIX).

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joiningprocedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, explodedassembly views.

G. Grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, amd specialties shall be shown on productsubmittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style orseries designation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of thetype specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specifiedin this section, with minimum five years of experience.

C. Welder Qualifications: Certify in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).


A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable statelabor regulations.


PAGE 5 OF 15


C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction, indicatingapproval of welders.



B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completingsections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ASME B31.9 and applicable federal, state, and local regulations.

B. Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and asfollows:1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings

that are compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the systemis not jeopardized.

2. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.3. Grooved mechanical joints may be used in accessible locations only.

a. Accessible locations include those exposed on interior of building, in pipechases, and in mechanical rooms, aboveground outdoors, and as approved bythe Engineer.

b. Use rigid joints unless otherwise indicated.4. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 or MSS SP-58

unless indicated otherwise.5. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless

indicated otherwise.

C. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or groovedcouplings to allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded,soldered, or threaded connections.

D. Valves: Provide valves where indicated:


PAGE 6 OF 15


2.2 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black, using one of the following jointtypes:1. Welded Joints: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; AWS

D1.1 welded.2. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3, malleable iron fittings.3. Fittings: ASTM B 16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel

welding type fittings.4. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1 welded.

a. 3/4" to 2" - threaded cast iron.b. 2-2/12" and larger - welded or grooved mechanical joint.

B. Joints 2-2/12" and larger:1. Welded in accordance with AWS D1.12. Grooved in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C606.

a. Rigid Type Couplings: Housing cast with offsetting, angle pattern bolt pads toprovide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ANSIB31.1 and B31.9. Victaulic Style 07.

b. Flexible Type Couplings: Use in locations where vibration attenuation andstress relief are required. Victaulic Style 77.

c. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150flanged components. Victaulic Style 741.

C. Steel Pipe Sizes 12 Inch and Over: ASTM A53/A53M, 0.375 inch wall, black, usingone of the following joint types:1. Welded Joints: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type fittings; AWS

D1.1 welded.2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and

mechanical couplings.3. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), drawn, using one of thefollowing joint types:1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought

copper fittings.a. Solder: ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tin and

silver.b. Braze: 1 BCuP copper/silver alloy.

2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpledbranch tube.

3. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver.


PAGE 7 OF 15


4. Mechanical Joints: Copper press fittings as manufactured by Viega or Rigid ToolCo.a. Press fittings: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing

requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper pressfittings shall be EPDM.

2.3 EQUIPMENT/CONDENSATE DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), drawn; using one of thefollowing joint types:1. Solder Joints: ASME B16.18 cast brass/bronze or ASME B16.22 solder wrought

copper fittings; ASTM B32 lead-free solder, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony) or tinand silver.

2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, andmechanical couplings.

3. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony), or tin andsilver.

4. Mechanical Joints: Copper press fittings as manufactured by Viega or Rigid ToolCo.a. Press fittings: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing

requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper pressfittings shall be EPDM.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26.1. Fittings: ASTM D2466 or D2467, PVC.2. Joints: Solvent welded in accordance with ASTM D2855.


A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select

appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

B. Conform to ASME B31.9.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

D. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll,double hanger.

F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels withwelded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.


PAGE 8 OF 15


H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steelclamp.

J. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wroughtsteel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

K. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

L. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floorflange, and concrete pier or steel support.

M. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll andstand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

O. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

P. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

Q. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threadedconnection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching toforms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

R. In grooved installations, use rigid couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads orwith wedge shaped grooves in header piping to permit support and hanging inaccordance with ASME B31.9.

2.5 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRICCONNECTIONS

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under:1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.3. Stainless Steel Pipe: 300 psig stainless steel threaded union. Vic-Press 304tm ends.

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.2. Copper Piping: Bronze.3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene.4. Use grooved joint flange adapters in grooved piping systems. Victaulic Style 741.


PAGE 9 OF 15


C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curvedhousing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket,and bolts to secure and compress gasket.1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.2. Mechanical Couplings: Comply with ASTM F1476.3. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron galvanized to engage and lock, designed to

permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.4. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from -30 degrees

F to 230 degrees F.5. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.6. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.

D. Dielectric Connections: Union or waterway fitting with water impervious isolationbarrier and one galvanized or plated steel end and one copper tube end, end types tomatch pipe joint types used.

2.6 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com.2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, non-rising stem, lockshield stem,

inside screw with backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder ends.

C. Over 2 Inches:1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and

yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.2. Provide chain-type operator for valves installed in mechanical rooms 10'-0" above

finished floor.

2.7 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES


B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:


PAGE 10 OF 15


1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, rising stem and handwheel, insidescrew with backseating stem, renewable composition disc and bronze seat, solderends.

C. Over 2 Inches:1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and

yoke, rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and disc, flanged ends.2. Provide chain-type operator for valves installed in mechanical rooms 10'-0" above

finished floor.

2.8 BALL VALVES


B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:1. Bronze one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,

lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.

C. Over 2 Inches:

2.9 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.2. Crane Co.: www.cranevalve.com.3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, grooved,or ______ ends, extended neck.

C. Disc: Construct of aluminum bronze, chrome plated ductile iron, stainless steel, ductileiron with EPDM enscapsulation, Buna-N enscapsulation, or _________________.

D. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends,extended neck.

E. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

F. Operator: Handwheel and gear drive.


PAGE 11 OF 15


2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Up To and Including 2 Inches:1. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc,

solder ends.

C. Over 2 Inches:1. Iron body, bronze or ________ trim, stainless steel, bronze, bronze faced rotating,

or _____________ swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged, grooved, or__________ ends.

2. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable discand seat, flanged ends.

2.11 FLOW CONTROLS

A. Manufacturers:1. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.2. Griswold Controls: www.griswoldcontrols.com.3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet,temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.

C. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressurerange of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure3.5 psi.

D. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressurerange of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure3.5 psi psi.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Prepare pipe for grooved mechanical joints as required by coupling manufacturer.


PAGE 12 OF 15


C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

D. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.

E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporaryplugs or caps.

F. After completion, flush, clean and fill systems.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install heating water, glycol, condenser water, and engine exhaust piping to 1requirements.

C. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.

D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

E. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interfere with use of space.

F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

H. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.

I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment. Refer to Section 230516.

J. Grooved Joints:1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation

instructions.2. Gaskets to be suitable for the intended service, molded, and produced by the

coupling manufacturer.

K. Inserts:1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over

4 inches.4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide

through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.


PAGE 13 OF 15


L. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for

pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of

connected horizontal piping.7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple or trapeze hangers.8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 099000. Hangers

and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces arenot considered exposed.

M. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation ofinsulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 220719.

N. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and locationof access doors with Section 08311.

O. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.

P. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brushclean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

Q. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.

R. All piping supports shall be secured to the building structure.

S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Ball valve operators shallallow for full range of operation.

T. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be installed in accordance with themanufacturer's latest installation recommendations. Grooved joints shall be clean andfree from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.The grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide on-sitetraining for contractor's personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove,and installation of grooved joint products. The manufacturer's representative shallperiodically visit the jobsite and review the installation. Contractor shall remove andreplace any joints deemed improperly installed.


PAGE 14 OF 15


U. Install Vic-Press 304tm in accordance with the manufacturer's latest installationinstructions. Pipe shall be certified for use with the Vic-Press 304tm piping system.Pipe shall be square cut, +/- 0.30", properly deburred, and cleaned. Mark pipe ends atrequired locations, using a gauge supplied by Victaulic, to insure full insertion into thecoupling or fitting during assembley. Use a Victaulic ' PFT ' series tool with the propersized jaw for pressing.

V. Press Connections:1. Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers

installation instructions.2. The tubing shall b fully inserted into the fitting and the tube marked at the shoulder

of the fitting.3. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the

tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting.4. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.1. 1/2 inch and 3/4 inch: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. 1 inch: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. 2-1/2 inch: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 3 inch: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. 4 inch: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.1. 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.3. 1-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. 2 inches: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 2-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. 3 inches: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.7. 4 inches: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.8. 6 inches: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

C. Hanger Spacing for Plastic Piping.1. 1/2 inch: Maximum span, 42 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.2. 3/4 inch: Maximum span, 45 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. 1 inch: Maximum span, 51 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.4. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 57 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 1-1/2 inches: Maximum span, 63 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.6. 2 inches: Maximum span, 69 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


PAGE 15 OF 15


7. 3 inches: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.8. 4 inches: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 232114 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Air vents.

B. Strainers.

C. Pressure-temperature test plugs.

D. Balancing valves.


A. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping.


1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 -Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of MechanicalEngineers; 2007.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01330 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies requiredfor this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, andfinishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

C. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority havingjurisdiction.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joiningprocedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubricationinstructions, and replacement parts list.


PAGE 2 OF 4



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.



B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place untilinstallation.

C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completingsections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR VENTS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber.

C. Float Type:1. Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float,

stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature andpressure; with isolating valve.

2.2 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.2. Green Country Filtration: greencountryfiltration.com.3. WEAMCO: www.weamco.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Size 2 inch and Under:1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch

stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch:


PAGE 3 OF 4


1. Flanged iron body for 175 psi working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainlesssteel perforated screen.

D. Size 5 inch and Larger:1. Flanged iron body for 175 psi working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch

stainless steel perforated screen.

2.3 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers:1. Peterson Equipment Company Inc: www.petesplug.com.2. Sisco Manufacturing Company Inc: www.siscomfg.com.3. Ferguson Enterprises Inc: www.fnw.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Brass body designed to receive temperature or pressure probe withremovable protective cap, and Neoprene rated for minimum 200 degrees F.

C. Application: Use extended length plugs to clear insulated piping.

2.4 BALANCING VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.3. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Size 2 inch and Smaller:1. Provide ball or globe style with flow balancing, flow measurement, and shut-off

capabilities, memory stops, minimum of two metering ports and NPT threaded orsoldered connections.

2. Metal construction materials consist of bronze or brass.3. Non-metal construction materials consist of Teflon, EPDM, or engineered resin.

C. Size 2.5 inch and Larger:1. Provide ball, globe, or butterfly style with flow balancing, flow measurement, and

shut-off capabilities, memory stops, minimum of two metering ports and flanged,grooved, or weld end connections.

2. Valve body construction materials consist of cast iron, carbon steel, or ductile iron.3. Internal components construction materials consist of brass, aluminum bronze,

bronze, Teflon, EPDM, NORYL, or engineered resin.


PAGE 4 OF 4


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

C. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide venttubing to nearest drain.

D. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

E. Provide manual balancing valves on water outlet from air handling equipment,radiation, unit heaters, fan coil units etc. as indicated on the equipment schedules andpiping diagrams.

F. Provide pressure-temperature test ports on water inlet and outlet from small terminalheating/cooling equipment as indicated on the equipment schedule and piping diagrams.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 017000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating tomaintenance service.

B. Explain corrective actions to Owner's maintenance personnel in person.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 9


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping.

B. Refrigerant.

C. Moisture and liquid indicators.

D. Valves.

E. Filter-driers.

F. Solenoid valves.

G. Expansion valves.


A. Section 083100 - Access Doors and Panels.

B. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating.

C. Section 23 05 50 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

D. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

E. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

F. Section 23 81 27 - Small Split-System Heating and Cooling.

G. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.


A. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute; 2009.

B. AHRI 750 - Standard for Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves;Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.

C. AHRI 760 - Standard for Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With VolatileRefrigerants; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.

D. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society ofHeating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15).


PAGE 2 OF 9


E. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; AmericanSociety of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc..

F. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; TheAmerican Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

G. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes; The AmericanSociety of Mechanical Engineers.

H. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; The AmericanSociety of Mechanical Engineers.

I. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of MechanicalEngineers (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

J. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioningand Refrigeration Field Service; 2013.

K. AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;American Welding Society; 2011 and errata.

L. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture,Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of theValve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.

M. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components arecompatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Providenecessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing areconsistently provided.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicatedotherwise.

C. Liquid Indicators:1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.

D. Valves:1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.3. Use check valves on compressor discharge.


PAGE 3 OF 9


E. Filter-Driers:1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic

expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.2. Use sealed filter-driers in lines smaller than 1/2 inch outside diameter.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturerscatalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

C. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerantused, showing compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, criticaldimensions, and sizes.

E. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacityof trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

F. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, andisolation for servicing.

H. Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigerationaccessories on record drawings.

I. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spareparts lists.

J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: One, each containing everything required to conduct

one test.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specifiedin this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.


A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.


PAGE 4 OF 9


B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable forthe purpose indicated.


A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end capsand plugs in place until installation.

C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment,until connected into system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn or O60 soft annealed.1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy.

B. Pipe Supports and Anchors:1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, selectappropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.7. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous

threaded.8. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for

threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs forattaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.2 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zeroand global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.

B. Refrigerant: [R-410a] as defined in ASHRAE Std 34.

2.3 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A. Manufacturers:


PAGE 5 OF 9


1. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com.3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends,sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge andplastic cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F and maximum workingpressure of 500 psi.

2.4 VALVES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hansen Technologies Corporation: www.hantech.com.2. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.3. Flomatic Valves: www.flomatic.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Diaphragm Packless Valves:1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze

and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring,nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximumworking pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F.

C. Packed Angle Valves:1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper

gasket, rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder orflared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperatureof 275 degrees F.

D. Ball Valves:1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube

extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ringstem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperatureof 300 degrees F.

E. Service Valves:

2.5 FILTER-DRIERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Flow Controls Division of Emerson Electric: www.emersonflowcontrols.com.2. Parker Hannifin/Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: www.parker.com.3. Sporlan Valve Company: www.sporlan.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


PAGE 6 OF 9


B. Performance:1. Flow Capacity - Liquid Line: As indicated in schedule, minimum, rated in

accordance with AHRI 710.2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi, maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator

capacity.3. Design Working Pressure: 650 psi, minimum.

C. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant,activated alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondaryfiltration to 20 microns; of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.

D. Construction: UL listed.1. Sealed Type: Copper shell.2. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.

2.6 SOLENOID VALVES


B. Valve: AHRI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, syntheticseat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operation in case ofcoil failure), integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximumworking pressure of 500 psi.

C. Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil,moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integraljunction box with pilot light.

2.7 EXPANSION VALVES


B. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body,internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inletstrainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulbwell.


PAGE 7 OF 9


C. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine availablepressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressureand minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load andexcessively oversized at part load.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, andmaintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping onepercent in direction of oil return.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment.

F. Inserts:1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of

reinforced concrete beams.3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over

4 inches.4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide

through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and

adjacent work.4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.


PAGE 8 OF 9


5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently ofconnected horizontal piping.

6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, providemultiple or trapeze hangers.

7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

H. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, andprovide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction offlow.

I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

J. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of accessdoors with Section 083100.

K. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, andapply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

M. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 099000.

N. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section and Section 230716.

O. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and fordisposal of refrigerant.

P. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suctionline.

Q. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributorconnected to evaporator.

R. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

S. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Section 262717.


A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi. Perform final tests at 27 inchesvacuum and 200 psi using halide torch. Test to no leakage.


PAGE 9 OF 9


3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.1. 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, and 7/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size,

1/4 inch.2. 1-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.3. 1-3/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.4. 1-5/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.5. 2-1/8 inch OD: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PAGE 1 OF 6


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal ductwork.

B. Nonmetal ductwork.

C. Duct cleaning.


A. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint orcoating.

B. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.

C. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories.

D. Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

E. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.


A. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2009.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.

D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate; 2010.

E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet andPlate [Metric]; 2010.

F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of BuildingMaterials; 2013a.

G. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;2012.

H. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) inMasonry Elements; 2012.


PAGE 2 OF 6


I. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2013.

J. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in ConcreteElements; 2013.

K. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

L. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air ConditioningSystems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

M. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and AirConditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition.

N. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.

O. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; UnderwritersLaboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, andconfiguration prior to start of work for Low pressure class and higher systems.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Recordchanges in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specifiedin this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.


A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.


PAGE 3 OF 6



A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended bysealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of ductsealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT ASSEMBLIES

A. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1 inch w.g. pressure class,galvanized steel.

C. Return and Relief: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

D. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, aluminum.

E. Outside Air Intake: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653MFS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating.

B. Aluminum for Ducts: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength.

C. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint

configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturerfor pressure class of ducts.

2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.5. Products:

a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Hardcast Iron-Grip 601 Water Based Duct Sealant: www.carlislehvac.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

D. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded oneend, or continuously threaded.


PAGE 4 OF 6


E. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Other Types: As required.7. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards and as indicated.

B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Sizeround duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAEHandbook - Fundamentals.

C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of ducton centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provideair foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acousticallining is indicated.

F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergencedownstream.

G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance withSMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

2.4 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Insulated Flexible Ducts;1. Manufacturers;

a. Quietflex, Hart and Cooley, Therma Flexb. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. UL 181, Class 1, polyethylene core supported by helically wound spring steel wire;R-6 fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film, GREENGUARDcertified.


PAGE 5 OF 6


a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative.b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on openductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

D. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with adhesive.

E. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes insidelining.

F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers andcontrollers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, completewith metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Whereopenings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metalring.

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating andmaintenance activities.

H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smallerwith crimp in direction of air flow.

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

J. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feetmaximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that couldbe harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequateaccess into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

END OF SECTION


PAGE 6 OF 6


SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Air turning devices/extractors.

B. Duct access doors.

C. Duct test holes.

D. Flexible duct connections.

E. Volume control dampers.


A. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.

B. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.


A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume controldampers, duct access doors, duct test holes, and hardware used.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume controldampers, duct access doors, and duct test holes.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.


PAGE 2 OF 5




B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UnderwritersLaboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steelconstruction, with push-pull operator strap.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers:1. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.3. SEMCO Incorporated: www.semcoinc.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and asindicated.

C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quickfastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulationwith sheet metal cover.

D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.


PAGE 3 OF 5


1. Products:2. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Test Port with Red Cap with O-Ring Seal:

www.carlislehvac.com.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and asindicated.

B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA

90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick aluminum.

2.5 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Greenheck, Inc: www.greenheck.com2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and asindicated.

C. Splitter Dampers:1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages

heavier for sizes over 24 inches.2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with

continuous hinge or rod.3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action,

flanged bushing with set screw .

D. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. Onmultiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, orsintered bronze bearings.

E. Quadrants:1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets,

bases, or adapters.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2090A

























SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PAGE 4 OF 5


2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris out ofducts during construction.1. Thickness: 2 mils.2. High tack water based adhesive.3. UV stable light blue color.4. Elongation Before Break: 325 percent, minimum.5. Products:

a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Duct Protection Film: www.carlislehvac.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.6. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, andfollow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 233100 forduct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers and elsewhere as indicated. Provideminimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and asindicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior tofabrication.

C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

D. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible ductconnections immediately adjacent to the equipment.

E. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connectionsimmediately adjacent to the equipment.

F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems wherebranches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2duct widths from duct take-off.

G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.







































SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PAGE 5 OF 5


H. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers,regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or registerassembly.

END OF SECTION










SECTION 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PAGE 1 OF 2


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.


A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting - Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.

B. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Systems..

C. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings.

D. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.


A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement andControl Association International, Inc.; 2012.

B. ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air-Conditioningand Refrigeration Institute; 2001.

C. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006(R2011).

D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets andinlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule ofoutlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.


A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.

SECTION 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PAGE 2 OF 2




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. MANUFACTURERS:1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.2. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Refer to drawings for type, fabrication, frame and color.

2.2 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, withblades set at 45 degrees, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

C. Color: To be selected by Amenta Emma Architects from manufacturer's standardrange.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position toconform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 09.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 238127 SMALL SPLIT-SYSTEM HEATING AND COOLING

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL




A. Air cooled condensing units.

B. Indoor ductless fan & coil units.

C. Controls.


A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Mounting pad for outdoor unit.

B. Section 15940 - HVAC Sequence of Operations.

C. Section 232300- Refrigerant Piping.

D. Section 230513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.

E. Section 230548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Systems.

F. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

G. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls.

H. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connectionsand installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components.


A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning andAir-Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and RefrigerationInstitute; 2008.

B. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating,and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.

C. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units;Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.


PAGE 2 OF 5


D. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society ofHeating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAEStd 15).

E. ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement RefrigerantCompressors and Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating andAir-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010.

F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2011.

G. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air ConditioningSystems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

I. UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical;Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01330 -Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data,and wiring diagrams.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of fieldconnections.

D. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and partslisting.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out inOwner s name and registered with manufacturer.

I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance ofproject.1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.


PAGE 3 OF 5


2. Extra Filters: One of each type and size.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type ofproducts specified in this section, with minimum twenty years of documentedexperience.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01770 - Project Closeout, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturers parts and labor warranty for refrigeration compressors.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ductless Split Systems: Mitsubishi, Daikin, Sanyo.

B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matchedfactory-engineered and assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed. 1. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units,

factory cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction and liquidline.

B. Performance Requirements: See Schedule for all requirements.1. Efficiency: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP)

not less than requirements of ASHRAE Std 90.1; seasonal efficiency to ASHRAEStd 103.

C. Electrical Characteristics:1. Refer to the schedule on the plans for electrical requirements.2. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under

provisions of Section 262717.

2.3 INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTLESS SYSTEMS

A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting ofcabinet, supply fan, evaporator coil, and controls; wired for single power connectionwith control transformer.1. Location: High-wall.2. Cabinet: Manufacturer's standard materials..


PAGE 4 OF 5


a. Finish: White.3. Fan: Line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor.4. Filter return air with washable, antioxidant pre-filter and a pleated anti-allergy

enzyme filter.

B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drainpan sloped in all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections,restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve.1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL listed.

2.4 OUTDOOR UNITS

A. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, withcompressor and condenser.1. Comply with AHRI 210.2. Refrigerant: R-410A.3. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors

with safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner.4. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in

accordance with ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed.

B. Compressor: ARI 520; hermetic, 3600 rpm, resiliently mounted integral withcondenser, with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motoroverload protection, service valves and drier. Provide time delay control to preventshort cycling .

C. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with directdrive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard.1. Condenser Fans: Direct-drive propeller type.2. Condenser Fan Motor: Enclosed, 1-phase type, permanently lubricated.

D. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch(automatic reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line). 1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves.2. Provide heat pump reversing valves (where specified)

E. Operating Controls:1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting. See equipment

schedule for control type and Section 230993 for Sequence of Operations.2. Low Ambient Kit: Provide refrigerant pressure switch to cycle condenser fan on

when condenser refrigerant pressure is above 285 psig and off when pressure dropsbelow 140 psig for operation to 0 degrees F.


PAGE 5 OF 5


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated onshop drawings.

B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of localauthorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

C. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.

D. Pipe discharge from internal condensate pump to drain location indicated on the plans.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260501 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PAGE 1 OF 2


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical demolition.


A. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements foralterations work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.PART 2 PRODUCTS



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.



D. Report discrepancies to Amenta Emma Architects before disturbing existinginstallation.


3.2 PREPARATION


B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in serviceduring construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment orcircuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

SECTION 260501 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PAGE 2 OF 2


B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessibleceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets ifconduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandonedoutlets that are not removed.

E. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipmentthat has been removed.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, andother accessories.

G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extensionwork.

H. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modifyinstallation or provide access panel as appropriate.

I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existingelectrical installations, or as specified.


A. See Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additionalrequirements.

B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.

C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.

D. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean allexterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps,ballasts and broken electrical parts.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PAGE 1 OF 11


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Metal-clad cable.

C. Wiring connectors.

D. Electrical tape.

E. Heat shrink tubing.

F. Oxide inhibiting compound.



B. Section 260501 - Minor Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/orextension of existing electrical conductors and cables.

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additionalrequirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.


A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire forElectrical Purposes; 2010.

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire CombinationUnilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved2009).

E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl ChloridePlastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.

F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting andElectrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.


PAGE 2 OF 11


G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2010.

H. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC);National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

I. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution ofElectrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMAWC 70/ICEA S-95-658).

J. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment andSystems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.

L. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

M. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

N. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; CurrentEdition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide

terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.2. Notify Amenta Emma Architects of any conflicts with or deviations from the

contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



PAGE 3 OF 11


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets forconductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction,ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70and product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwiseindicated, permitted, or required.

C. Metal-clad cable permitted only as follows:1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:

a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junctionboxes to luminaires.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and underraised floors for branch circuits up to 20 A.1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit

homerun from first outlet to panelboard.2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:

a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction.b. Where exposed to view.c. Where exposed to damage.d. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket

listed as suitable for those locations.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes,wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.


PAGE 4 OF 11


D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying withUL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL44.

G. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 260526.

H. Conductor Material:1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this

project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated

copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787Munless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

I. Minimum Conductor Size:1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

a. Exceptions:1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

J. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less thanapplicable minimum size requirements specified.

K. Conductor Color Coding:1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority

having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.3. Color Code:

a. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers:

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%2083

































SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PAGE 5 OF 11


1. Copper Building Wire:a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor Stranding:1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as

indicated below.a. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with

labeled maximum temperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type forluminaires with labeled maximum temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

2.4 METAL-CLAD CABLE

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com.2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569,and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Conductor Stranding:1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.

F. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.

G. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.









































H. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required forenvironment of installed location.

2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use withthe conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL486C as applicable.

B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 260526.

C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring

connectors.2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or

compression connectors.

D. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with

terminations designed for terminal lugs.2. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can

accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but notless than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

3. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitatedisconnection.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors orcompression connectors where connectors are required.

5. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals forconnections to terminal screws.

6. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.

E. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for usewith conductors without stripping insulation.

F. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated springconnectors.

G. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standardapplications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealantand listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com.b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com.c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com.











http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=UL%20486C

































d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

H. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.1. Manufacturers:

a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

I. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimpconfiguration.1. Manufacturers:


J. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configurationsuitable for connection to be made.1. Manufacturers:


2.6 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com.b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color codeindicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistantto abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperatureenvironment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed ascomplying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion,corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F andsuitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.a. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

4. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape,complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for














































continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266degrees F overload service.

5. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimumthickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176degrees F.

6. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or withoutadhesive, oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimumthickness of 7 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221degrees F.

7. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated toflexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables tobe installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properlysized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors andcables.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Circuiting Requirements:1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact

routing required.3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location

shown.










































5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, andpower-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA70.

7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits areshown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/groundedconductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phasesinstalled in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/groundedconductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance withNECA 1.

D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.

E. Installation in Raceway:1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other

contaminants.2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not

recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitablesupports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provideindependent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways,piping, ductwork, or other systems.1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling

support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors andcables to lay on ceiling tiles.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceedspermissible limits.

G. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings.b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors

or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.

H. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.









http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NFPA%2070









http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=NECA%20NEIS%201



























I. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide aminimum of 5 feet of slack.

J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and otherequipment enclosures.

K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungroundedconductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways

or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections

without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,

oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connectorsurfaces.

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer'srecommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommendedtools and dies.

M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methodssuitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalentto unspliced conductors.1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,

electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing

electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinylinsulating electrical tape.

b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads, firstapply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount ofrubber splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulatingelectrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture

sealing electrical tape.b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply

outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.














































O. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 260553.

P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.

Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipmentand devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operatingsystem.


A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulationresistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductorslisted as optional is not required.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION




















SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.


A. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additionalrequirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor colorcoding.

B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2010.

B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment andSystems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.

D. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components,conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessaryfor a complete grounding and bonding system.

SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PAGE 2 OF 3


C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less thanapplicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 260519:1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the

conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors,or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

3. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com.b. Burndy: www.burndy.com.c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has beencompleted.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner inaccordance with NECA 1.

C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.





















SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PAGE 3 OF 3


1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connectionswithout cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strandsto facilitate insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points,and contact surfaces.

3. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer'srecommended torque settings.

4. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommendedtools and dies.

D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section260553.


A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitationwithin the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not complywith specified requirements.

END OF SECTION


























SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and otherelectrical work.


A. Section 260534 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements forconduits.

B. Section 260537 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.

C. Section 265100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements forinterior luminaires.


A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatingson Iron and Steel Products; 2013.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron andSteel Hardware; 2009.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron andSteel; 2013.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing ManufacturersAssociation; 2004.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2010.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment

and components to be installed.2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials

required for installation.3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting

surfaces at the installed locations.

SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PAGE 2 OF 5


4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment andother potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Amenta Emma Architects of any conflicts with or deviations from thecontract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with applicable building code.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,

where applicable.3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select

in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to besupported with a minimum safety factor of _____. Include consideration forvibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 andproduct listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supportsunless specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environmentwhere installed.a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless

otherwise indicated.b. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.c. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with

ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to besupported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.3. Manufacturers:

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20A123/A123M






SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PAGE 3 OF 5


a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.1. Manufacturers:


b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metalchannel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required forfield-assembly of supports.1. Comply with MFMA-4.2. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.e. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings,

accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

F. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and

fastener types indicated for the specified applications.2. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.3. Wood: Use wood screws.4. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.5. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.














































B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner inaccordance with NECA 1.

C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support frompiping, ductwork, or other systems.

D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Amenta Emma Architects, do not providesupport from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Amenta Emma Architects, do not providesupport from roof deck.

F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval ofStructural Engineer.

G. Equipment Support and Attachment:1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to

support equipment as required.2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted

on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp

locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it

relies on its own weight for support.

H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

I. Remove temporary supports.


A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.






































D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachmentcomponents.

END OF SECTION









SECTION 260534 CONDUIT

PAGE 1 OF 8


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

B. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

C. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

D. Conduit fittings.



B. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal cladcable (Type MC), armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems,including uses permitted.

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.

D. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 260535 - Surface Raceways.

F. Section 260537 - Boxes.

G. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.


A. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT);2005.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2010.

C. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC);National Electrical Contractors Association; 2003.

D. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, ElectricalMetallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012(ANSI/NEMA FB 1).


PAGE 2 OF 8


E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.

F. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

H. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.

I. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,

including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork,

piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or byothers.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, andequipment installed under other sections or by others.

4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preservethe integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is

complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets forconduits and fittings.




PAGE 3 OF 8



A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted byNFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit typesindicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies,comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particularapplication is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

D. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

E. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metalconduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

G. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

H. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reusedonly where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, andintegrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 260526.

C. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete racewaysystem.

D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.


























SECTION 260534 CONDUIT PAGE 4 OF 8


E. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed andlabeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to beused.

C. Fittings:1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled ascomplying with UL 514B.

3. Material: Use steel.

2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexiblemetal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.


a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.











































b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


3. Material: Use steel.

2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Manufacturers:1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying withANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.


a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


3. Material: Use steel.4. Connectors and Couplings: Use set-screw type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.5. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet

locations.PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.





















http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20C80.3






















3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) in accordance with NECA 111.

D. Conduit Routing:1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact

routing required.3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.b. Mechanical equipment rooms.c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:a. Across floors.b. Across roofs.c. Across top of parapet walls.d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends

between pull points.8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and

at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other

systems.12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces.

E. Conduit Support:1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529

using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from

piping, ductwork, or other systems.3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling

support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to layon ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.













































a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations toprovide space between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multipleparallel surface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with

accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.8. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

F. Connections and Terminations:1. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to

another.2. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage

of liquid into connectors.3. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to

protect conductors.4. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and

electrical continuity.

G. Penetrations:1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings

and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.

Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.4. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible

point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.5. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain

integrity of membrane.6. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment

openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations.Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserveintegrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locationsof penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

7. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other

elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.

H. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provideexpansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductorsor connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or

deflection.2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

















































I. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potentialsubstantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealingcompound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. Thisincludes, but is not limited to:1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior

spaces.

J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.



B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended bymanufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provideprotection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until readyfor installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION


























SECTION 260535 SURFACE RACEWAYS

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface raceway systems.


A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260534 - Conduit.

D. Section 260537 - Boxes.

E. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

F. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles.



B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.

C. UL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the placement of raceways with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.

installed under other sections or by others.2. Coordinate rough-in locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 and

conduit provided under Section 260534 as required for installation of racewaysprovided under this section.

3. Verify minimum sizes of raceways with the actual conductors and components tobe installed.


B. Sequencing:1. Do not install raceways until final surface finishes and painting are complete.


PAGE 2 OF 4


2. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of raceways iscomplete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includingdimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes,service condition requirements, and accessories.1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors

and cables.




A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a completeraceway system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and productlisting.

2.2 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. MonoSystems, Inc: www.monosystems.com.3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL



PAGE 3 OF 4


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations andare properly sized in accordance with NFPA 70 to accommodate raceways.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surfacefinishes are complete, including painting.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install raceways in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install raceways plumb and level.

D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70,including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used aspullboxes. Increase size of wireway where necessary.

E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 260529 at intervals complyingwith NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.

F. Close unused raceway openings.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

H. Identify raceways in accordance with Section 260553.



B. Inspect raceways for damage and defects.

C. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore tomatch original factory finish.


PAGE 4 OF 4


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260537 BOXES

PAGE 1 OF 6


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction andpull boxes.



B. Section 083100 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealedboxes.

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 260534 - Conduit:1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number

of bends between pulling points.

F. Section 260535 - Surface Raceways:1. Accessory boxes designed specifically for surface raceway systems.

G. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

H. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices:1. Wall plates.



B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2010.

C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, ElectricalMetallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012(ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports;National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS1).

SECTION 260537 BOXES

PAGE 2 OF 6


E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.


G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; CurrentEdition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,

equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spacesand working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearancerequirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement ofconductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement ofconnected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment,etc. installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of

flush-mounted boxes where indicated.8. Notify Amenta Emma Architects of any conflicts with or deviations from the

contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets forcabinets and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, andunderground boxes/enclosures.
















SECTION 260537 BOXES PAGE 3 OF 6





A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES

A. General Requirements:1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as

permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete

raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than

applicable minimum size requirements specified.5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction andPull Boxes:1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless

otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketedcovers.

3. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and deviceconfiguration where required.

4. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.5. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.6. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying

with UL 514A.7. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type

and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodatemounting of luminaire where required.

8. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Donot use field-connected gangable boxes.

9. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch

square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade size.













































b. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38mm) trade size.

10. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.11. Manufacturers:


b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-bell.com.c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-raco.com.d. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.f. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standardswhere mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltagesystems.

F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to besurface-mounted.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits areindicated or permitted.

H. Box Locations:








































1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section083100 as required where approved by the Architect.

2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same

location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back.

Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.6. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of

walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.7. Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required

fire-resistance will not be reduced.a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;

provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed withindividual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listedputty pads.

b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches orsuch that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches forany 100 square feet of wall area.

8. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation ofconductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pullingpoints in accordance with Section 260534.

9. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicatedor approved by the Architect:a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.c. Electrical rooms.d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

I. Box Supports:1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes

(other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduitconnections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping,ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling gridor ceiling support system.

4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud inhollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessivemovement.

J. Install boxes plumb and level.

















































K. Flush-Mounted Boxes:1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster,

etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back fromfinished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box orassociated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete,tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8inch at the edge of the box.

L. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

M. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.

N. Close unused box openings.

O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices orequipment installed or designated for future use.

P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

Q. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 260553.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreignmaterial until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION





























SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PAGE 1 OF 6


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Warning signs and labels.


A. Section 099000 - Painting and Coating.

B. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color codingfor power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-markedwallplates.


A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility SafetySigns; 2011.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.


D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2012.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified

prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended

ceilings, until identification products have been installed.


PAGE 2 OF 6


2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting arecomplete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.




A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommendedby manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain thatare not already identified in accordance with specified requirements.

B. Identification for Equipment:1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and

control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.a. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.2) Identify voltage and phase.3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not

within sight of equipment.4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards

with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to

identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares andspaces.

b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:1) Identify voltage and phase.2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not

within sight of equipment.c. Time Switches:

1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include location.2. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical

equipment.3. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where

permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70.


PAGE 3 OF 6


4. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment withremote disconnecting means.

5. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flashhazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrialcontrol panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely torequire examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word

message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do notoperate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protectionequipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section

260519.2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for

ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each pieceof feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders orbranch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:1. Manufacturers:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com.b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.c. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Materials:a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.

3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electricallynon-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch;engraved text.

4. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:1. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.b. Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com.c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


PAGE 4 OF 6


2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat,and abrasion resistant.a. Use only for indoor locations.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten textunless otherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.2. Legend:

a. Equipment designation or other approved description.3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.4. Minimum Text Height:

a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.1) 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase Equipment: White text on black background.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.2. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com.3. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth,wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve,plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable tobe identified.1. Do not use self-adhesive type markers.

C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nyloncable ties.

D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwiseindicated.

F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.


PAGE 5 OF 6


2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com.2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com.3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinylcloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers.

C. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesivevinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

D. Minimum Size:1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

E. Legend:1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

F. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment,servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with

rear access.4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item beingidentified.


PAGE 6 OF 6


D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and tointerior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubblesor wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.



B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or othersigns of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262717 EQUIPMENT WIRING

PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical connections to equipment.


A. Section 260534 - Conduit.

B. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V andLess).

C. Section 260537 - Boxes.

D. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.


A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).



A. Coordination:1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,

and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is

required.2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



PAGE 2 OF 3



A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided forequipment.1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with

identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of

branch circuit overcurrent protection.

B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 262726.

C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 260534.

D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 260519.

E. Boxes: As specified in Section 260537.

2.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONSPART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.


A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexibleconduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable fortemperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes andequipment connection boxes.


PAGE 3 OF 3


G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices tocomplete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to completeequipment wiring requirements.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES

PAGE 1 OF 6


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Wall plates.


A. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables : Manufactured wiring systems for use with access floor boxes with compatiblepre-wired connectors .

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260535 - Surface Raceways: Surface raceway systems, including multioutletassemblies.

D. Section 260537 - Boxes.

E. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

F. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment.


A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; FederalSpecification; Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (GeneralSpecification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2010.

D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National ElectricalManufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).



PAGE 2 OF 6


G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, IncludingAll Revisions.

J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.

installed under other sections or by others.2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical

requirements of actual equipment to be installed.3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed

door swings.4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face

block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.5. Notify Amenta Emma Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contract

documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS




B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.

D. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

E. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


PAGE 3 OF 6


F. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish productsproduced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for loadserved.

B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle withampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

C. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

D. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.

2.3 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silveralloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed ascomplying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on thedrawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding

clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2.4 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com.4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, andlisted as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types asindicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding

clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.


PAGE 4 OF 6


C. Convenience Receptacles:1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFI Receptacles:1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate

ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying withUL 943, class A.

2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.6. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control

system, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the samemanufacturer in locations indicated.

B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of

corresponding wiring devices.2. Size: Standard; __________.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heightsand are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance withNFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready forconnection to wiring devices.





























SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PAGE 5 OF 6


F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and,where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standardsunless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required forinstallation of wiring devices provided under this section.1. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise

indicated.2. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the

same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under acommon wall plate.

3. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches fromedge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Amenta EmmaArchitects to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

4. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinkingfountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage betweenadjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Donot connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screwterminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present,do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuitequipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

I. Install wall switches with OFF position down.






































SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PAGE 6 OF 6


J. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontallymounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

K. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough openingcompletely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installedoutlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates inlieu of meeting this requirement.

L. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devicesinstalled or designated for future use.


A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.

B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer'sinstructions.

F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore tomatch original factory finish.

END OF SECTION




























SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PAGE 1 OF 5


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires.


A. Section 260537 - Boxes.

B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products andrequirements.

C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.



B. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems;National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

C. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; NationalElectrical Contractors Association; 2006.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All ApplicableAmendments and Supplements.

E. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under

other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports,anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires andassociated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork,piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and otherpotential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Notify Amenta Emma Architects of any conflicts or deviations from the contractdocuments to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.


PAGE 2 OF 5


1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includingdetailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mountingrequirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installedaccessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearlymarked with all proposed features.



1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commerciallighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's writteninstructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage untilready for installation.


A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during andafter installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.

C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts.PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - LUMINAIRES

A. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com.

B. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.

C. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.


PAGE 3 OF 5


D. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, except where individualluminaire types are designated with substitutions not permitted.

2.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

B. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, except where individualluminaire types are designated with substitutions not permitted.

2.3 LUMINAIRES

A. Manufacturers:1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com.2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, whereapplicable.

D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and allsockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position,energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes,wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for acomplete operating system.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and servicewithout any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heightsand are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.


PAGE 4 OF 5


D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready forconnection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required forinstallation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1(general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industriallighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacentluminaires.

E. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling

support system is certified as suitable to do so.3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or

framing members or to building structure.4. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four

corners.5. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s),

minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire tobuilding structure.

6. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified foradditional requirements.

F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Install lamps in each luminaire.


PAGE 5 OF 5




B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repairor replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Amenta Emma Architects.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated oras directed by Amenta Emma Architects. Secure locking fittings in place.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industriallighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or otherforeign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Amenta EmmaArchitects, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION